<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<searchText>
	<page id="1">
		<raw><![CDATA[LV power circuit breakers and switch-disconnectorsMasterpact NT and NWCatalogue20]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[LV power circuit breakers and switch-disconnectorsMasterpact NT and NWCatalogue20]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="2">
		<raw><![CDATA[The original Masterpact has set a new standard for power circuit breakers around the world.Over the years, other major manufacturers have tried to keep up by developing products incorporating Masterpact’s most innovative features, including the breaking principle, modular design and the use of composite materials.Today, Schneider Electric continues to innovate with the Merlin Gerin Masterpact NT and NW ranges.In addition to the traditional features of power circuit breakers (withdrawability, discrimination and low maintenance), Masterpact now offers built-in communications and metering functions, all in optimised frame sizes.Masterpact NT and NW incorporate the latest technology to enhance both performance and safety. Easy to install, with user-friendly, intuitive operation and environment-friendly design, they are, quite simply, circuit breakers of their tim]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[The original Masterpact has set a new standard for power circuit breakers around the world.Over the years, other major manufacturers have tried to keep up by developing products incorporating Masterpact’s most innovative features, including the breaking principle, modular design and the use of composite materials.Today, Schneider Electric continues to innovate with the Merlin Gerin Masterpact NT and NW ranges.In addition to the traditional features of power circuit breakers (withdrawability, discrimination and low maintenance), Masterpact now offers built-in communications and metering functions, all in optimised frame sizes.Masterpact NT and NW incorporate the latest technology to enhance both performance and safety. Easy to install, with user-friendly, intuitive operation and environment-friendly design, they are, quite simply, circuit breakers of their tim]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="3">
		<raw><![CDATA[MasterpactGeneral content0Presentation6Functions and characteristics13Dimensions and connection63Electrical diagrams93Installation recommendations103Additional characteristics127Catalogue numbers, spare parts and order form13]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[MasterpactGeneral content0Presentation6Functions and characteristics13Dimensions and connection63Electrical diagrams93Installation recommendations103Additional characteristics127Catalogue numbers, spare parts and order form13]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="4">
		<raw><![CDATA[0The Guiding System, the new way to create your electrical installationsA comprehensive offer of products with consistent design The Guiding System is first and foremost a Merlin Gerin product offer covering all electrical distribution needs. However, what makes all the difference is that these products have been designed to operate togheter: mechanical and electrical compatibility, interoperability, modularity, communication. Thus the electrical installation is both optimised and more efficient: better continuity of supply, enhanced safety for people and equipment, guaranteed upgradeability, effective monitoring and control. Tools to simplify design and implementation With the Guiding System, you have a comprehensive range of tools - the Guiding Tools - that will help you increase your product knowledge and product utilisation. Of course this is in compliance with current standards and procedures. These tools include technical booklets and guides, design aid software, training courses, etc. and are regularly updated.For a genuine partnership with you Because each electrical installation is unique, there is no standard solution. With the Guiding System, the variety of combinations allows for genuine customisation solutions. You can create and implement electrical installations to meet your creative requirements and design knowledge. You and Merlin Gerin’s Guiding System form a genuine partnership. For more details on the Guiding System, consult www.merlin-gerin.co]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[0The Guiding System, the new way to create your electrical installationsA comprehensive offer of products with consistent design The Guiding System is first and foremost a Merlin Gerin product offer covering all electrical distribution needs. However, what makes all the difference is that these products have been designed to operate togheter: mechanical and electrical compatibility, interoperability, modularity, communication. Thus the electrical installation is both optimised and more efficient: better continuity of supply, enhanced safety for people and equipment, guaranteed upgradeability, effective monitoring and control. Tools to simplify design and implementation With the Guiding System, you have a comprehensive range of tools - the Guiding Tools - that will help you increase your product knowledge and product utilisation. Of course this is in compliance with current standards and procedures. These tools include technical booklets and guides, design aid software, training courses, etc. and are regularly updated.For a genuine partnership with you Because each electrical installation is unique, there is no standard solution. With the Guiding System, the variety of combinations allows for genuine customisation solutions. You can create and implement electrical installations to meet your creative requirements and design knowledge. You and Merlin Gerin’s Guiding System form a genuine partnership. For more details on the Guiding System, consult www.merlin-gerin.co]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="5">
		<raw><![CDATA[0A consistent design of offers from Medium Voltage to Low VoltageAll Merlin Gerin offers are designed according to electrical, mechanical and communication consistency rules. The products express this consistency by their overall design and shared ergonomics.Electrical consistency: Each product complies with or enhances system performance at coordination level: breaking capacity, Isc, temperature rise, etc. for more safety, continuity of supply (discrimination) or economic optimisation (cascading). The leading edge technologies employed in Merlin Gerin’s Guiding System ensure high performance levels in discrimination and cascading of protection devices, electrodynamic withstand of switches and current distributors, heat loss of devices, distribution blocks and enclosures. Likewise, inter-product ElectroMagnetic Compatibilty (EMC) is guaranteed.Discrimination guarantees co-ordination between the operating characteristics of serial-connected circuit-breakers. Should a fault occurs downstream, only the circuit-breaker placed immediately upstream from the fault will trip.Mechanical consistency: Each product adopts dimensional standards simplifying and optimising its use within the system. It shares the same accessories and auxiliaries and complies with global ergonomic choices (utilisation mode, operating mode, setting and configuration devices, tools, etc.) making its installation and operation within the system a simpler process.Direct connection of the Canalis KT busbar trunking on the Masterpact 3200 A circuit breaker.Communication consistency:Thanks to the use of standard Web technologies, you can offer your customers intelligent Merlin Gerin switchboards allowing easy access to information: follow-up of currents, voltages, powers, consumption history, etc.Each product complies with global choices in terms of communication protocols (Modbus, Ethernet, etc.) for simplified integration in the management, supervision and monitoring systems.Guiding Tools for more efficient design and implementation of your installations]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[0A consistent design of offers from Medium Voltage to Low VoltageAll Merlin Gerin offers are designed according to electrical, mechanical and communication consistency rules. The products express this consistency by their overall design and shared ergonomics.Electrical consistency: Each product complies with or enhances system performance at coordination level: breaking capacity, Isc, temperature rise, etc. for more safety, continuity of supply (discrimination) or economic optimisation (cascading). The leading edge technologies employed in Merlin Gerin’s Guiding System ensure high performance levels in discrimination and cascading of protection devices, electrodynamic withstand of switches and current distributors, heat loss of devices, distribution blocks and enclosures. Likewise, inter-product ElectroMagnetic Compatibilty (EMC) is guaranteed.Discrimination guarantees co-ordination between the operating characteristics of serial-connected circuit-breakers. Should a fault occurs downstream, only the circuit-breaker placed immediately upstream from the fault will trip.Mechanical consistency: Each product adopts dimensional standards simplifying and optimising its use within the system. It shares the same accessories and auxiliaries and complies with global ergonomic choices (utilisation mode, operating mode, setting and configuration devices, tools, etc.) making its installation and operation within the system a simpler process.Direct connection of the Canalis KT busbar trunking on the Masterpact 3200 A circuit breaker.Communication consistency:Thanks to the use of standard Web technologies, you can offer your customers intelligent Merlin Gerin switchboards allowing easy access to information: follow-up of currents, voltages, powers, consumption history, etc.Each product complies with global choices in terms of communication protocols (Modbus, Ethernet, etc.) for simplified integration in the management, supervision and monitoring systems.Guiding Tools for more efficient design and implementation of your installations]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="6">
		<raw><![CDATA[0SM6Medium voltage switchboard system from 1 to 36 kVSepamProtection relaysMasterpactProtection switchgear from 100 to 6300 ATrihal MV/LV dry cast resin transformer from 160 to 5000 kVAEvolis MV vacuum switchgear and components from 1 to 24 kV.The Technical guideThese technical guides help you comply with installation standards and rules i.e.: The electrical installation guide, the protection guide, the switchboard implementation guide, the technical booklets and the co-ordination tables all form genuine reference tools for the design of highperformance electrical installations. For example, the LV protection co-ordination guide - discrimination and cascading optimises choice of protection and connection devices while also increasing markedly continuity of supply in the installations.CAD software and toolsThe CAD software and tools enhance productivity and safety. They help you create your installations by simplifying product choice through easy browsing in the Guiding System offers. Last but not least, they optimise use of our products while also complying with standards and proper procedures]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[0SM6Medium voltage switchboard system from 1 to 36 kVSepamProtection relaysMasterpactProtection switchgear from 100 to 6300 ATrihal MV/LV dry cast resin transformer from 160 to 5000 kVAEvolis MV vacuum switchgear and components from 1 to 24 kV.The Technical guideThese technical guides help you comply with installation standards and rules i.e.: The electrical installation guide, the protection guide, the switchboard implementation guide, the technical booklets and the co-ordination tables all form genuine reference tools for the design of highperformance electrical installations. For example, the LV protection co-ordination guide - discrimination and cascading optimises choice of protection and connection devices while also increasing markedly continuity of supply in the installations.CAD software and toolsThe CAD software and tools enhance productivity and safety. They help you create your installations by simplifying product choice through easy browsing in the Guiding System offers. Last but not least, they optimise use of our products while also complying with standards and proper procedures]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="7">
		<raw><![CDATA[0CompactProtection switchgear system from 100 to 630 AMulti 9Modular protection switchgear system up to 125 APrisma PlusFunctional system for electrical distribution switchboards up to 3200 APragma Enclosures for distribution switchboards up to 160 ACanalis Prefabricated Busbar Trunking from 25 to 4000 APowerLogic Power managementTrainingTraining allows you to acquire the Merlin Gerin expertise (installation design, work with power on, etc.) for increased efficiency and a guarantee of improved customer service. The training catalogue includes beginner’s courses in electrical distribution, knowledge of MV and LV switchgear, operation and maintenance of installations, design of LV installations to give but a few examples.merlin-gerin.comThis international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: b complete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochures… b selection guides from the e-catalog b product discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contacts]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[0CompactProtection switchgear system from 100 to 630 AMulti 9Modular protection switchgear system up to 125 APrisma PlusFunctional system for electrical distribution switchboards up to 3200 APragma Enclosures for distribution switchboards up to 160 ACanalis Prefabricated Busbar Trunking from 25 to 4000 APowerLogic Power managementTrainingTraining allows you to acquire the Merlin Gerin expertise (installation design, work with power on, etc.) for increased efficiency and a guarantee of improved customer service. The training catalogue includes beginner’s courses in electrical distribution, knowledge of MV and LV switchgear, operation and maintenance of installations, design of LV installations to give but a few examples.merlin-gerin.comThis international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: b complete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochures… b selection guides from the e-catalog b product discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contacts]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="8">
		<raw><![CDATA[Masterpact,Five performance levelsN1 - for standard applications with low short-circuit levels. H1 - for industrial sites with high short-circuit levels or installations with two parallel-connected transformers. H2 - high-performance for heavy industry where very high short-circuits can occur. H3 - for incoming devices supplying critical applications requiring both high performance and a high level of discrimination. L1 - for high current-limiting capability and a discrimination level (37 kA) as yet unequalled by any other circuit breaker of its type; intended for the protection of cable-type feeders or to raise the performance level of a switchboard when the transformer power rating is increased.PB100723-27PB100735-68Integration in a communications networkMasterpact can be integrated in a general supervision system to optimise installation operation and maintenance. The communication architecture is open, and may be upgraded for interfacing with any protocol.Switch-disconnector versionsThe switch-disconnectors are derived directly from the circuit breakers and offer the same features and performance levels. They are available in HA, NA and HF versions, depending on the models. The HF version includes instantaneous protection to prevent closing on a short-circuit. Once closed, the switch-disconnectors are unprotected and behave like ordinary switches. They are often used for busbar coupling.Special applicationsb 1000 V AC: v Masterpact NW H10 circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors, 800 to 4000 A, 3P or 4P, drawout version and H10 circuit breaker performance level b DC: v Masterpact NW DC circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors, 1000 to 4000 A, fixed and drawout versions and N and H circuit breaker performance levels (see special DC catalogue no. ABTED205160EN) b right-hand neutral: v Masterpact NW800 to 6300 A circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors, 4P, fixed and drawout versions and H1 and H2 circuit breaker performance levels b industrial environments with high concentrations of sulphur compounds (standard IEC 721-3-3): v Masterpact NW800 to 4000 A circuit breakers with corrosion protection, drawout version and H2 circuit breaker performance level b installation earthing: v Masterpact NW earthing switch, compatible with NW800 to 4000 A, 3P or 4P, drawout version with N1, H1, NA and HA performance levels.6PB100722-]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Masterpact,Five performance levelsN1 - for standard applications with low short-circuit levels. H1 - for industrial sites with high short-circuit levels or installations with two parallel-connected transformers. H2 - high-performance for heavy industry where very high short-circuits can occur. H3 - for incoming devices supplying critical applications requiring both high performance and a high level of discrimination. L1 - for high current-limiting capability and a discrimination level (37 kA) as yet unequalled by any other circuit breaker of its type; intended for the protection of cable-type feeders or to raise the performance level of a switchboard when the transformer power rating is increased.PB100723-27PB100735-68Integration in a communications networkMasterpact can be integrated in a general supervision system to optimise installation operation and maintenance. The communication architecture is open, and may be upgraded for interfacing with any protocol.Switch-disconnector versionsThe switch-disconnectors are derived directly from the circuit breakers and offer the same features and performance levels. They are available in HA, NA and HF versions, depending on the models. The HF version includes instantaneous protection to prevent closing on a short-circuit. Once closed, the switch-disconnectors are unprotected and behave like ordinary switches. They are often used for busbar coupling.Special applicationsb 1000 V AC: v Masterpact NW H10 circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors, 800 to 4000 A, 3P or 4P, drawout version and H10 circuit breaker performance level b DC: v Masterpact NW DC circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors, 1000 to 4000 A, fixed and drawout versions and N and H circuit breaker performance levels (see special DC catalogue no. ABTED205160EN) b right-hand neutral: v Masterpact NW800 to 6300 A circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors, 4P, fixed and drawout versions and H1 and H2 circuit breaker performance levels b industrial environments with high concentrations of sulphur compounds (standard IEC 721-3-3): v Masterpact NW800 to 4000 A circuit breakers with corrosion protection, drawout version and H2 circuit breaker performance level b installation earthing: v Masterpact NW earthing switch, compatible with NW800 to 4000 A, 3P or 4P, drawout version with N1, H1, NA and HA performance levels.6PB100722-]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="9">
		<raw><![CDATA[3 frame sizes, 2 familiesThe range of power circuit breakers includes two families: b Masterpact NT, the world’s smallest true power circuit breaker, with ratings from 630 to 1600 A b Masterpact NW, in two frame sizes, one from 800 to 4000 A and the other from 4000 A to 6300 A.Masterpact NT630 to 1600 APB100726-21 DB105111-90Masterpact NW800 to 4000 APB100724-33 PB100747-764000 to 6300 APB100725-57 PB100748-7]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[3 frame sizes, 2 familiesThe range of power circuit breakers includes two families: b Masterpact NT, the world’s smallest true power circuit breaker, with ratings from 630 to 1600 A b Masterpact NW, in two frame sizes, one from 800 to 4000 A and the other from 4000 A to 6300 A.Masterpact NT630 to 1600 APB100726-21 DB105111-90Masterpact NW800 to 4000 APB100724-33 PB100747-764000 to 6300 APB100725-57 PB100748-7]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="10">
		<raw><![CDATA[Optimised volumesPB100742-39The smallest circuit breaker in the worldMasterpact NT innovates by offering all the performance of a power circuit breaker in an extremely small volume. The 70 mm pole pitch means a three-pole drawout circuit breaker can be installed in a switchboard section 400 mm wide and 400 mm deep.PB100743-53Practical installation solutionsThe Masterpact NW range further improves the installation solutions that have built the success of its predecessors.. It has been designed to standardise switchboards, optimise volumes and simplify installation: b incoming connection to top or bottom terminals b no safety clearance required b connection: v horizontal or vertical rear connection v front connection with minimum extra space v mixed front and rear connections b 115 mm pole pitch on all versions b no derating up to 55 °C and 4000 A.PB100745-71Optimised volumesUp to 4000 A, Masterpact NW circuit breakers are all the same size, the same as the old M08 to 32 range. From 4000 A to 6300 A, there is just one size, much smaller than before.Retrofit solutionsSpecial connections are available to replace a fixed or drawout Masterpact M08 to 32 with a Masterpact NW, without modifying the busbars or the door cut-out]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Optimised volumesPB100742-39The smallest circuit breaker in the worldMasterpact NT innovates by offering all the performance of a power circuit breaker in an extremely small volume. The 70 mm pole pitch means a three-pole drawout circuit breaker can be installed in a switchboard section 400 mm wide and 400 mm deep.PB100743-53Practical installation solutionsThe Masterpact NW range further improves the installation solutions that have built the success of its predecessors.. It has been designed to standardise switchboards, optimise volumes and simplify installation: b incoming connection to top or bottom terminals b no safety clearance required b connection: v horizontal or vertical rear connection v front connection with minimum extra space v mixed front and rear connections b 115 mm pole pitch on all versions b no derating up to 55 °C and 4000 A.PB100745-71Optimised volumesUp to 4000 A, Masterpact NW circuit breakers are all the same size, the same as the old M08 to 32 range. From 4000 A to 6300 A, there is just one size, much smaller than before.Retrofit solutionsSpecial connections are available to replace a fixed or drawout Masterpact M08 to 32 with a Masterpact NW, without modifying the busbars or the door cut-out]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="11">
		<raw><![CDATA[Ease of installationWith optimised sizes, the Masterpact NT and NW ranges simplify the design of switchboards and standardise the installation of devices: b a single connection layout for Masterpact NT b three connection layouts for Masterpact NW: v one from 800 to 3200 A v one for 4000 A v one up to 6300 A b identical connection terminals from 800 to 6300 A (Masterpact NW) b front connection requires little space because the connectors to not increase the depth of the device rear connection to vertical or horizontal busbars simply by turning the connectors 90°.PB100737-64Vertical front connection of a fixed Masterpact NW.PB100736-64Vertical and horizontal rear connection of a fixed Masterpact NW.PB100738-81Connection to busbars]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Ease of installationWith optimised sizes, the Masterpact NT and NW ranges simplify the design of switchboards and standardise the installation of devices: b a single connection layout for Masterpact NT b three connection layouts for Masterpact NW: v one from 800 to 3200 A v one for 4000 A v one up to 6300 A b identical connection terminals from 800 to 6300 A (Masterpact NW) b front connection requires little space because the connectors to not increase the depth of the device rear connection to vertical or horizontal busbars simply by turning the connectors 90°.PB100737-64Vertical front connection of a fixed Masterpact NW.PB100736-64Vertical and horizontal rear connection of a fixed Masterpact NW.PB100738-81Connection to busbars]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="12">
		<raw><![CDATA[InnovationGreater dependability…Filtered breakingThe patented new design of the arc chutes includes stainless-steel filters. The chutes absorb the energy released during breaking, thus limiting the stresses exerted on the installation. They filter and cool the gases produced, reducing effects perceptible from the outside.Automatic unlatchingThe automatic unlatching of the circuit breaker operating mechanism for high short-circuits extends performance up to 150 kA. It produces ultra-fast tripping for all short-circuits higher than 37 kA (L1) and 65 kA (H3). For lower short-circuits, the system does not react so that the control unit can provide total discrimination with downstream devices.Filtered breaking.PB100737-64More intelligent trip units…Today, with the high speed of calculation, the small size of memories and advances in miniaturisation, trip units have become circuit breaker control units offering increasingly powerful functions. They accurately measure system parameters, instantly calculate values, store data, log events, signal alarms, communicate, take action, etc. The Masterpact ranges, equipped with Micrologic control units, constitute both an extremely reliable protective device and an accurate measurement instrument.User friendly…Intuitive use…Micrologic control units are equipped with a digital LCD display used in conjunction with simple navigation buttons. Users can directly access parameters and settings. Navigation between screens is intuitive and the immediate display of values greatly simplifies settings. Text is displayed in the desired language.PB100736-64… backed by incomparable securityProtection functions are separate from the measurement functions and are managed by an ASIC electronic component. This independence guarantees immunity from conducted or radiated disturbances and ensures a high degree of reliability. A patented &amp;quot;double setting&amp;quot; system for protection functions establishes: b a maximum threshold set using the control-unit dials b fine adjustments via the keypad or remotely. The fine adjustments for thresholds (to within one ampere) and tripping delays (to within a fraction of a second) are displayed directly on the screen. The control unit cover can be lead-sealed to prevent uncontrolled access to the dials and protect the settings.Navigation buttons on a Micrologic P control unit.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[InnovationGreater dependability…Filtered breakingThe patented new design of the arc chutes includes stainless-steel filters. The chutes absorb the energy released during breaking, thus limiting the stresses exerted on the installation. They filter and cool the gases produced, reducing effects perceptible from the outside.Automatic unlatchingThe automatic unlatching of the circuit breaker operating mechanism for high short-circuits extends performance up to 150 kA. It produces ultra-fast tripping for all short-circuits higher than 37 kA (L1) and 65 kA (H3). For lower short-circuits, the system does not react so that the control unit can provide total discrimination with downstream devices.Filtered breaking.PB100737-64More intelligent trip units…Today, with the high speed of calculation, the small size of memories and advances in miniaturisation, trip units have become circuit breaker control units offering increasingly powerful functions. They accurately measure system parameters, instantly calculate values, store data, log events, signal alarms, communicate, take action, etc. The Masterpact ranges, equipped with Micrologic control units, constitute both an extremely reliable protective device and an accurate measurement instrument.User friendly…Intuitive use…Micrologic control units are equipped with a digital LCD display used in conjunction with simple navigation buttons. Users can directly access parameters and settings. Navigation between screens is intuitive and the immediate display of values greatly simplifies settings. Text is displayed in the desired language.PB100736-64… backed by incomparable securityProtection functions are separate from the measurement functions and are managed by an ASIC electronic component. This independence guarantees immunity from conducted or radiated disturbances and ensures a high degree of reliability. A patented &amp;quot;double setting&amp;quot; system for protection functions establishes: b a maximum threshold set using the control-unit dials b fine adjustments via the keypad or remotely. The fine adjustments for thresholds (to within one ampere) and tripping delays (to within a fraction of a second) are displayed directly on the screen. The control unit cover can be lead-sealed to prevent uncontrolled access to the dials and protect the settings.Navigation buttons on a Micrologic P control unit.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="13">
		<raw><![CDATA[Ready for the futureCompliance with environmental requirementsSchneider Electric fully takes into account environmental requirements, starting right from the design phase of every product through to the end of its service life: b the materials used for Masterpact are not potentially dangerous to the environment b the production facilities are non-polluting in compliance with the ISO 14001 standard b filtered breaking eliminates pollution in the switchboard b the energy dissipated per pole is low, making energy losses insignificant b the materials are marked to facilitate sorting for recycling at the end of product service life.Integration in a communication networkMasterpact can be integrated in a general supervision system to optimise installation operation and maintenance. The communication architecture is open, and may be upgraded for interfacing with any protocol.Simple upgrading of installationsInstallations change, power levels increase, new equipment is required and switchboards must be extended. Masterpact is designed to adapt to these changes: b all control units are interchangeable b communication with a supervision system is an option that may be added at any time b a reserve chassis can be pre-addressed so that system parameters do not have to be modified when a drawout device is installed at a later date b any future changes to the products will be designed to ensure continuity with the current ranges, thus simplifying installation upgrades.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Ready for the futureCompliance with environmental requirementsSchneider Electric fully takes into account environmental requirements, starting right from the design phase of every product through to the end of its service life: b the materials used for Masterpact are not potentially dangerous to the environment b the production facilities are non-polluting in compliance with the ISO 14001 standard b filtered breaking eliminates pollution in the switchboard b the energy dissipated per pole is low, making energy losses insignificant b the materials are marked to facilitate sorting for recycling at the end of product service life.Integration in a communication networkMasterpact can be integrated in a general supervision system to optimise installation operation and maintenance. The communication architecture is open, and may be upgraded for interfacing with any protocol.Simple upgrading of installationsInstallations change, power levels increase, new equipment is required and switchboards must be extended. Masterpact is designed to adapt to these changes: b all control units are interchangeable b communication with a supervision system is an option that may be added at any time b a reserve chassis can be pre-addressed so that system parameters do not have to be modified when a drawout device is installed at a later date b any future changes to the products will be designed to ensure continuity with the current ranges, thus simplifying installation upgrades.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="14">
		<raw><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: b complete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochures… b selection guides from the e-catalog. b product discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contacts…These technical guides help you comply with installation standards and rules i.e.: the electrical installation guide, the protection guide, the switchboard implementation guide, the technical booklets and the co-ordination tables all form genuine reference tools for the design of high performance electrical installations. For example, the LV protection co-ordination guide - discrimination and cascading - optimises choice of protection and connection devices while also increasing markedly continuity of supply in the installations.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: b complete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochures… b selection guides from the e-catalog. b product discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contacts…These technical guides help you comply with installation standards and rules i.e.: the electrical installation guide, the protection guide, the switchboard implementation guide, the technical booklets and the co-ordination tables all form genuine reference tools for the design of high performance electrical installations. For example, the LV protection co-ordination guide - discrimination and cascading - optimises choice of protection and connection devices while also increasing markedly continuity of supply in the installations.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="15">
		<raw><![CDATA[MasterpactFunctions and characteristicsPresentation6General overviewDetailed contents1414Circuit breakers and switch-disconnectorsNT06 to NT16 and NW08 to NW63 NT06 to NT16 NW08 to NW631616 18 20Micrologic control unitsOverview of functions Micrologic A &amp;quot;ammeter&amp;quot; Micrologic P &amp;quot;power&amp;quot; Micrologic H &amp;quot;harmonics&amp;quot; Accessories and test equipment2222 24 26 30 32CommunicationCOM option in Masterpact Overview of functions Masterpact in a communication network Masterpact and the MPS100 Micro Power Server3434 35 36 38ConnectionsOverview of solutions Accessories4040 41LockingOn the device On the chassis4444 45Indication contactsRemote ON / OFF Remote tripping4648 51Accessories Source-changeover systemsPresentation Mechanical interlocking Electrical interlocking Associated automatic controllers52 5353 54 56 58Display modulesDimensions and connection Electrical diagrams Installation recommendations Additional characteristics Catalogue numbers and order form5963 93 103 127 133]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[MasterpactFunctions and characteristicsPresentation6General overviewDetailed contents1414Circuit breakers and switch-disconnectorsNT06 to NT16 and NW08 to NW63 NT06 to NT16 NW08 to NW631616 18 20Micrologic control unitsOverview of functions Micrologic A &amp;quot;ammeter&amp;quot; Micrologic P &amp;quot;power&amp;quot; Micrologic H &amp;quot;harmonics&amp;quot; Accessories and test equipment2222 24 26 30 32CommunicationCOM option in Masterpact Overview of functions Masterpact in a communication network Masterpact and the MPS100 Micro Power Server3434 35 36 38ConnectionsOverview of solutions Accessories4040 41LockingOn the device On the chassis4444 45Indication contactsRemote ON / OFF Remote tripping4648 51Accessories Source-changeover systemsPresentation Mechanical interlocking Electrical interlocking Associated automatic controllers52 5353 54 56 58Display modulesDimensions and connection Electrical diagrams Installation recommendations Additional characteristics Catalogue numbers and order form5963 93 103 127 133]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="16">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsGeneral overview Detailed contents0This chapter describes all the functions offered by Masterpact NT and NW devices. The two product families have identical functions implemented using the same or different components depending on the case.PB100762-60Circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors page 16b v v b b b b b b ratings: Masterpact NT 630 to 1600 A Masterpact NW 800 to 6300 A circuit breakers type N1, H1, H2, H3, L1 switch-disconnectors type NA, HA, HF 3 or 4 poles fixed or drawout versions option with neutral on the right protection derating.Micrologic control unitsAmmeter A 2.0 basic protection 5.0 selective protection 6.0 selective + earth-fault protection 7.0 selective + earth-leakage protection Power meter P 5.0 selective protection 6.0 selective + earth-fault protection 7.0 selective + earth-leakage protection Harmonic meter H 5.0 selective protection 6.0 selective + earth-fault protection 7.0 selective + earth-leakage protection b external sensor for earth-fault protection b rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection b setting options (long-time rating plug): v low setting 0.4 to 0.8 x Ir v high setting 0.8 to 1 x Ir v without long-time protection b external power-supply module b battery module.DB101123page 22DB101124CommunicationPB100763-56page 34b COM option in Masterpact b Masterpact in a communication network b Masterpact and the Micro Power Server MPS100.Connectionsb rear connection (horizontal or vertical) b front connection b mixed connections b optional accessories v bare-cable connectors and connector shields v terminal shields v vertical-connection adapters v cable-lug adapters v interphase barriers v spreaders v disconnectable front-connection adapter v safety shutters, shutter locking blocks, shutter position indication and locking.DB101156 DB101150 DB101149 DB101147page 40]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsGeneral overview Detailed contents0This chapter describes all the functions offered by Masterpact NT and NW devices. The two product families have identical functions implemented using the same or different components depending on the case.PB100762-60Circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors page 16b v v b b b b b b ratings: Masterpact NT 630 to 1600 A Masterpact NW 800 to 6300 A circuit breakers type N1, H1, H2, H3, L1 switch-disconnectors type NA, HA, HF 3 or 4 poles fixed or drawout versions option with neutral on the right protection derating.Micrologic control unitsAmmeter A 2.0 basic protection 5.0 selective protection 6.0 selective + earth-fault protection 7.0 selective + earth-leakage protection Power meter P 5.0 selective protection 6.0 selective + earth-fault protection 7.0 selective + earth-leakage protection Harmonic meter H 5.0 selective protection 6.0 selective + earth-fault protection 7.0 selective + earth-leakage protection b external sensor for earth-fault protection b rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection b setting options (long-time rating plug): v low setting 0.4 to 0.8 x Ir v high setting 0.8 to 1 x Ir v without long-time protection b external power-supply module b battery module.DB101123page 22DB101124CommunicationPB100763-56page 34b COM option in Masterpact b Masterpact in a communication network b Masterpact and the Micro Power Server MPS100.Connectionsb rear connection (horizontal or vertical) b front connection b mixed connections b optional accessories v bare-cable connectors and connector shields v terminal shields v vertical-connection adapters v cable-lug adapters v interphase barriers v spreaders v disconnectable front-connection adapter v safety shutters, shutter locking blocks, shutter position indication and locking.DB101156 DB101150 DB101149 DB101147page 40]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="17">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsGeneral overview Detailed contents0Lockingb pushbutton locking by padlockable transparent cover b OFF-position locking by padlock or keylock b chassis locking in disconnected position by keylock b chassis locking in connected, disconnected and test positions b door interlock (inhibits door opening with breaker in connected position) b racking interlock (inhibits racking with door open) b racking interlock between crank and OFF pushbutton b automatic spring discharge before breaker removal b mismatch protection.PB100764-56 DB101109 DB101110page 44Indication contactsb standard or low-level contacts: v ON/OFF indication (OF) v &amp;quot;fault trip&amp;quot; indication (SDE) v carriage switches for connected (CE) disconnected (CD) and test (CT) positions b programmable contacts: v 2 contacts (M2C) v 6 contacts (M6C).DB101111 DB100766-56 DB101112page 46M2C contact.OF contact.Remote operationb remote ON/OFF: v gear motor v XF closing or MX opening voltage releases v PF ready-to-close contact v options: RAR automatic or Res electrical remote reset - BPFE electrical closing pushbutton b remote tripping function: v MN voltage release - standard - adjustable or non-adjustable delay v or second MX voltage release.DB101113page 48DB100765-56Gear motor.DB101114MX, XF and MN volage releases.Accessoriesb b b b b auxiliary terminal shield operation counter escutcheon transparent cover for escutcheon escutcheon blanking plate.DB101115page 48]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsGeneral overview Detailed contents0Lockingb pushbutton locking by padlockable transparent cover b OFF-position locking by padlock or keylock b chassis locking in disconnected position by keylock b chassis locking in connected, disconnected and test positions b door interlock (inhibits door opening with breaker in connected position) b racking interlock (inhibits racking with door open) b racking interlock between crank and OFF pushbutton b automatic spring discharge before breaker removal b mismatch protection.PB100764-56 DB101109 DB101110page 44Indication contactsb standard or low-level contacts: v ON/OFF indication (OF) v &amp;quot;fault trip&amp;quot; indication (SDE) v carriage switches for connected (CE) disconnected (CD) and test (CT) positions b programmable contacts: v 2 contacts (M2C) v 6 contacts (M6C).DB101111 DB100766-56 DB101112page 46M2C contact.OF contact.Remote operationb remote ON/OFF: v gear motor v XF closing or MX opening voltage releases v PF ready-to-close contact v options: RAR automatic or Res electrical remote reset - BPFE electrical closing pushbutton b remote tripping function: v MN voltage release - standard - adjustable or non-adjustable delay v or second MX voltage release.DB101113page 48DB100765-56Gear motor.DB101114MX, XF and MN volage releases.Accessoriesb b b b b auxiliary terminal shield operation counter escutcheon transparent cover for escutcheon escutcheon blanking plate.DB101115page 48]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="18">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCircuit breakers and switch-disconnectors NT06 to NT16 and NW08 to NW630NT and NW selection criteria Masterpact NTStandard applicationsNT06, NT08, NT10, NT12, NT16 H1 H2 Type of application Standard applications with low short-circuit currents Applications with medium-level shortcircuit currents NT06, NT08, NT10 L1Masterpact NWStandard applicationsNW08...NW16 N1 NW08...NW40 H1 Circuit breaker for industrial sites with high short-circuit currentsLimiting circuit breaker Standard applications for protection of cable- with low short-circuit type feeders or currents upgraded transformer ratingsIcu/Ics at 440 V Icu/Ics at 1000 V Icu/Ics at 500 V DC L/R &amp;lt; 15 ms Position of neutral Fixed Drawout Switch-disconnector version Front connection Rear connection Type of Micrologic control unit42 kA Left F D Yes Yes Yes A, P, H50 kA Left F D No Yes Yes A, P, H130 kA Left F D No Yes Yes A, P, H42 kA Left F D Yes Yes Yes A, P, H65 kA Left or right F D Yes Yes up to 3200 A Yes A, P, HMasterpact NT06 to NT16 installation characteristics Circuit breaker NT06, NT08, NT10TypeConnection Drawout FC RC Fixed FC RC Dimensions (mm) H x W x D Drawout 3P 4P Fixed 3P 4P Weight (kg) (approximate) Drawout 3P/4P Fixed 3P/4PNT12, NT16L1b b b bH1b b b b 322 x 288 x 277 322 x 358 x 277 301 x 276 x 196 301 x 346 x 196 30/39 14/18H2b b b bH1b b b bH2b b b bMasterpact NW08 to NW63 installation characteristics Circuit breaker NW08, NW10, NW12, NW16TypeFC RC Fixed FC RC Dimensions (mm) H x W x D Drawout 3P 4P Fixed 3P 4P Weight (kg) (approximate) Drawout 3P/4P Fixed 3P/4P (1) Except 4000 A. Connection DrawoutNW20H10b -N1b b b bH1b b b bH2b b b bL1b b -H1b b b bH2b b b bH3b b -L1b b -H10b -439 x 441 x 395 439 x 556 x 395 352 x 442 x 297 352 x 537 x 297 90/120 60/80]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCircuit breakers and switch-disconnectors NT06 to NT16 and NW08 to NW630NT and NW selection criteria Masterpact NTStandard applicationsNT06, NT08, NT10, NT12, NT16 H1 H2 Type of application Standard applications with low short-circuit currents Applications with medium-level shortcircuit currents NT06, NT08, NT10 L1Masterpact NWStandard applicationsNW08...NW16 N1 NW08...NW40 H1 Circuit breaker for industrial sites with high short-circuit currentsLimiting circuit breaker Standard applications for protection of cable- with low short-circuit type feeders or currents upgraded transformer ratingsIcu/Ics at 440 V Icu/Ics at 1000 V Icu/Ics at 500 V DC L/R &amp;lt; 15 ms Position of neutral Fixed Drawout Switch-disconnector version Front connection Rear connection Type of Micrologic control unit42 kA Left F D Yes Yes Yes A, P, H50 kA Left F D No Yes Yes A, P, H130 kA Left F D No Yes Yes A, P, H42 kA Left F D Yes Yes Yes A, P, H65 kA Left or right F D Yes Yes up to 3200 A Yes A, P, HMasterpact NT06 to NT16 installation characteristics Circuit breaker NT06, NT08, NT10TypeConnection Drawout FC RC Fixed FC RC Dimensions (mm) H x W x D Drawout 3P 4P Fixed 3P 4P Weight (kg) (approximate) Drawout 3P/4P Fixed 3P/4PNT12, NT16L1b b b bH1b b b b 322 x 288 x 277 322 x 358 x 277 301 x 276 x 196 301 x 346 x 196 30/39 14/18H2b b b bH1b b b bH2b b b bMasterpact NW08 to NW63 installation characteristics Circuit breaker NW08, NW10, NW12, NW16TypeFC RC Fixed FC RC Dimensions (mm) H x W x D Drawout 3P 4P Fixed 3P 4P Weight (kg) (approximate) Drawout 3P/4P Fixed 3P/4P (1) Except 4000 A. Connection DrawoutNW20H10b -N1b b b bH1b b b bH2b b b bL1b b -H1b b b bH2b b b bH3b b -L1b b -H10b -439 x 441 x 395 439 x 556 x 395 352 x 442 x 297 352 x 537 x 297 90/120 60/80]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="19">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCircuit breakers and switch-disconnectors NT06 to NT16 and NW08 to NW630Special applicationsNW H10 H2 High-performance circuit breaker for heavy industry with high shortcircuit currents H3 Incoming device with very high performance for critical applications L1 Limiting circuit breaker for protection of cable-type feeders or upgraded transformer ratings 150 kA Left D No Yes up to 2000 A Yes A, P, H 1000 V systems, e.g. mines and wind power NW H2 with anti- NW10...NW40 corrosion N DC protection Environments with DC system high sulphur contents H DC DC system NW earthing switch Installation earthing100 kA Left or right F D Yes Yes up to 3200 A Yes A, P, H150 kA Left D Yes Yes up to 3200 A Yes A, P, H50 kA Left D Yes No Yes A, consult us for P and H100 kA Left or right D Yes Yes up to 3200 A Yes A, P, H35 kA F D Yes No Yes DC Micrologic85 kA F D Yes No Yes DC MicrologicD Yes Yes up to 3200 A Yes -NW25, NW32, NW40H1b (1) b b (1) bNW40b, NW50, NW63H3b (1) b -H2b (1) b b (1) bH10b -H1b b 479 x 786 x 395 479 x 1016 x 395 352 x 767 x 297 352 x 997 x 297 225/300 120/160H2b b]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCircuit breakers and switch-disconnectors NT06 to NT16 and NW08 to NW630Special applicationsNW H10 H2 High-performance circuit breaker for heavy industry with high shortcircuit currents H3 Incoming device with very high performance for critical applications L1 Limiting circuit breaker for protection of cable-type feeders or upgraded transformer ratings 150 kA Left D No Yes up to 2000 A Yes A, P, H 1000 V systems, e.g. mines and wind power NW H2 with anti- NW10...NW40 corrosion N DC protection Environments with DC system high sulphur contents H DC DC system NW earthing switch Installation earthing100 kA Left or right F D Yes Yes up to 3200 A Yes A, P, H150 kA Left D Yes Yes up to 3200 A Yes A, P, H50 kA Left D Yes No Yes A, consult us for P and H100 kA Left or right D Yes Yes up to 3200 A Yes A, P, H35 kA F D Yes No Yes DC Micrologic85 kA F D Yes No Yes DC MicrologicD Yes Yes up to 3200 A Yes -NW25, NW32, NW40H1b (1) b b (1) bNW40b, NW50, NW63H3b (1) b -H2b (1) b b (1) bH10b -H1b b 479 x 786 x 395 479 x 1016 x 395 352 x 767 x 297 352 x 997 x 297 225/300 120/160H2b b]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="20">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCircuit breakers and switch-disconnectors NT06 to NT16Common characteristics0PB100767-48Number of poles Rated insulation voltage (V) Impulse withstand voltage (kV) Rated operational voltage (V AC 50/60 Hz) Suitability for isolation Degree of pollutionUi Uimp Ue IEC 60947-2 IEC 60664-13/4 1000 12 690/1000 3Basic sweatchgearCircuit-breaker as per IEC 60947-2Rated current (A) Rating of 4th pole (A) Sensor ratings (A) Type of circuit breaker Ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms) V AC 50/60 Hz In at 40 °C/50 °C (1)IcuRated service breaking capacity (kA rms) Utilisation category Rated short-time withstand current (kA rms) V AC 50/60 Hz Integrated instantaneous protection (kA peak ±10 %) Rated making capacity (kA peak) V AC 50/60 HzIcs Icw220/415 V 440 V 525 V 690 V 1000 V % Icu 0.5 s 1s 3s 220/415 V 440 V 525 V 690 V 1000 VIcmBreak time (ms) between tripping order and arc extinction Closing time (ms)Circuit-breaker as per NEMA AB1Breaking capacity (kA) V AC 50/60 Hz 240 V 480 V 600 VSwitch-disconnector as per IEC 60947-3 and Annex AType of switch-disconnector Rated making capacity (kA peak) AC23A/AC3 category V AC 50/60 Hz Icm 220 V 440 V 525/690 V 1000 V 0.5 s 1s 3s 690 VRated short-time withstand current (kA rms) AC23A/AC3 category V AC 50/60 HzIcwUltimate breaking capacity Icu (kA rms) with an external protection relay Maximum time delay: 350 ms Service life Mechanical C/O cycles x 1000 Type of circuit breaker Rated current C/O cycles x 1000 Electrical IEC 60947-2 without maintenanceMechanical and electrical durability as per IEC 60947-2/3 at In/IeIn (A) without maintenance440 V (4) 690 V 1000 V AC23A 440 V (4) 690V AC3 (5) 380/415 V (kW) 440 V (kW) 440 V (4) 690 V(1) 50 °C: rear vertical connected. Refer to temperature derating tables for other connection types. (2) See the current-limiting curves in the &amp;quot;additional characteristics&amp;quot; section. (3) SELLIM system. (4) Available for 480 V NEMA. (5) Suitable for motor control (direct-on-line starting).Type of circuit breaker or switch-disconnector Rated operationnal current Ie (A) C/O cycles x 1000 Electrical without maintenance IEC 60947-3 Type of circuit breaker or switch-disconnector Rated operationnal current Ie (A) Motor power C/O cycles x 1000 Electrical IEC 60947-3 Annex M/IEC 60947-4-1 without maintenance]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCircuit breakers and switch-disconnectors NT06 to NT16Common characteristics0PB100767-48Number of poles Rated insulation voltage (V) Impulse withstand voltage (kV) Rated operational voltage (V AC 50/60 Hz) Suitability for isolation Degree of pollutionUi Uimp Ue IEC 60947-2 IEC 60664-13/4 1000 12 690/1000 3Basic sweatchgearCircuit-breaker as per IEC 60947-2Rated current (A) Rating of 4th pole (A) Sensor ratings (A) Type of circuit breaker Ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms) V AC 50/60 Hz In at 40 °C/50 °C (1)IcuRated service breaking capacity (kA rms) Utilisation category Rated short-time withstand current (kA rms) V AC 50/60 Hz Integrated instantaneous protection (kA peak ±10 %) Rated making capacity (kA peak) V AC 50/60 HzIcs Icw220/415 V 440 V 525 V 690 V 1000 V % Icu 0.5 s 1s 3s 220/415 V 440 V 525 V 690 V 1000 VIcmBreak time (ms) between tripping order and arc extinction Closing time (ms)Circuit-breaker as per NEMA AB1Breaking capacity (kA) V AC 50/60 Hz 240 V 480 V 600 VSwitch-disconnector as per IEC 60947-3 and Annex AType of switch-disconnector Rated making capacity (kA peak) AC23A/AC3 category V AC 50/60 Hz Icm 220 V 440 V 525/690 V 1000 V 0.5 s 1s 3s 690 VRated short-time withstand current (kA rms) AC23A/AC3 category V AC 50/60 HzIcwUltimate breaking capacity Icu (kA rms) with an external protection relay Maximum time delay: 350 ms Service life Mechanical C/O cycles x 1000 Type of circuit breaker Rated current C/O cycles x 1000 Electrical IEC 60947-2 without maintenanceMechanical and electrical durability as per IEC 60947-2/3 at In/IeIn (A) without maintenance440 V (4) 690 V 1000 V AC23A 440 V (4) 690V AC3 (5) 380/415 V (kW) 440 V (kW) 440 V (4) 690 V(1) 50 °C: rear vertical connected. Refer to temperature derating tables for other connection types. (2) See the current-limiting curves in the &amp;quot;additional characteristics&amp;quot; section. (3) SELLIM system. (4) Available for 480 V NEMA. (5) Suitable for motor control (direct-on-line starting).Type of circuit breaker or switch-disconnector Rated operationnal current Ie (A) C/O cycles x 1000 Electrical without maintenance IEC 60947-3 Type of circuit breaker or switch-disconnector Rated operationnal current Ie (A) Motor power C/O cycles x 1000 Electrical IEC 60947-3 Annex M/IEC 60947-4-1 without maintenance]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="21">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCircuit breakers and switch-disconnectors NT06 to NT160Sensor selectionSensor rating (A) 250 (1) Ir threshold setting(A) 100 to 250 (1) For circuit-breaker NT02, please consult us. 400 160 to 400 630 250 to 630 800 320 to 800 1000 400 to 1000 1250 500 to 1250 1600 640 to 1600NT06630 630 400 to 630 H1 H2 42 50 42 50 42 42 42 42 100 % B B 42 36 42 36 24 20 90 88 105 88 105 88 88 88 88 25 25 &amp;lt; 50 42 42 42 50 50 42NT08800 800 400 to 800 L1 (2) 150 130 100 25 A 10 10 x In (3) 330 286 220 52 9NT101000 1000 400 to 1000NT121250 1250 630 to 1250 H1 H2 42 50 42 50 42 42 42 42 100 % B B 42 36 42 36 24 20 90 88 105 88 105 88 88 88 88 25 25 &amp;lt; 50 42 42 42 50 50 42NT161600 1600 800 to 1600150 100 25HA 75 75 75 36 36 20 36HA 75 75 75 36 36 20 3612.5 H1 H2 630 6 6 3 3 H1/H2/HA 630 6 3 H1/H2/HA 500 y 250 y 300 6 L1 3 2 H1 800 6 3 800 6 3 630 250 to 335 300 to 400 H2 6 3 L1 3 2 H1 1000 6 3 1000 6 3 800 335 to 450 400 to 500 H2 6 3 L1 3 2 H1 1250 6 3 1250 6 3 1000 450 to 560 500 to 630 H2 6 3 H1 6 3 1600 6 3 1000 450 to 560 500 to 630 H2 6 3 -]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCircuit breakers and switch-disconnectors NT06 to NT160Sensor selectionSensor rating (A) 250 (1) Ir threshold setting(A) 100 to 250 (1) For circuit-breaker NT02, please consult us. 400 160 to 400 630 250 to 630 800 320 to 800 1000 400 to 1000 1250 500 to 1250 1600 640 to 1600NT06630 630 400 to 630 H1 H2 42 50 42 50 42 42 42 42 100 % B B 42 36 42 36 24 20 90 88 105 88 105 88 88 88 88 25 25 &amp;lt; 50 42 42 42 50 50 42NT08800 800 400 to 800 L1 (2) 150 130 100 25 A 10 10 x In (3) 330 286 220 52 9NT101000 1000 400 to 1000NT121250 1250 630 to 1250 H1 H2 42 50 42 50 42 42 42 42 100 % B B 42 36 42 36 24 20 90 88 105 88 105 88 88 88 88 25 25 &amp;lt; 50 42 42 42 50 50 42NT161600 1600 800 to 1600150 100 25HA 75 75 75 36 36 20 36HA 75 75 75 36 36 20 3612.5 H1 H2 630 6 6 3 3 H1/H2/HA 630 6 3 H1/H2/HA 500 y 250 y 300 6 L1 3 2 H1 800 6 3 800 6 3 630 250 to 335 300 to 400 H2 6 3 L1 3 2 H1 1000 6 3 1000 6 3 800 335 to 450 400 to 500 H2 6 3 L1 3 2 H1 1250 6 3 1250 6 3 1000 450 to 560 500 to 630 H2 6 3 H1 6 3 1600 6 3 1000 450 to 560 500 to 630 H2 6 3 -]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="22">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCircuit breakers and switch-disconnectors NW08 to NW63Common characteristics0PB100768-38Number of poles Rated insulation voltage (V) Impulse withstand voltage (kV) Rated operational voltage (V AC 50/60 Hz) Suitability for isolation Degree of pollutionUi Uimp Ue IEC 60947-2 IEC 60664-13/4 1000/1250 12 690/1150 4 (1000 V) / 3 (1250 V)Basic circuit-breakerCircuit-breaker as per IEC 60947-2Rated current (A) Rating of 4th pole (A) Sensor ratings (A) Type of circuit breaker Ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms) V AC 50/60 Hz at 40 °C / 50 °C (1)PB100769-70IcuRated service breaking capacity (kA rms) Utilisation category Rated short-time withstand current (kA rms) V AC 50/60 Hz Integrated instantaneous protection (kA peak ±10 %) Rated making capacity (kA peak) V AC 50/60 HzIcs Icw220/415/440 V 525 V 690 V 1150 V % Icu 1s 3s 220/415/440 V 525 V 690 V 1150 VIcmBreak time (ms) between tripping order and arc extinction Closing time (ms)Circuit-breaker as per NEMA AB1Breaking capacity (kA) V AC 50/60 Hz 240/480 V 600 VUnprotected circuit-breakerTripping by shunt trip as per IEC 60947-2Type of circuit breaker Ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms) V AC 50/60 Hz Rated service breaking capacity (kA rms) Rated short-time withstand current (kA rms) Icu Ics Icw 220...690 V % Icu 1s 3sOverload and short-circuit protection External protection relay: short-circuit protection, maximum delay: 350 ms (4) Rated making capacity (kA peak) V AC 50/60 Hz Icm 220...690 VSwitch-disconnector as per IEC 60947-3 and Annex AType of switch-disconnector Rated making capacity (kA peak) AC23A/AC3 category V AC 50/60 Hz Rated short-time withstand current (kA rms) AC23A/AC3 category V AC 50/60 Hz Icm Icw 220...690 V 1150 V 0.5 s 1s 3sMechanical and electrical durability as per IEC 60947-2/3 at In/IeService life Mechanical with maintenance C/O cycles x 1000 without maintenance Type of circuit breaker Rated current In (A) C/O cycles x 1000 Electrical without maintenance IEC 60947-2 Type of circuit breaker or switch-disconnector Rated operational current Ie (A) C/O cycles x 1000 Electrical without maintenance IEC 60947-3 Type of circuit breaker or switch-disconnector Rated operational current Ie (A) Motor power440 V (5) 690 V 1150 V AC23A 440 V (5) 690 V AC3 (6) 380/415 V (kW) 440 V (5) (kW) 690 V (kW) 440/690 V (5)(1) 50 °C: rear vertical connected. Refer to temperature derating tables for other connection types. (2) See the current-limiting curves in the &amp;quot;additional characteristics&amp;quot; section. (3) Equipped with a trip unit with a making current of 90 kA peak. (4) External protection must comply with permissible thermal constraints of the circuit breaker (please consult us). No fault-trip indication by the SDE or the reset button. (5) Available for 480 V NEMA. (6) Suitable for motor control (direct-on-line starting).C/O cycles x 1000 Electrical IEC 60947-3 Annex M/IEC 60947-4-1without maintenance]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCircuit breakers and switch-disconnectors NW08 to NW63Common characteristics0PB100768-38Number of poles Rated insulation voltage (V) Impulse withstand voltage (kV) Rated operational voltage (V AC 50/60 Hz) Suitability for isolation Degree of pollutionUi Uimp Ue IEC 60947-2 IEC 60664-13/4 1000/1250 12 690/1150 4 (1000 V) / 3 (1250 V)Basic circuit-breakerCircuit-breaker as per IEC 60947-2Rated current (A) Rating of 4th pole (A) Sensor ratings (A) Type of circuit breaker Ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms) V AC 50/60 Hz at 40 °C / 50 °C (1)PB100769-70IcuRated service breaking capacity (kA rms) Utilisation category Rated short-time withstand current (kA rms) V AC 50/60 Hz Integrated instantaneous protection (kA peak ±10 %) Rated making capacity (kA peak) V AC 50/60 HzIcs Icw220/415/440 V 525 V 690 V 1150 V % Icu 1s 3s 220/415/440 V 525 V 690 V 1150 VIcmBreak time (ms) between tripping order and arc extinction Closing time (ms)Circuit-breaker as per NEMA AB1Breaking capacity (kA) V AC 50/60 Hz 240/480 V 600 VUnprotected circuit-breakerTripping by shunt trip as per IEC 60947-2Type of circuit breaker Ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms) V AC 50/60 Hz Rated service breaking capacity (kA rms) Rated short-time withstand current (kA rms) Icu Ics Icw 220...690 V % Icu 1s 3sOverload and short-circuit protection External protection relay: short-circuit protection, maximum delay: 350 ms (4) Rated making capacity (kA peak) V AC 50/60 Hz Icm 220...690 VSwitch-disconnector as per IEC 60947-3 and Annex AType of switch-disconnector Rated making capacity (kA peak) AC23A/AC3 category V AC 50/60 Hz Rated short-time withstand current (kA rms) AC23A/AC3 category V AC 50/60 Hz Icm Icw 220...690 V 1150 V 0.5 s 1s 3sMechanical and electrical durability as per IEC 60947-2/3 at In/IeService life Mechanical with maintenance C/O cycles x 1000 without maintenance Type of circuit breaker Rated current In (A) C/O cycles x 1000 Electrical without maintenance IEC 60947-2 Type of circuit breaker or switch-disconnector Rated operational current Ie (A) C/O cycles x 1000 Electrical without maintenance IEC 60947-3 Type of circuit breaker or switch-disconnector Rated operational current Ie (A) Motor power440 V (5) 690 V 1150 V AC23A 440 V (5) 690 V AC3 (6) 380/415 V (kW) 440 V (5) (kW) 690 V (kW) 440/690 V (5)(1) 50 °C: rear vertical connected. Refer to temperature derating tables for other connection types. (2) See the current-limiting curves in the &amp;quot;additional characteristics&amp;quot; section. (3) Equipped with a trip unit with a making current of 90 kA peak. (4) External protection must comply with permissible thermal constraints of the circuit breaker (please consult us). No fault-trip indication by the SDE or the reset button. (5) Available for 480 V NEMA. (6) Suitable for motor control (direct-on-line starting).C/O cycles x 1000 Electrical IEC 60947-3 Annex M/IEC 60947-4-1without maintenance]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="23">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCircuit breakers and switch-disconnectors NW08 to NW630Sensor selectionSensor rating (A) Ir threshold setting(A) 250 (1) 400 100 160 to 250 to 400 (1) For circuit-breaker NW02 , please consult us. 630 250 to 630 800 320 to 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 400 500 630 800 to 1000 to 1250 to 1600 to 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 6300 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 to 2500 to 3200 to 4000 to 5000 to 6300NW08 NW10 NW12 NW16800 800 400 to 800 N1 42 42 42 100 % B 42 22 88 88 88 25 &amp;lt; 70 42 42 1000 1000 400 to 1000 H1 65 65 65 1250 1250 630 to 1250 H2 100 85 85 1600 1600 800 to 1600 L1 (2) 150 130 100 H10 50NW202000 2000 1000 to 2000 H1 65 65 65 100 % B 65 36 143 143 143 25 &amp;lt; 70 65 65 H2 100 85 85 H3 150 130 100 L1 (2) 150 130 100 H10 50NW25 NW32 NW402500 2500 1250 to 2500 H1 65 65 65 100 % B 65 65 143 143 143 25 &amp;lt; 70 65 65 3200 3200 1600 to 3200 H2 100 85 85 4000 4000 2000 to 4000 H3 150 130 100 H10 50NW40b NW50 NW634000 4000 2000 to 4000 H1 100 100 100 100 % B 100 100 220 220 220 25 &amp;lt; 80 100 100 5000 5000 2500 to 5000 H2 150 130 100 6300 6300 3200 to 630065 36 143 143 143 2585 50 190 220 187 187 2530 30 80 330 286 220 1050 50 105 2585 75 190 220 187 187 2565 65 150 330 286 220 2530 30 80 330 286 220 1050 50 105 2585 75 190 220 187 187 2565 65 150 330 286 220 2550 50 105 25100 100 270 330 286 220 2565 65100 85150 100-100 85150 100150 100-100 85150 100-150 100HA 50 100 % 50 36 105HF (3) 85 85 50 187HA 50 100 % 50 36 105HF (3) 85 85 75 187HA 55 100 % 55 55 121HF (3) 85 85 75 187HA 85 100 % 85 85 187NW08/NW10/NW12NA 88 42 HA 105 50 36 HF 187 85 50 HA10 105 50 50NW16HA 105 50 36 HF 187 85 50 HA10 105 50 50NW20HA 105 50 36 HF 187 85 75 HA10 105 50 50NW25/NW32/NW40 NW40b/NW50/NW63HA 121 55 55 HF 187 85 75 HA10 105 50 50 HA 187 85 85 10 5 H1 H2 4000b/5000/6300 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 H1/H2/HA 4000b/5000/6300 1.5 1.525 12.5 N1/H1/H2 L1 800/1000/1250/1600 10 3 10 3 H1/H2/HA/HF 800/1000/1250/1600 10 10 H1/H2/HA/HF 800 1000 335 to 450 450 to 560 400 to 500 500 to 630 800 to 1000 y 800 6H10 0.51250 560 to 670 500 to 800 1000 to 12501600 670 to 900 800 to 1000 1250 to 160020 10 H1/H2 H3 L1 2000 8 2 3 6 2 3 H1/H2/H3/HA/HF 2000 8 6 H1/H2/H3/HA/HF 2000 900 to 1150 1000 to 1300 1600 to 2000H10 0.5H1/H2 H3 2500/3200/4000 5 1.25 2.5 1.25 H1/H2/H3/HA/HF 2500/3200/4000 5 2.5H10 0.5]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCircuit breakers and switch-disconnectors NW08 to NW630Sensor selectionSensor rating (A) Ir threshold setting(A) 250 (1) 400 100 160 to 250 to 400 (1) For circuit-breaker NW02 , please consult us. 630 250 to 630 800 320 to 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 400 500 630 800 to 1000 to 1250 to 1600 to 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 6300 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 to 2500 to 3200 to 4000 to 5000 to 6300NW08 NW10 NW12 NW16800 800 400 to 800 N1 42 42 42 100 % B 42 22 88 88 88 25 &amp;lt; 70 42 42 1000 1000 400 to 1000 H1 65 65 65 1250 1250 630 to 1250 H2 100 85 85 1600 1600 800 to 1600 L1 (2) 150 130 100 H10 50NW202000 2000 1000 to 2000 H1 65 65 65 100 % B 65 36 143 143 143 25 &amp;lt; 70 65 65 H2 100 85 85 H3 150 130 100 L1 (2) 150 130 100 H10 50NW25 NW32 NW402500 2500 1250 to 2500 H1 65 65 65 100 % B 65 65 143 143 143 25 &amp;lt; 70 65 65 3200 3200 1600 to 3200 H2 100 85 85 4000 4000 2000 to 4000 H3 150 130 100 H10 50NW40b NW50 NW634000 4000 2000 to 4000 H1 100 100 100 100 % B 100 100 220 220 220 25 &amp;lt; 80 100 100 5000 5000 2500 to 5000 H2 150 130 100 6300 6300 3200 to 630065 36 143 143 143 2585 50 190 220 187 187 2530 30 80 330 286 220 1050 50 105 2585 75 190 220 187 187 2565 65 150 330 286 220 2530 30 80 330 286 220 1050 50 105 2585 75 190 220 187 187 2565 65 150 330 286 220 2550 50 105 25100 100 270 330 286 220 2565 65100 85150 100-100 85150 100150 100-100 85150 100-150 100HA 50 100 % 50 36 105HF (3) 85 85 50 187HA 50 100 % 50 36 105HF (3) 85 85 75 187HA 55 100 % 55 55 121HF (3) 85 85 75 187HA 85 100 % 85 85 187NW08/NW10/NW12NA 88 42 HA 105 50 36 HF 187 85 50 HA10 105 50 50NW16HA 105 50 36 HF 187 85 50 HA10 105 50 50NW20HA 105 50 36 HF 187 85 75 HA10 105 50 50NW25/NW32/NW40 NW40b/NW50/NW63HA 121 55 55 HF 187 85 75 HA10 105 50 50 HA 187 85 85 10 5 H1 H2 4000b/5000/6300 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 H1/H2/HA 4000b/5000/6300 1.5 1.525 12.5 N1/H1/H2 L1 800/1000/1250/1600 10 3 10 3 H1/H2/HA/HF 800/1000/1250/1600 10 10 H1/H2/HA/HF 800 1000 335 to 450 450 to 560 400 to 500 500 to 630 800 to 1000 y 800 6H10 0.51250 560 to 670 500 to 800 1000 to 12501600 670 to 900 800 to 1000 1250 to 160020 10 H1/H2 H3 L1 2000 8 2 3 6 2 3 H1/H2/H3/HA/HF 2000 8 6 H1/H2/H3/HA/HF 2000 900 to 1150 1000 to 1300 1600 to 2000H10 0.5H1/H2 H3 2500/3200/4000 5 1.25 2.5 1.25 H1/H2/H3/HA/HF 2500/3200/4000 5 2.5H10 0.5]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="24">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Overview of functions0All Masterpact circuit breakers are equipped with a Micrologic control unit that can be changed on site. Control units are designed to protect Power circuits and loads. Alarms may be programmed for remote indications. Measurements of current, voltage, frequency, power and power quality optimise continuity of service and energy management.DependabilityIntegration of protection functions in an ASIC electronic component used in all Micrologic control units guarantees a high degree of reliability and immunity to conducted or radiated disturbances. On Micrologic A, P and H control units, advanced functions are managed by an independent microprocessor.AccessoriesCertain functions require the addition of Micrologic control unit accessories, described on page 32. The rules governing the various possible combinations can be found in the electronic catalogue (E-catalogue) accessible via the Products menu of the www.merlin-gerin.com web site.Micrologic name codesCurrent protectionMicrologic 2: basic protectionProtection: long time + instantaneous2.0 AX: type of protection b 2 for basic protection b 5 for selective protection b 6 for selective + earth-fault protection b 7 for selective + earth-leakage protection. Y: control-unit generation Identification of the control-unit generation. &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; signifies the first generation. Z: type of measurement b A for &amp;quot;ammeter&amp;quot; b P for &amp;quot;power meter&amp;quot; b H for &amp;quot;harmonic meter&amp;quot;.DB101116XYZMicrologic 5: basic protectionProtection: long time + short time + instantaneousPB100772-32DB101117Micrologic 6: selective + earth-fault protectionProtection: long time + short time + instantaneous + earth faultDB101117Micrologic 7: selective + earth-leakage protectionProtection: long time + short time + instantaneous + earth leakage up to 3200ADB10111722DB101119DB1011]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Overview of functions0All Masterpact circuit breakers are equipped with a Micrologic control unit that can be changed on site. Control units are designed to protect Power circuits and loads. Alarms may be programmed for remote indications. Measurements of current, voltage, frequency, power and power quality optimise continuity of service and energy management.DependabilityIntegration of protection functions in an ASIC electronic component used in all Micrologic control units guarantees a high degree of reliability and immunity to conducted or radiated disturbances. On Micrologic A, P and H control units, advanced functions are managed by an independent microprocessor.AccessoriesCertain functions require the addition of Micrologic control unit accessories, described on page 32. The rules governing the various possible combinations can be found in the electronic catalogue (E-catalogue) accessible via the Products menu of the www.merlin-gerin.com web site.Micrologic name codesCurrent protectionMicrologic 2: basic protectionProtection: long time + instantaneous2.0 AX: type of protection b 2 for basic protection b 5 for selective protection b 6 for selective + earth-fault protection b 7 for selective + earth-leakage protection. Y: control-unit generation Identification of the control-unit generation. &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; signifies the first generation. Z: type of measurement b A for &amp;quot;ammeter&amp;quot; b P for &amp;quot;power meter&amp;quot; b H for &amp;quot;harmonic meter&amp;quot;.DB101116XYZMicrologic 5: basic protectionProtection: long time + short time + instantaneousPB100772-32DB101117Micrologic 6: selective + earth-fault protectionProtection: long time + short time + instantaneous + earth faultDB101117Micrologic 7: selective + earth-leakage protectionProtection: long time + short time + instantaneous + earth leakage up to 3200ADB10111722DB101119DB1011]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="25">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Overview of functions0Measurements and programmable protectionA: ammeter b I1, I2, I3, IN, Iearth-fault, Iearth-leakage and maximeter for these measurements b fault indications b settings in amperes and in seconds. P: A + power meter + programmable protection b measurements of V, A, W, VAR, VA, Wh, VARh, VAh, Hz, Vpeak, Apeak, power factor and maximeters and minimeters b IDMTL long-time protection, minimum and maximum voltage and frequency, voltage and current imbalance, phase sequence, reverse power b load shedding and reconnection depending on power or current b measurements of interrupted currents, differentiated fault indications, maintenance indications, event histories and time-stamping, etc. H: P + harmonics b power quality: fundamentals, distortion, amplitude and phase of harmonics up to the 31st order b waveform capture after fault, alarm or on request b enhanced alarm programming: thresholds and actions.2.0 ADB1011205.0 ADB1011215.0 PDB1011225.0 HDB1011226.0 ADB1011236.0 PDB1011246.0 HDB1011247.0 ADB1011237.0 PDB1011247.0 HDB101124]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Overview of functions0Measurements and programmable protectionA: ammeter b I1, I2, I3, IN, Iearth-fault, Iearth-leakage and maximeter for these measurements b fault indications b settings in amperes and in seconds. P: A + power meter + programmable protection b measurements of V, A, W, VAR, VA, Wh, VARh, VAh, Hz, Vpeak, Apeak, power factor and maximeters and minimeters b IDMTL long-time protection, minimum and maximum voltage and frequency, voltage and current imbalance, phase sequence, reverse power b load shedding and reconnection depending on power or current b measurements of interrupted currents, differentiated fault indications, maintenance indications, event histories and time-stamping, etc. H: P + harmonics b power quality: fundamentals, distortion, amplitude and phase of harmonics up to the 31st order b waveform capture after fault, alarm or on request b enhanced alarm programming: thresholds and actions.2.0 ADB1011205.0 ADB1011215.0 PDB1011225.0 HDB1011226.0 ADB1011236.0 PDB1011246.0 HDB1011247.0 ADB1011237.0 PDB1011247.0 HDB101124]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="26">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Micrologic A &amp;quot;ammeter&amp;quot;0Micrologic A control units protect power circuits. They also offer measurements, display, communication and current maximeters. Version 6 provides earth-fault protection, version 7 provides earth-leakage protection.Protection settings ..................................................................Protection thresholds and delays are set using the adjustment dials. The selected values are momentarily displayed in amperes and in seconds. Overload protection True rms long-time protection. Thermal memory: thermal image before and after tripping. Setting accuracy may be enhanced by limiting the setting range using a different long-time rating plug. The long-time rating plug &amp;quot;OFF&amp;quot; enables to cancel the overload protection. Short-circuit protection Short-time (rms) and instantaneous protection. Selection of I2t type (ON or OFF) for short-time delay. Earth fault protection Residual or source ground return. Selection of I2t type (ON or OFF) for delay. Residual earth-leakage protection (Vigi). Operation without an external power supply. q Protected against nuisance tripping. k DC-component withstand class A up to 10 A. Neutral protection On three-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is not possible. On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using a three-position switch: neutral unprotected (4P 3d), neutral protection at 0.5 Ir (4P 3d + N/2), neutral protection at Ir (4P 4d). Zone selective interlocking (ZSI) A ZSI terminal block may be used to interconnect a number of control units to provide total discrimination for short-time and earth-fault protection, without a delay before tripping.DB101125&amp;quot;Ammeter&amp;quot; measurements .....................................................Micrologic A control units measure the true rms value of currents. They provide continuous current measurements from 0.2 to 20 In and are accurate to within 1.5% (including the sensors). A digital LCD screen continuously displays the most heavily loaded phase (Imax) or displays the I1, I2, I3, IN, Ig, I∆n, stored-current (maximeter) and setting values by successively pressing the navigation button. The optional external power supply makes it possible to display currents &amp;lt; 20 % In. Below 0.05 In, measurements are not significant. Between 0.05 and 0.2 In, accuracy is to within 0.5% In + 1.5% of the reading.Communication optionIn conjunction with the COM communication option, the control unit transmits the following: b setting values b all &amp;quot;ammeter&amp;quot; measurements b tripping causes b maximeter reset.1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13Long-time current setting and tripping delay. Overload signal (LED) at 1.125 Ir. Short-time pick-up and tripping delay. Instantaneous pick-up. Earth-leakage or earth-fault pick-up and tripping delay. Earth-leakage or earth-fault test button. Long-time rating plug screw. Test connector. Lamp test, reset and battery test. Indication of tripping cause. Digital display. Three-phase bargraph and ammeter. Navigation buttons.Note: Micrologic A control units come with a transparent leadseal cover as standard.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Micrologic A &amp;quot;ammeter&amp;quot;0Micrologic A control units protect power circuits. They also offer measurements, display, communication and current maximeters. Version 6 provides earth-fault protection, version 7 provides earth-leakage protection.Protection settings ..................................................................Protection thresholds and delays are set using the adjustment dials. The selected values are momentarily displayed in amperes and in seconds. Overload protection True rms long-time protection. Thermal memory: thermal image before and after tripping. Setting accuracy may be enhanced by limiting the setting range using a different long-time rating plug. The long-time rating plug &amp;quot;OFF&amp;quot; enables to cancel the overload protection. Short-circuit protection Short-time (rms) and instantaneous protection. Selection of I2t type (ON or OFF) for short-time delay. Earth fault protection Residual or source ground return. Selection of I2t type (ON or OFF) for delay. Residual earth-leakage protection (Vigi). Operation without an external power supply. q Protected against nuisance tripping. k DC-component withstand class A up to 10 A. Neutral protection On three-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is not possible. On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using a three-position switch: neutral unprotected (4P 3d), neutral protection at 0.5 Ir (4P 3d + N/2), neutral protection at Ir (4P 4d). Zone selective interlocking (ZSI) A ZSI terminal block may be used to interconnect a number of control units to provide total discrimination for short-time and earth-fault protection, without a delay before tripping.DB101125&amp;quot;Ammeter&amp;quot; measurements .....................................................Micrologic A control units measure the true rms value of currents. They provide continuous current measurements from 0.2 to 20 In and are accurate to within 1.5% (including the sensors). A digital LCD screen continuously displays the most heavily loaded phase (Imax) or displays the I1, I2, I3, IN, Ig, I∆n, stored-current (maximeter) and setting values by successively pressing the navigation button. The optional external power supply makes it possible to display currents &amp;lt; 20 % In. Below 0.05 In, measurements are not significant. Between 0.05 and 0.2 In, accuracy is to within 0.5% In + 1.5% of the reading.Communication optionIn conjunction with the COM communication option, the control unit transmits the following: b setting values b all &amp;quot;ammeter&amp;quot; measurements b tripping causes b maximeter reset.1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13Long-time current setting and tripping delay. Overload signal (LED) at 1.125 Ir. Short-time pick-up and tripping delay. Instantaneous pick-up. Earth-leakage or earth-fault pick-up and tripping delay. Earth-leakage or earth-fault test button. Long-time rating plug screw. Test connector. Lamp test, reset and battery test. Indication of tripping cause. Digital display. Three-phase bargraph and ammeter. Navigation buttons.Note: Micrologic A control units come with a transparent leadseal cover as standard.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="27">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Micrologic A &amp;quot;ammeter&amp;quot;0ProtectionLong time Current setting (A) Ir = In x … Tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir Time setting Time delay (s) Accuracy: 0 to -30 % Accuracy: 0 to -20 % Accuracy: 0 to -20 % Thermal memory (1) 0 to -40 % - (2) 0 to -60 % Instantaneous Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … Accuracy: ±10 % Time delayMicrologic 2.0 A0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1 Other ranges or disable by changing long-time rating plug 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600 0.7(1) 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24 0.7(2) 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6 20 minutes before and after trippingDB101126 DB101129 DB101128 DB101127tr (s) 1.5 x Ir 6 x Ir 7.2 x Ir1.522.53456810Max resettable time: 20 ms Max break time: 80 msAmmeterContinuous current measurements Display from 20 to 200 % of In Accuracy: 1.5 % (including sensors) MaximetersMicrologic 2.0 AI1 I2 I3 IN No auxiliary source (where I &amp;gt; 20 % In) I1 max I2 max I3 max IN maxProtectionLong time Current setting (A) Ir = In x … Tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir Time setting Time delay (s) Accuracy: 0 to -30 % Accuracy: 0 to -20 % Accuracy: 0 to -20 % Thermal memory (1) 0 to -40 % - (2) 0 to -60 % Short time Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … Accuracy: ±10 % Time setting tsd (s) Settings Time delay (ms) at 10 x Ir (I2t Off or I2t On) Instantaneous Pick-up (A) Accuracy: ±10 % Time delay Earth fault Pick-up (A) Accuracy: ±10 %Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 AMicrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 A 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1 Other ranges or disable by changing long-time rating plug 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600 0.7(1) 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24 0.7(2) 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6 20 minutes before and after trippingtr (s) 1.5 x Ir 6 x Ir 7.2 x Ir1.5 0 20 80 22 0.1 0.1 80 140 32.5 0.2 0.2 140 200 43 0.3 0.3 230 320 64 0.4 0.4 350 500 856810I2t Off I2t On tsd (max resettable time) tsd (max break time) Ii = In x …101215offMax resettable time: 20 ms Max break time: 50 ms Ig = In x … In y 400 A 400 A &amp;lt; In &amp;lt; 1250 A In u 1250 A Settings Micrologic 6.0 A A B C 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.2 0.3 0.4 500 640 720 0 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 20 80 140 80 140 200 Micrologic 7.0 A 0.5 1 2 60 60 140 140 140 200 230 230 320 D 0.5 0.5 800 0.3 0.3 230 320 3 350 350 500 E 0.6 0.6 880 0.4 0.4 350 500 5 800 800 1000 F 0.7 0.7 960 G 0.8 0.8 1040 H 0.9 0.9 1120 J 1 1 1200Time setting tg (s) Time delay (ms) at In or 1200 A (I2t Off or I2t On) Residual earth leakage (Vigi) Sensitivity (A) Accuracy: 0 to -20 % Time delay ∆t (ms)I2t Off I2t On tg (max resettable time) tg (max break time) I∆n Settings ∆t (max resettable time) ∆t (max break time)7102030AmmeterMicrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 AContinuous current measurements Display from 20 to 200 % of In I1 I2 I3 IN Ig I∆n Accuracy: 1.5 % (including sensors) No auxiliary source (where I &amp;gt; 20 % In) Maximeters I1 max I2 max I3 max IN max Ig max I∆n max Note: All current-based protection functions require no auxiliary source. The test / reset button resets maximeters, clears the tripping indication and tests the battery.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Micrologic A &amp;quot;ammeter&amp;quot;0ProtectionLong time Current setting (A) Ir = In x … Tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir Time setting Time delay (s) Accuracy: 0 to -30 % Accuracy: 0 to -20 % Accuracy: 0 to -20 % Thermal memory (1) 0 to -40 % - (2) 0 to -60 % Instantaneous Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … Accuracy: ±10 % Time delayMicrologic 2.0 A0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1 Other ranges or disable by changing long-time rating plug 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600 0.7(1) 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24 0.7(2) 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6 20 minutes before and after trippingDB101126 DB101129 DB101128 DB101127tr (s) 1.5 x Ir 6 x Ir 7.2 x Ir1.522.53456810Max resettable time: 20 ms Max break time: 80 msAmmeterContinuous current measurements Display from 20 to 200 % of In Accuracy: 1.5 % (including sensors) MaximetersMicrologic 2.0 AI1 I2 I3 IN No auxiliary source (where I &amp;gt; 20 % In) I1 max I2 max I3 max IN maxProtectionLong time Current setting (A) Ir = In x … Tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir Time setting Time delay (s) Accuracy: 0 to -30 % Accuracy: 0 to -20 % Accuracy: 0 to -20 % Thermal memory (1) 0 to -40 % - (2) 0 to -60 % Short time Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … Accuracy: ±10 % Time setting tsd (s) Settings Time delay (ms) at 10 x Ir (I2t Off or I2t On) Instantaneous Pick-up (A) Accuracy: ±10 % Time delay Earth fault Pick-up (A) Accuracy: ±10 %Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 AMicrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 A 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1 Other ranges or disable by changing long-time rating plug 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600 0.7(1) 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24 0.7(2) 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6 20 minutes before and after trippingtr (s) 1.5 x Ir 6 x Ir 7.2 x Ir1.5 0 20 80 22 0.1 0.1 80 140 32.5 0.2 0.2 140 200 43 0.3 0.3 230 320 64 0.4 0.4 350 500 856810I2t Off I2t On tsd (max resettable time) tsd (max break time) Ii = In x …101215offMax resettable time: 20 ms Max break time: 50 ms Ig = In x … In y 400 A 400 A &amp;lt; In &amp;lt; 1250 A In u 1250 A Settings Micrologic 6.0 A A B C 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.2 0.3 0.4 500 640 720 0 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 20 80 140 80 140 200 Micrologic 7.0 A 0.5 1 2 60 60 140 140 140 200 230 230 320 D 0.5 0.5 800 0.3 0.3 230 320 3 350 350 500 E 0.6 0.6 880 0.4 0.4 350 500 5 800 800 1000 F 0.7 0.7 960 G 0.8 0.8 1040 H 0.9 0.9 1120 J 1 1 1200Time setting tg (s) Time delay (ms) at In or 1200 A (I2t Off or I2t On) Residual earth leakage (Vigi) Sensitivity (A) Accuracy: 0 to -20 % Time delay ∆t (ms)I2t Off I2t On tg (max resettable time) tg (max break time) I∆n Settings ∆t (max resettable time) ∆t (max break time)7102030AmmeterMicrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 AContinuous current measurements Display from 20 to 200 % of In I1 I2 I3 IN Ig I∆n Accuracy: 1.5 % (including sensors) No auxiliary source (where I &amp;gt; 20 % In) Maximeters I1 max I2 max I3 max IN max Ig max I∆n max Note: All current-based protection functions require no auxiliary source. The test / reset button resets maximeters, clears the tripping indication and tests the battery.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="28">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Micrologic P &amp;quot;power&amp;quot;0Micrologic P control units include all the functions offered by Micrologic A. In addition, they measure voltages and calculate power and energy values. They also offer new protection functions based on currents, voltages, frequency and power reinforce load protection.Protection settings .......................................................+The adjustable protection functions are identical to those of Micrologic A (overloads, short-circuits, earth-fault and earth-leakage protection). Fine adjustment Within the range determined by the adjustment dial, fine adjustment of thresholds (to within one ampere) and time delays (to within one second) is possible on the keypad or remotely using the COM option. IDMTL (Inverse Definite Minimum Time lag) setting Coordination with fuse-type or medium-voltage protection systems is optimised by adjusting the slope of the overload-protection curve. This setting also ensures better operation of this protection function with certain loads. Neutral protection On three-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using the keypad or remotely using the COM option, to one of four positions: neutral unprotected (4P 3d), neutral protection at 0.5 Ir (4P 3d + N/2), neutral protection at Ir (4P 4d) and neutral protection at 1,6 Ir (4P 3d + 1,6N). Neutral protection at 1,6 Ir is used when the neutral conductor is twice the size of the phase conductors (major load imbalance, high level of third order harmonics). On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using a three-position switch or the keypad: neutral unprotected (4P 3d), neutral protection at 0.5 Ir (4P 3d + N/2), neutral protection at Ir (4P 4d). Neutral protection produces no effect if the long-time curve is set to one of the IDMTL protection settings.DB101485Programmable alarms and other protection..................... ....Depending on the thresholds and time delays set using the keypad or remotely using the COM option, the Micrologic P control unit monitors currents and voltage, power, frequency and the phase sequence. Each threshold overrun is signalled remotely via the COM option. Each threshold overrun may be combined with tripping (protection) or an indication carried out by an optional M2C or M6C programmable contact (alarm), or both (protection and alarm).Load shedding and reconnection..........................................Load shedding and reconnection parameters may be set according to the power or the current flowing through the circuit breaker. Load shedding is carried out by a supervisor via the COM option or by an M2C or M6C programmable contact.Measurements..........................................................................The Micrologic P control unit calculates in real time all the electrical values (V, A, W, VAR, VA, Wh, VARh, VAh, Hz), power factors and cosϕ factors. The Micrologic P control unit also calculates demand current and demand power over an adjustable time period. Each measurement is associated with a minimeter and a maximeter. In the event of tripping on a fault, the interrupted current is stored. The optional external power supply makes it possible to display the value with the circuit breaker open or not supplied.Histories and maintenance indicators...................................The last ten trips and alarms are recorded in two separate history files. Maintenance indications (contact wear, operation cycles, etc.) are recorded for local access.Indication option via programmable contactsThe M2C (two contacts) and M6C (six contacts) auxiliary contacts may be used to signal threshold overruns or status changes. They can be programmed using the keypad on the Micrologic P control unit or remotely using the COM option.1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16Long-time current setting and tripping delay. Overload signal (LED). Short-time pick-up and tripping delay. Instantaneous pick-up. Earth-leakage or earth-fault pick-up and tripping delay. Earth-leakage or earth-fault test button. Long-time rating plug screw. Test connector. Lamp + battery test and indications reset. Indication of tripping cause. High-resolution screen. Measurement display. Maintenance indicators. Protection settings. Navigation buttons. Hole for settings lockout pin on cover.Communication option (COM)The communication option may be used to: b remotely read and set parameters for the protection functions b transmit all the calculated indicators and measurements b signal the causes of tripping and alarms b consult the history files and the maintenance-indicator register. b maximeter reset. An event log and a maintenance register, stored in control-unit memory but not available locally, may be accessed in addition via the COM option.Note: Micrologic P control units come with a non-transparent lead-seal cover as standard.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Micrologic P &amp;quot;power&amp;quot;0Micrologic P control units include all the functions offered by Micrologic A. In addition, they measure voltages and calculate power and energy values. They also offer new protection functions based on currents, voltages, frequency and power reinforce load protection.Protection settings .......................................................+The adjustable protection functions are identical to those of Micrologic A (overloads, short-circuits, earth-fault and earth-leakage protection). Fine adjustment Within the range determined by the adjustment dial, fine adjustment of thresholds (to within one ampere) and time delays (to within one second) is possible on the keypad or remotely using the COM option. IDMTL (Inverse Definite Minimum Time lag) setting Coordination with fuse-type or medium-voltage protection systems is optimised by adjusting the slope of the overload-protection curve. This setting also ensures better operation of this protection function with certain loads. Neutral protection On three-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using the keypad or remotely using the COM option, to one of four positions: neutral unprotected (4P 3d), neutral protection at 0.5 Ir (4P 3d + N/2), neutral protection at Ir (4P 4d) and neutral protection at 1,6 Ir (4P 3d + 1,6N). Neutral protection at 1,6 Ir is used when the neutral conductor is twice the size of the phase conductors (major load imbalance, high level of third order harmonics). On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using a three-position switch or the keypad: neutral unprotected (4P 3d), neutral protection at 0.5 Ir (4P 3d + N/2), neutral protection at Ir (4P 4d). Neutral protection produces no effect if the long-time curve is set to one of the IDMTL protection settings.DB101485Programmable alarms and other protection..................... ....Depending on the thresholds and time delays set using the keypad or remotely using the COM option, the Micrologic P control unit monitors currents and voltage, power, frequency and the phase sequence. Each threshold overrun is signalled remotely via the COM option. Each threshold overrun may be combined with tripping (protection) or an indication carried out by an optional M2C or M6C programmable contact (alarm), or both (protection and alarm).Load shedding and reconnection..........................................Load shedding and reconnection parameters may be set according to the power or the current flowing through the circuit breaker. Load shedding is carried out by a supervisor via the COM option or by an M2C or M6C programmable contact.Measurements..........................................................................The Micrologic P control unit calculates in real time all the electrical values (V, A, W, VAR, VA, Wh, VARh, VAh, Hz), power factors and cosϕ factors. The Micrologic P control unit also calculates demand current and demand power over an adjustable time period. Each measurement is associated with a minimeter and a maximeter. In the event of tripping on a fault, the interrupted current is stored. The optional external power supply makes it possible to display the value with the circuit breaker open or not supplied.Histories and maintenance indicators...................................The last ten trips and alarms are recorded in two separate history files. Maintenance indications (contact wear, operation cycles, etc.) are recorded for local access.Indication option via programmable contactsThe M2C (two contacts) and M6C (six contacts) auxiliary contacts may be used to signal threshold overruns or status changes. They can be programmed using the keypad on the Micrologic P control unit or remotely using the COM option.1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16Long-time current setting and tripping delay. Overload signal (LED). Short-time pick-up and tripping delay. Instantaneous pick-up. Earth-leakage or earth-fault pick-up and tripping delay. Earth-leakage or earth-fault test button. Long-time rating plug screw. Test connector. Lamp + battery test and indications reset. Indication of tripping cause. High-resolution screen. Measurement display. Maintenance indicators. Protection settings. Navigation buttons. Hole for settings lockout pin on cover.Communication option (COM)The communication option may be used to: b remotely read and set parameters for the protection functions b transmit all the calculated indicators and measurements b signal the causes of tripping and alarms b consult the history files and the maintenance-indicator register. b maximeter reset. An event log and a maintenance register, stored in control-unit memory but not available locally, may be accessed in addition via the COM option.Note: Micrologic P control units come with a non-transparent lead-seal cover as standard.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="29">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Micrologic P &amp;quot;power&amp;quot;0ProtectionLong time (rms) Current setting (A) Ir = In x … Tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir Time setting Time delay (s) Accuracy: 0 to -30 % Accuracy: 0 to -20 % Accuracy: 0 to -20 % IDMTL setting Curve slope Thermal memory (1) 0 to -40 % - (2) 0 to -60 % Short time (rms) Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … Accuracy: ±10 % Time setting tsd (s) Settings Time delay (ms) at 10 Ir (I2t Off or I2t On) Instantaneous Pick-up (A) Accuracy: ±10 % Time delay Earth fault Pick-up (A) Accuracy: ±10 %Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 PMicrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 P 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1 Other ranges or disable by changing long-time rating plug 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600 0.7(1) 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24 0.7(2) 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6 SIT VIT EIT HVFuse DT 20 minutes before and after trippingDB101130+tr (s) 1.5 x Ir 6 x Ir 7.2 x Ir1.5 0 20 80 22 0.1 0.1 80 140 32.5 0.2 0.2 140 200 43 0.3 0.3 230 320 64 0.4 0.4 350 500 856810I2t Off I2t On tsd (max resettable time) tsd (max break time) Ii = In x …101215offDB101128Max resettable time: 20 ms Max break time: 50 ms Ig = In x … In y 400 A 400 A &amp;lt; In &amp;lt; 1250 A In u 1250 A Settings Micrologic 6.0 P A B C 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.2 0.3 0.4 500 640 720 0 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 20 80 140 80 140 200 Micrologic 7.0 P 0.5 1 2 60 60 140 140 140 200 230 230 320 D 0.5 0.5 800 0.3 0.3 230 320 3 350 350 500 E 0.6 0.6 880 0.4 0.4 350 500 5 800 800 1000 F 0.7 0.7 960 G 0.8 0.8 1040 H 0.9 0.9 1120 J 1 1 1200Time setting tg (s) Time delay (ms) at In or 1200 A (I2t Off or I2t On) Residual earth leakage (Vigi) Sensitivity (A) Accuracy: 0 to -20 % Time delay ∆t (ms)I∆n Settings ∆t (max resettable time) ∆t (max break time)7102030Alarms and other protectionCurrent Current unbalance Max. demand current Earth fault alarm Voltage Voltage unbalance Minimum voltage Maximum voltage Power Reverse power Frequency Minimum frequency Maximum frequency Phase sequence Sequence (alarm) Iunbalance Imax demand : I1, I2, I3, IN, It Uunbalance Umin Umax rP Fmin Fmax ∆ØMicrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 PDB101142 DB101143Threshold 0.05 to 0.6 Iaverage 0.2 In to In 10 to 100 % In(1)Delay 1 to 40 s 15 to 1500 s 1 to 10 s2 to 30 % x Uaverage 1 to 40 s 100 to Umax between phases 1.2 to 10 s Umin to 1200 between phases 1.2 to 10 s 5 to 500 kW 45 to Fmax Fmin to 440 Hz Ø1/2/3 or Ø1/3/2 0.2 to 20 s 1.2 to 5 s 1.2 to 5 s 0.3 sLoad shedding and reconnectionMeasured value Current Power 1) In y 400 A 30 % 400 A &amp;lt; In &amp;lt; 1250 A 20 % In u 1250 A 10 % I PMicrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 PThreshold 0.5 to 1 Ir per phases 200 kW to 10 MW Delay 20 % tr to 80 % tr 10 to 3600 sNote: all current-based protection functions require no auxiliary source. Voltage-based protection functions are connected to AC power via a voltage measurement input built into the circuit breaker.DB101129I2t Off I2t On tg (max resettable time) tg (max break time)]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Micrologic P &amp;quot;power&amp;quot;0ProtectionLong time (rms) Current setting (A) Ir = In x … Tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir Time setting Time delay (s) Accuracy: 0 to -30 % Accuracy: 0 to -20 % Accuracy: 0 to -20 % IDMTL setting Curve slope Thermal memory (1) 0 to -40 % - (2) 0 to -60 % Short time (rms) Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … Accuracy: ±10 % Time setting tsd (s) Settings Time delay (ms) at 10 Ir (I2t Off or I2t On) Instantaneous Pick-up (A) Accuracy: ±10 % Time delay Earth fault Pick-up (A) Accuracy: ±10 %Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 PMicrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 P 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1 Other ranges or disable by changing long-time rating plug 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600 0.7(1) 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24 0.7(2) 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6 SIT VIT EIT HVFuse DT 20 minutes before and after trippingDB101130+tr (s) 1.5 x Ir 6 x Ir 7.2 x Ir1.5 0 20 80 22 0.1 0.1 80 140 32.5 0.2 0.2 140 200 43 0.3 0.3 230 320 64 0.4 0.4 350 500 856810I2t Off I2t On tsd (max resettable time) tsd (max break time) Ii = In x …101215offDB101128Max resettable time: 20 ms Max break time: 50 ms Ig = In x … In y 400 A 400 A &amp;lt; In &amp;lt; 1250 A In u 1250 A Settings Micrologic 6.0 P A B C 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.2 0.3 0.4 500 640 720 0 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 20 80 140 80 140 200 Micrologic 7.0 P 0.5 1 2 60 60 140 140 140 200 230 230 320 D 0.5 0.5 800 0.3 0.3 230 320 3 350 350 500 E 0.6 0.6 880 0.4 0.4 350 500 5 800 800 1000 F 0.7 0.7 960 G 0.8 0.8 1040 H 0.9 0.9 1120 J 1 1 1200Time setting tg (s) Time delay (ms) at In or 1200 A (I2t Off or I2t On) Residual earth leakage (Vigi) Sensitivity (A) Accuracy: 0 to -20 % Time delay ∆t (ms)I∆n Settings ∆t (max resettable time) ∆t (max break time)7102030Alarms and other protectionCurrent Current unbalance Max. demand current Earth fault alarm Voltage Voltage unbalance Minimum voltage Maximum voltage Power Reverse power Frequency Minimum frequency Maximum frequency Phase sequence Sequence (alarm) Iunbalance Imax demand : I1, I2, I3, IN, It Uunbalance Umin Umax rP Fmin Fmax ∆ØMicrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 PDB101142 DB101143Threshold 0.05 to 0.6 Iaverage 0.2 In to In 10 to 100 % In(1)Delay 1 to 40 s 15 to 1500 s 1 to 10 s2 to 30 % x Uaverage 1 to 40 s 100 to Umax between phases 1.2 to 10 s Umin to 1200 between phases 1.2 to 10 s 5 to 500 kW 45 to Fmax Fmin to 440 Hz Ø1/2/3 or Ø1/3/2 0.2 to 20 s 1.2 to 5 s 1.2 to 5 s 0.3 sLoad shedding and reconnectionMeasured value Current Power 1) In y 400 A 30 % 400 A &amp;lt; In &amp;lt; 1250 A 20 % In u 1250 A 10 % I PMicrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 PThreshold 0.5 to 1 Ir per phases 200 kW to 10 MW Delay 20 % tr to 80 % tr 10 to 3600 sNote: all current-based protection functions require no auxiliary source. Voltage-based protection functions are connected to AC power via a voltage measurement input built into the circuit breaker.DB101129I2t Off I2t On tg (max resettable time) tg (max break time)]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="30">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Micrologic P &amp;quot;power&amp;quot;0Navigation from one display to another is intuitive. The six buttons on the keypad provide access to the menus and easy selection of values. When the setting cover is closed, the keypad may no longer be used to access the protection settings, but still provides access to the displays for measurements, histories, indicators, etc.DB101133DB101134Measurements..........................................................................Instantaneous values The value displayed on the screen is refreshed every second. Minimum and maximum values of measurements are stored in memory (minimeters and maximeters). CurrentsI rms Default display. Display of a maximum current. I max rms Voltages U rms V rms U average rms U unbalance Power, energy P active, Q reactive, S apparent E active, E reactive, E apparent A A A A V V V % 1 E-fault 1 E-fault 2 2 3 N E-leakage 3 N E-leakage12 23 31 1N 2N 3N (U12 + U23 + U31) / 3DB101135DB101136Display of a voltage.Display of a power.Power factor Frequencies FW, Var, VA Totals Wh, VARh, VAh Totals consumed - supplied Totals consumed Totals supplied PF Total HzDB101137DB101138Demand metering The demand is calculated over a fixed or sliding time window that may be programmed from 5 to 60 minutes. According to the contract signed with the power supplier, an indicator associated with a load shedding function makes it possible to avoid or minimise the costs of overrunning the subscribed power. Maximum demand values are systematically stored and time stamped (maximeter). CurrentsI demand I max demand A A A A W, Var, VA W, Var, VA 1 E-fault 1 E-fault Totals Totals 2 2 3 N E-leakage 3 N E-leakagePowerDisplay of a frequency. Display of a demand power. P, Q, S demand P, Q, S max demandMinimeters and maximeters Only the current and power maximeters may be displayed on the screen.Histories ...................................................................................The last ten trips and alarms are recorded in two separate history files that may be displayed on the screen. b tripping history: v type of fault v date and time v values measured at the time of tripping (interrupted current, etc.) b alarm history: v type of alarm v date and time v values measured at the time of the alarm.DB101139 DB101140Display of a tripping history.Display after tripping.Maintenance indicators (with COM option)...........................A number of maintenance indicators may be called up on the screen: b contact wear b operation counter: v cumulative total v total since last reset.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Micrologic P &amp;quot;power&amp;quot;0Navigation from one display to another is intuitive. The six buttons on the keypad provide access to the menus and easy selection of values. When the setting cover is closed, the keypad may no longer be used to access the protection settings, but still provides access to the displays for measurements, histories, indicators, etc.DB101133DB101134Measurements..........................................................................Instantaneous values The value displayed on the screen is refreshed every second. Minimum and maximum values of measurements are stored in memory (minimeters and maximeters). CurrentsI rms Default display. Display of a maximum current. I max rms Voltages U rms V rms U average rms U unbalance Power, energy P active, Q reactive, S apparent E active, E reactive, E apparent A A A A V V V % 1 E-fault 1 E-fault 2 2 3 N E-leakage 3 N E-leakage12 23 31 1N 2N 3N (U12 + U23 + U31) / 3DB101135DB101136Display of a voltage.Display of a power.Power factor Frequencies FW, Var, VA Totals Wh, VARh, VAh Totals consumed - supplied Totals consumed Totals supplied PF Total HzDB101137DB101138Demand metering The demand is calculated over a fixed or sliding time window that may be programmed from 5 to 60 minutes. According to the contract signed with the power supplier, an indicator associated with a load shedding function makes it possible to avoid or minimise the costs of overrunning the subscribed power. Maximum demand values are systematically stored and time stamped (maximeter). CurrentsI demand I max demand A A A A W, Var, VA W, Var, VA 1 E-fault 1 E-fault Totals Totals 2 2 3 N E-leakage 3 N E-leakagePowerDisplay of a frequency. Display of a demand power. P, Q, S demand P, Q, S max demandMinimeters and maximeters Only the current and power maximeters may be displayed on the screen.Histories ...................................................................................The last ten trips and alarms are recorded in two separate history files that may be displayed on the screen. b tripping history: v type of fault v date and time v values measured at the time of tripping (interrupted current, etc.) b alarm history: v type of alarm v date and time v values measured at the time of the alarm.DB101139 DB101140Display of a tripping history.Display after tripping.Maintenance indicators (with COM option)...........................A number of maintenance indicators may be called up on the screen: b contact wear b operation counter: v cumulative total v total since last reset.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="31">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Micrologic P &amp;quot;power&amp;quot;0With the communication optionDB101523Additional measurements, maximeters and minimeters Certain measured or calculated values are only accessible with the COM communication option: b I peak / 2, (I1 + I2 + I3)/3, I unbalance b load level in % Ir b total power factor. The maximeters and minimeters are available only via the COM option for use with a supervisor. Event log All events are time stamped. b trips b beginning and end of alarms b modifications to settings and parameters b counter resets b system faults: b fallback position b thermal self-protection b loss of time b overrun of wear indicators b test-kit connections b etc. Maintenance register Used as an aid in troubleshooting and to better plan for device maintenance operations. b highest current measured b operation counter b number of test-kit connections b number of trips in operating mode and in test mode b contact-wear indicator.Display of an event log on a supervisor.Additional technical characteristicsSetting the display language System messages may be displayed in six different languages. The desired language is selected via the keypad. Protection functions All current-based protection functions require no auxiliary source. Voltage-based protection functions are connected to AC power via a voltage measurement input built into the circuit breaker. Measurement functions Measurement functions are independent of the protection functions. The high-accuracy measurement module operates independently of the protection module, while remaining synchronised with protection events. Measurement-calculation mode b measurement functions implement the new &amp;quot;zero blind time&amp;quot; concept which consists in continuously measuring signals at a high sampling rate. The traditional &amp;quot;blind window&amp;quot; used to process samples no longer exists. This method ensures accurate energy calculations even for highly variable loads (welding machines, robots, etc.) b energies are calculated on the basis of the instantaneous power values, in two manners: v the traditional mode where only positive (consumed) energies are considered v the signed mode where the positive (consumed) and negative (supplied) energies are considered separately. Accuracy of measurements (including sensors) b voltage (V) 0.5 % b current (A) 1.5 % b frequency (Hz) 0.1 % b power (W) and energy (Wh) 2 %. Stored information The fine setting adjustments, the last 100 events and the maintenance register remain in the control-unit memory even when power is lost. Time-stamping Time-stamping is activated as soon as time is set manually or by a supervisor. No external power supply module is required (max. drift of 1 hour per year). Reset An individual reset, via the keypad or remotely, acts on alarms, minimum and maximum data, peak values, the counters and the indicators. ]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Micrologic P &amp;quot;power&amp;quot;0With the communication optionDB101523Additional measurements, maximeters and minimeters Certain measured or calculated values are only accessible with the COM communication option: b I peak / 2, (I1 + I2 + I3)/3, I unbalance b load level in % Ir b total power factor. The maximeters and minimeters are available only via the COM option for use with a supervisor. Event log All events are time stamped. b trips b beginning and end of alarms b modifications to settings and parameters b counter resets b system faults: b fallback position b thermal self-protection b loss of time b overrun of wear indicators b test-kit connections b etc. Maintenance register Used as an aid in troubleshooting and to better plan for device maintenance operations. b highest current measured b operation counter b number of test-kit connections b number of trips in operating mode and in test mode b contact-wear indicator.Display of an event log on a supervisor.Additional technical characteristicsSetting the display language System messages may be displayed in six different languages. The desired language is selected via the keypad. Protection functions All current-based protection functions require no auxiliary source. Voltage-based protection functions are connected to AC power via a voltage measurement input built into the circuit breaker. Measurement functions Measurement functions are independent of the protection functions. The high-accuracy measurement module operates independently of the protection module, while remaining synchronised with protection events. Measurement-calculation mode b measurement functions implement the new &amp;quot;zero blind time&amp;quot; concept which consists in continuously measuring signals at a high sampling rate. The traditional &amp;quot;blind window&amp;quot; used to process samples no longer exists. This method ensures accurate energy calculations even for highly variable loads (welding machines, robots, etc.) b energies are calculated on the basis of the instantaneous power values, in two manners: v the traditional mode where only positive (consumed) energies are considered v the signed mode where the positive (consumed) and negative (supplied) energies are considered separately. Accuracy of measurements (including sensors) b voltage (V) 0.5 % b current (A) 1.5 % b frequency (Hz) 0.1 % b power (W) and energy (Wh) 2 %. Stored information The fine setting adjustments, the last 100 events and the maintenance register remain in the control-unit memory even when power is lost. Time-stamping Time-stamping is activated as soon as time is set manually or by a supervisor. No external power supply module is required (max. drift of 1 hour per year). Reset An individual reset, via the keypad or remotely, acts on alarms, minimum and maximum data, peak values, the counters and the indicators. ]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="32">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Micrologic H &amp;quot;harmonics&amp;quot;0Micrologic H control units include all the functions offered by Micrologic P. Integrating significantly enhanced calculation and memory functions, the Micrologic H control unit offers in-depth analysis of power quality and detailed event diagnostics. It is intended for operation with a supervisor.In addition to the Micrologic P functions, the Micrologic H control unit offers: b in-depth analysis of power quality including calculation of harmonics and the fundamentals b diagnostics aid and event analysis through waveform capture b enhanced alarm programming to analyse and track down a disturbance on the AC power system.Measurements..........................................................................The Micrologic H control unit offers all the measurements carried out by Micrologic P, with in addition: b phase by phase measurements of: v power, energy v power factors b calculation of: v current and voltage total harmonic distortion (THD) v current, voltage and power fundamentals v current and voltage harmonics up to the 31st order. Instantaneous values displayed on the screen CurrentsI rms I max rms A A A A V V V % 1 E-fault 1 E-fault 2 2 3 N E-leakage 3 N E-leakageDB101486VoltagesU rms V rms U average rms U unbalance 12 23 31 1N 2N 3N (U12 + U23 + U31) / 3Power, energyP active, Q reactive, S apparent W, Var, VA Totals 1 2 E active, E reactive, E apparent Wh, VARh, VAh Totals consumed - supplied Totals consumed Totals supplied Power factor PF Total 1 2 33FrequenciesF HzPower-quality indicatorsTotal fundamentals UIPQS THD % UI U and Iharmonics Amplitude 3 5 7 9 11 13 Harmonics 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 and 13, monitored by electrical utilities, are displayed on the screen.Demand measurements Similar to the Micrologic P control unit, the demand values are calculated over a fixed or sliding time window that may be set from 5 to 60 minutes. CurrentsI demand I max demand A A A A W, Var, VA W, Var, VA 1 E-fault 1 E-fault Totals Totals 2 2 3 N E-leakage 3 N E-leakagePowerP, Q, S demand P, Q, S max demandMaximeters Only the current maximeters may be displayed on the screen.Histories and maintenance indicatorsThese functions are identical to those of the Micrologic P.Note: Micrologic H control units come with a non-transparent lead-seal cover as standard.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Micrologic H &amp;quot;harmonics&amp;quot;0Micrologic H control units include all the functions offered by Micrologic P. Integrating significantly enhanced calculation and memory functions, the Micrologic H control unit offers in-depth analysis of power quality and detailed event diagnostics. It is intended for operation with a supervisor.In addition to the Micrologic P functions, the Micrologic H control unit offers: b in-depth analysis of power quality including calculation of harmonics and the fundamentals b diagnostics aid and event analysis through waveform capture b enhanced alarm programming to analyse and track down a disturbance on the AC power system.Measurements..........................................................................The Micrologic H control unit offers all the measurements carried out by Micrologic P, with in addition: b phase by phase measurements of: v power, energy v power factors b calculation of: v current and voltage total harmonic distortion (THD) v current, voltage and power fundamentals v current and voltage harmonics up to the 31st order. Instantaneous values displayed on the screen CurrentsI rms I max rms A A A A V V V % 1 E-fault 1 E-fault 2 2 3 N E-leakage 3 N E-leakageDB101486VoltagesU rms V rms U average rms U unbalance 12 23 31 1N 2N 3N (U12 + U23 + U31) / 3Power, energyP active, Q reactive, S apparent W, Var, VA Totals 1 2 E active, E reactive, E apparent Wh, VARh, VAh Totals consumed - supplied Totals consumed Totals supplied Power factor PF Total 1 2 33FrequenciesF HzPower-quality indicatorsTotal fundamentals UIPQS THD % UI U and Iharmonics Amplitude 3 5 7 9 11 13 Harmonics 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 and 13, monitored by electrical utilities, are displayed on the screen.Demand measurements Similar to the Micrologic P control unit, the demand values are calculated over a fixed or sliding time window that may be set from 5 to 60 minutes. CurrentsI demand I max demand A A A A W, Var, VA W, Var, VA 1 E-fault 1 E-fault Totals Totals 2 2 3 N E-leakage 3 N E-leakagePowerP, Q, S demand P, Q, S max demandMaximeters Only the current maximeters may be displayed on the screen.Histories and maintenance indicatorsThese functions are identical to those of the Micrologic P.Note: Micrologic H control units come with a non-transparent lead-seal cover as standard.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="33">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Micrologic H &amp;quot;harmonics&amp;quot;0With the communication optionDB101521Additional measurements, maximeters and minimeters Certain measured or calculated values are only accessible with the COM communication option: b I peak / 2 (I1 + I2 + I3)/3, Iunbalance b load level in % Ir b power factor (total and per phase) b voltage and current THD b K factors of currents and average K factor b crest factors of currents and voltages b all the fundamentals per phase b fundamental current and voltage phase displacement b distortion power and distortion factor phase by phase b amplitude and displacement of current and voltage harmonics 3 to 31. The maximeters and minimeters are available only via the COM option for use with a supervisor.Display of harmonics up to 21th order.DB101522Waveform capture The Micrologic H control unit stores the last 4 cycles of each instantaneous current or voltage measurement. On request or automatically on programmed events, the control unit stores the waveforms. The waveforms may be displayed in the form of oscillograms by a supervisor via the COM option. Definition is 64 points per cycle. Pre-defined analogue alarms (1 to 53) Each alarm can be compared to user-set high and low thresholds. Overrun of a threshold generates an alarm. An alarm or combinations of alarms can be linked to programmable action such as selective recording of measurements in a log, waveform capture, etc. Event log and maintenance registers The Micrologic H offers the same event log and maintenance register functions as the Micrologic P. In addition, it produces a log of the minimums and maximums for each &amp;quot;real-time&amp;quot; value.Additional technical characteristicsSetting the display language System messages may be displayed in six different languages. The desired language is selected via the keypad. Proctection functions All current-based protection functions require no auxiliary source. Voltage-based protection functions are connected to AC power via a voltage measurement input built into the circuit breaker. Measurement functions Measurement functions are independent of the protection functions. The high-accuracy measurement module operates independently of the protection module, while remaining synchronised with protection events. Measurement-calculation mode An analogue calculation function dedicated to measurements enhances the accuracy of harmonic calculations and the power-quality indicators. The Micrologic H control unit calculates electrical magnitudes using 1.5 x In dynamics (20 x In for Micrologic P). Measurement functions implement the new &amp;quot;zero blind time&amp;quot; concept Energies are calculated on the basis of the instantaneous power values, in the traditional and signed modes. Harmonic components are calculated using the discrete Fourier transform (DFT). Accuracy of measurements (including sensors) b voltage (V) 0.5 % b current (A) 1.5 % b frequency (Hz) 0.1 % b power (W) and energy (Wh) 2 % b total harmonic distortion 1 % Stored information The fine-setting adjustments, the last 100 events and the maintenance register remain in the control-unit memory even when power is lost. Time-stamping Time-stamping is activated as soon as time is set manually or by a supervisor no external power supply module is required (max. drift of 1 hour per year). Reset An individual reset, via the keypad or remotely, acts on alarms, minimum and maximum data, peak values, the counters and the indicators.Waveform capture.DB101523Log.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Micrologic H &amp;quot;harmonics&amp;quot;0With the communication optionDB101521Additional measurements, maximeters and minimeters Certain measured or calculated values are only accessible with the COM communication option: b I peak / 2 (I1 + I2 + I3)/3, Iunbalance b load level in % Ir b power factor (total and per phase) b voltage and current THD b K factors of currents and average K factor b crest factors of currents and voltages b all the fundamentals per phase b fundamental current and voltage phase displacement b distortion power and distortion factor phase by phase b amplitude and displacement of current and voltage harmonics 3 to 31. The maximeters and minimeters are available only via the COM option for use with a supervisor.Display of harmonics up to 21th order.DB101522Waveform capture The Micrologic H control unit stores the last 4 cycles of each instantaneous current or voltage measurement. On request or automatically on programmed events, the control unit stores the waveforms. The waveforms may be displayed in the form of oscillograms by a supervisor via the COM option. Definition is 64 points per cycle. Pre-defined analogue alarms (1 to 53) Each alarm can be compared to user-set high and low thresholds. Overrun of a threshold generates an alarm. An alarm or combinations of alarms can be linked to programmable action such as selective recording of measurements in a log, waveform capture, etc. Event log and maintenance registers The Micrologic H offers the same event log and maintenance register functions as the Micrologic P. In addition, it produces a log of the minimums and maximums for each &amp;quot;real-time&amp;quot; value.Additional technical characteristicsSetting the display language System messages may be displayed in six different languages. The desired language is selected via the keypad. Proctection functions All current-based protection functions require no auxiliary source. Voltage-based protection functions are connected to AC power via a voltage measurement input built into the circuit breaker. Measurement functions Measurement functions are independent of the protection functions. The high-accuracy measurement module operates independently of the protection module, while remaining synchronised with protection events. Measurement-calculation mode An analogue calculation function dedicated to measurements enhances the accuracy of harmonic calculations and the power-quality indicators. The Micrologic H control unit calculates electrical magnitudes using 1.5 x In dynamics (20 x In for Micrologic P). Measurement functions implement the new &amp;quot;zero blind time&amp;quot; concept Energies are calculated on the basis of the instantaneous power values, in the traditional and signed modes. Harmonic components are calculated using the discrete Fourier transform (DFT). Accuracy of measurements (including sensors) b voltage (V) 0.5 % b current (A) 1.5 % b frequency (Hz) 0.1 % b power (W) and energy (Wh) 2 % b total harmonic distortion 1 % Stored information The fine-setting adjustments, the last 100 events and the maintenance register remain in the control-unit memory even when power is lost. Time-stamping Time-stamping is activated as soon as time is set manually or by a supervisor no external power supply module is required (max. drift of 1 hour per year). Reset An individual reset, via the keypad or remotely, acts on alarms, minimum and maximum data, peak values, the counters and the indicators.Waveform capture.DB101523Log.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="34">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Accessories and test equipment0External sensorsDB101524External sensor (CT).Rectangular sensor.External sensor for source ground return protection.External sensor for earth-fault and neutral protection The sensors, used with the 3P circuit breakers, are installed on the neutral conductor for: b neutral protection (with Micrologic P and H) b residual type earth-fault protection (with Micrologic A, P and H).. The rating of the sensor (CT) must be compatible with the rating of the circuit breaker: b NT06 to NT16: TC 400/1600 b NW08 to NW20: TC 400/2000 b NW25 to NW40: TC 1000/4000 b NW40b to NW63: TC 2000/6300. For oversized neutral protection the sensor rating must be compatible with the measurement range: 1.6 x IN (available up to NW 40 and NT 16). Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection The sensor is installed around the busbars (phases + neutral) to detect the zerophase sequence current required for the earth-leakage protection. Rectangular sensors are available in two sizes. Inside dimensions (mm) b 280 x 115 up to 1600 A for Masterpact NT and NW b 470 x 160 up to 3200 A for Masterpact NW. External sensor for source ground return protection The sensor is installed around the connection of the transformer neutral point to earth and connects to the Micrologic 6.0 control unit via an MDGF module to provide the source ground return (SGR) protection. Voltage measurement inputs Voltage measurement inputs are required for power measurements (Micrologic P or H) and for earth-leakage protection (Micrologic 7...). As standard, the control unit is supplied by internal voltage measurement inputs placed downstream of the pole for voltages between 220 and 690 V AC. On request, it is possible to replace the internal voltage measurement inputs by an external voltage input (PTE option) which enables the control unit to draw power directly from the distribution system upstream of the circuit breaker. An 3 m cable with ferrite comes with this PTE option.PB100836-32PB100834-48Long-time rating plugFour interchangeable plugs may be used to limit the long-time threshold setting range for higher accuracy. The time delay settings indicated on the plugs are for an overload of 6 Ir (for further details, see the characteristics on pages 207E2200_Ver7.3.fm/25 and 27). As standard, control units are equipped with the 0.4 to 1 plug. Setting rangesStandard Ir = In x… 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1 Low-setting option Ir = In x… 0.4 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.8 High-setting option Ir = In x… 0.80 0.82 0.85 0.88 0.90 0.92 0.95 0.98 1 Off plug No long-time protection (Ir = In for Isd setting) Important: long-time rating plugs must always be removed before carrying out insulation or dielectric withstand tests.PB100773-32External 24 V DC power-supply moduleThe external power-supply module makes it possible to use the display even if the circuit breaker is open or not supplied (for the exact conditions of use, see the &amp;quot;electrical diagrams&amp;quot; part of this catalogue). This module powers both the control unit (100 mA) and the M2C and M6C programmable contacts (100 mA). If the COM communication option is used, the communication bus requires its own 24 V DC power supply, independent with respect to that of the Micrologic control unit. With the Micrologic A control unit, this module makes it possible to display currents of less than 20 % of In. With the Micrologic P and H, it can be used to display fault currents after tripping. Characteristics b power supply: v 110/130, 200/240, 380/415 V AC (+10 % -15 %) v 24/30, 48/60, 100/125 V DC (+20 % -20 %) b output voltage: 24 V DC ±5 %, 200 mA. b ripple &amp;lt; 1 % b dielectric withstand : 3.5 kV rms between input/output, for 1 minute b overvoltage category: as per IEC 60947-1 cat. 4.PB101026-32]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Accessories and test equipment0External sensorsDB101524External sensor (CT).Rectangular sensor.External sensor for source ground return protection.External sensor for earth-fault and neutral protection The sensors, used with the 3P circuit breakers, are installed on the neutral conductor for: b neutral protection (with Micrologic P and H) b residual type earth-fault protection (with Micrologic A, P and H).. The rating of the sensor (CT) must be compatible with the rating of the circuit breaker: b NT06 to NT16: TC 400/1600 b NW08 to NW20: TC 400/2000 b NW25 to NW40: TC 1000/4000 b NW40b to NW63: TC 2000/6300. For oversized neutral protection the sensor rating must be compatible with the measurement range: 1.6 x IN (available up to NW 40 and NT 16). Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection The sensor is installed around the busbars (phases + neutral) to detect the zerophase sequence current required for the earth-leakage protection. Rectangular sensors are available in two sizes. Inside dimensions (mm) b 280 x 115 up to 1600 A for Masterpact NT and NW b 470 x 160 up to 3200 A for Masterpact NW. External sensor for source ground return protection The sensor is installed around the connection of the transformer neutral point to earth and connects to the Micrologic 6.0 control unit via an MDGF module to provide the source ground return (SGR) protection. Voltage measurement inputs Voltage measurement inputs are required for power measurements (Micrologic P or H) and for earth-leakage protection (Micrologic 7...). As standard, the control unit is supplied by internal voltage measurement inputs placed downstream of the pole for voltages between 220 and 690 V AC. On request, it is possible to replace the internal voltage measurement inputs by an external voltage input (PTE option) which enables the control unit to draw power directly from the distribution system upstream of the circuit breaker. An 3 m cable with ferrite comes with this PTE option.PB100836-32PB100834-48Long-time rating plugFour interchangeable plugs may be used to limit the long-time threshold setting range for higher accuracy. The time delay settings indicated on the plugs are for an overload of 6 Ir (for further details, see the characteristics on pages 207E2200_Ver7.3.fm/25 and 27). As standard, control units are equipped with the 0.4 to 1 plug. Setting rangesStandard Ir = In x… 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1 Low-setting option Ir = In x… 0.4 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.8 High-setting option Ir = In x… 0.80 0.82 0.85 0.88 0.90 0.92 0.95 0.98 1 Off plug No long-time protection (Ir = In for Isd setting) Important: long-time rating plugs must always be removed before carrying out insulation or dielectric withstand tests.PB100773-32External 24 V DC power-supply moduleThe external power-supply module makes it possible to use the display even if the circuit breaker is open or not supplied (for the exact conditions of use, see the &amp;quot;electrical diagrams&amp;quot; part of this catalogue). This module powers both the control unit (100 mA) and the M2C and M6C programmable contacts (100 mA). If the COM communication option is used, the communication bus requires its own 24 V DC power supply, independent with respect to that of the Micrologic control unit. With the Micrologic A control unit, this module makes it possible to display currents of less than 20 % of In. With the Micrologic P and H, it can be used to display fault currents after tripping. Characteristics b power supply: v 110/130, 200/240, 380/415 V AC (+10 % -15 %) v 24/30, 48/60, 100/125 V DC (+20 % -20 %) b output voltage: 24 V DC ±5 %, 200 mA. b ripple &amp;lt; 1 % b dielectric withstand : 3.5 kV rms between input/output, for 1 minute b overvoltage category: as per IEC 60947-1 cat. 4.PB101026-32]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="35">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Accessories and test equipment0Battery moduleThe battery module maintains display operation and communication with the supervisor if the power supply to the Micrologic control unit is interrupted. It is installed in series between the Micrologic control unit and the AD module. Characteristics b battery run-time: 4 hours (approximately) b mounted on vertical backplate or symmetrical rail.PB100771-24M2C, M6C programmable contactsThese contacts are optional equipment for the Micrologic P and H control units. They are described with the indication contacts for the circuit breakers. Characteristics M2C/M6CMinimum load Breaking capacity (A) p.f.: 0.7 V AC V DC M2C. M6C. 240 380 24 48 125 250 100 mA/24 V 5 3 1.8 1.5 0.4 0.15PB100774-32 PB100781-32M2C: 24 V DC power supplied by control unit (consumption 100 mA). M6C: external 24 V DC power supply required (consumption 100 mA).Spare partsPB100775-32Lead-seal covers A lead-seal cover controls access to the adjustment dials. When the cover is closed: b it is impossible to modify settings using the keypad unless the settings lockout pin on the cover is removed b the test connector remains accessible b the test button for the earth-fault and earth-leakage protection function remains accessible. Characteristics b transparent cover for basic Micrologic and Micrologic A control units b non-transparent cover for Micrologic P and H control units. Spare battery A battery supplies power to the LEDs identifying the tripping causes. Battery service life is approximately ten years. A test button on the front of the control unit is used to check the battery condition. The battery may be replaced on site when discharged.Lead-seal cover.Test equipmentPB100837-68Hand-held test kit The hand-held mini test kit may be used to: b check operation of the control unit and the tripping and pole-opening system by sending a signal simulating a short-circuit b supply power to the control units for settings via the keypad when the circuitbreaker is open (Micrologic P and H control units). Power source: standard LR6-AA battery. Full function test kit The test kit can be used alone or with a supporting personal computer. The test kit without PC may be used to check: b the mechanical operation of the circuit breaker b the electrical continuity of the connection between the circuit breaker and the control unit b operation of the control unit: v display of settings v automatic and manual tests on protection functions v test on the zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) function v inhibition of the earth-fault protection v inhibition of the thermal memory. The test kit with PC offers in addition: b the test report (software available on request).Portable test kit.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsMicrologic control units Accessories and test equipment0Battery moduleThe battery module maintains display operation and communication with the supervisor if the power supply to the Micrologic control unit is interrupted. It is installed in series between the Micrologic control unit and the AD module. Characteristics b battery run-time: 4 hours (approximately) b mounted on vertical backplate or symmetrical rail.PB100771-24M2C, M6C programmable contactsThese contacts are optional equipment for the Micrologic P and H control units. They are described with the indication contacts for the circuit breakers. Characteristics M2C/M6CMinimum load Breaking capacity (A) p.f.: 0.7 V AC V DC M2C. M6C. 240 380 24 48 125 250 100 mA/24 V 5 3 1.8 1.5 0.4 0.15PB100774-32 PB100781-32M2C: 24 V DC power supplied by control unit (consumption 100 mA). M6C: external 24 V DC power supply required (consumption 100 mA).Spare partsPB100775-32Lead-seal covers A lead-seal cover controls access to the adjustment dials. When the cover is closed: b it is impossible to modify settings using the keypad unless the settings lockout pin on the cover is removed b the test connector remains accessible b the test button for the earth-fault and earth-leakage protection function remains accessible. Characteristics b transparent cover for basic Micrologic and Micrologic A control units b non-transparent cover for Micrologic P and H control units. Spare battery A battery supplies power to the LEDs identifying the tripping causes. Battery service life is approximately ten years. A test button on the front of the control unit is used to check the battery condition. The battery may be replaced on site when discharged.Lead-seal cover.Test equipmentPB100837-68Hand-held test kit The hand-held mini test kit may be used to: b check operation of the control unit and the tripping and pole-opening system by sending a signal simulating a short-circuit b supply power to the control units for settings via the keypad when the circuitbreaker is open (Micrologic P and H control units). Power source: standard LR6-AA battery. Full function test kit The test kit can be used alone or with a supporting personal computer. The test kit without PC may be used to check: b the mechanical operation of the circuit breaker b the electrical continuity of the connection between the circuit breaker and the control unit b operation of the control unit: v display of settings v automatic and manual tests on protection functions v test on the zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) function v inhibition of the earth-fault protection v inhibition of the thermal memory. The test kit with PC offers in addition: b the test report (software available on request).Portable test kit.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="36">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCommunication COM option in Masterpact0The COM option is required for integration of the circuit breaker or switch-disconnector in a supervision system. Masterpact uses the Digipact or Modbus communications protocol for full compatibility with the SMS PowerLogic electrical-installation management systems. An external gateway is available for communication on other networks: b Profibus b Ethernet… Eco COM is limited to the transmission of metering data and does not allow the control of the circuit breaker.Digipact &amp;quot;device&amp;quot; communication module.For fixed devices, the COM option is made up of: b a &amp;quot;device&amp;quot; communication module, installed behind the Micrologic control unit and supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SDE ,PF and CH micro-contacts) and its kit for connection to XF and MX1 communicating voltage releases. For drawout devices, the COM option is made up of: b a &amp;quot;device&amp;quot; communication module, installed behind the Micrologic control unit and supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SDE, PF and CH micro-contacts) and its kit for connection to XF and MX1 communicating voltage releases b a &amp;quot;chassis&amp;quot; communication module supplied separately with its set of sensors (CE, CD and CT contacts). Status indication by the COM option is independent of the device indication contacts. These contacts remain available for conventional uses. Digipact or Modbus &amp;quot;Device&amp;quot; communication module This module is independent of the control unit. It receives and transmits information on the communication network. An infra-red link transmits data between the control unit and the communication module. Consumption: 30 mA, 24 V. Digipact or Modbus &amp;quot;chassis&amp;quot; communication module This module is independent of the control unit. With Modbus &amp;quot;chassis&amp;quot; communication module, this module makes it possible to address the chassis and to maintain the address when the circuit breaker is in the disconnected position. Consumption: 30 mA, 24 V. XF and MX1 communicating voltage releases The XF and MX1 communicating voltage releases are equipped for connection to the &amp;quot;device&amp;quot; communication module. The remote-tripping function (MX2 or MN) are independent of the communication option. They are not equipped for connection to the &amp;quot;device&amp;quot; communication module.PB100782-26PB100777-26Digipact &amp;quot;chassis&amp;quot; communication module.PB100782-26Modbus &amp;quot;device&amp;quot; communication module.DB102189OF SDE PF CHPB100802-27Modbus &amp;quot;chassis&amp;quot; communication module.1 2 3 4 5 6&amp;quot;Device&amp;quot; communication module. &amp;quot;Chassis&amp;quot; communication module (option). OF, SDE, PF and CH communicating &amp;quot;device&amp;quot; sensors. CE, CD and CT communicating &amp;quot;chassis&amp;quot; sensors. MX1 and XF communicating release. Control unit.: Hard wire. : Communication bus.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCommunication COM option in Masterpact0The COM option is required for integration of the circuit breaker or switch-disconnector in a supervision system. Masterpact uses the Digipact or Modbus communications protocol for full compatibility with the SMS PowerLogic electrical-installation management systems. An external gateway is available for communication on other networks: b Profibus b Ethernet… Eco COM is limited to the transmission of metering data and does not allow the control of the circuit breaker.Digipact &amp;quot;device&amp;quot; communication module.For fixed devices, the COM option is made up of: b a &amp;quot;device&amp;quot; communication module, installed behind the Micrologic control unit and supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SDE ,PF and CH micro-contacts) and its kit for connection to XF and MX1 communicating voltage releases. For drawout devices, the COM option is made up of: b a &amp;quot;device&amp;quot; communication module, installed behind the Micrologic control unit and supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SDE, PF and CH micro-contacts) and its kit for connection to XF and MX1 communicating voltage releases b a &amp;quot;chassis&amp;quot; communication module supplied separately with its set of sensors (CE, CD and CT contacts). Status indication by the COM option is independent of the device indication contacts. These contacts remain available for conventional uses. Digipact or Modbus &amp;quot;Device&amp;quot; communication module This module is independent of the control unit. It receives and transmits information on the communication network. An infra-red link transmits data between the control unit and the communication module. Consumption: 30 mA, 24 V. Digipact or Modbus &amp;quot;chassis&amp;quot; communication module This module is independent of the control unit. With Modbus &amp;quot;chassis&amp;quot; communication module, this module makes it possible to address the chassis and to maintain the address when the circuit breaker is in the disconnected position. Consumption: 30 mA, 24 V. XF and MX1 communicating voltage releases The XF and MX1 communicating voltage releases are equipped for connection to the &amp;quot;device&amp;quot; communication module. The remote-tripping function (MX2 or MN) are independent of the communication option. They are not equipped for connection to the &amp;quot;device&amp;quot; communication module.PB100782-26PB100777-26Digipact &amp;quot;chassis&amp;quot; communication module.PB100782-26Modbus &amp;quot;device&amp;quot; communication module.DB102189OF SDE PF CHPB100802-27Modbus &amp;quot;chassis&amp;quot; communication module.1 2 3 4 5 6&amp;quot;Device&amp;quot; communication module. &amp;quot;Chassis&amp;quot; communication module (option). OF, SDE, PF and CH communicating &amp;quot;device&amp;quot; sensors. CE, CD and CT communicating &amp;quot;chassis&amp;quot; sensors. MX1 and XF communicating release. Control unit.: Hard wire. : Communication bus.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="37">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCommunication Overview of functions0DB101521The Masterpact circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors are compatible with the Digipact or Modbus COM option. The COM option may be used to: b identify the device b indicate status conditions b control the device. Depending on the different types of Micrologic (A, P, H) control units, the COM option also offers: b setting of the protection and alarms functions b analysis of the AC-power parameters for operating-assistance and maintenance purposes. Switch-disconnector with Circuit breaker with communication bus communication bus Digipact Modbus Digipact Modbus Device identificationAddress Rating Type of device Type of control unit Type of long-time rating plug b b b b b b b b b b A A A A A A A A A P P P P P P P P P H H H H H H H H H A A A A A A A A A P P P P P P P P P P H H H H H H H H H HStatus indicationsON/OFF OF Spring charged CH Ready to close PF Fault-trip SDE Connected/disconnected/ test position CE/CD/CTControlsON/OFF MX/XF Spring charging Reset of the mechanical indicator b b A P H A P HProtections and alarms settingsReading of protections settings Writing of fine settings in the range imposed by the adjustment dials Reading/writing of alarms (load shedding and reconnect, M2C, etc.) Reading/writing of custom alarms A P H A P P P H H H HOperating and maintenance aids MeasurementCurrent Voltages, frequency, power, etc. Power quality: fundamental, harmonics Programming of demand metering A P P H H A P P P A P P H H H H H H H H P P P H H HFault readingsType of fault Interrupted currentWaveform captureOn faults On demand or programmedHistories and logsTrip history Alarm history Event logsIndicatorsCounter operation A P H A P H Contact wear P H Maintenance register P H Note: see the description of the Micrologic control units for further details on protection and alarms, measurements, waveform capture, histories, logs and maintenance indicators.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCommunication Overview of functions0DB101521The Masterpact circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors are compatible with the Digipact or Modbus COM option. The COM option may be used to: b identify the device b indicate status conditions b control the device. Depending on the different types of Micrologic (A, P, H) control units, the COM option also offers: b setting of the protection and alarms functions b analysis of the AC-power parameters for operating-assistance and maintenance purposes. Switch-disconnector with Circuit breaker with communication bus communication bus Digipact Modbus Digipact Modbus Device identificationAddress Rating Type of device Type of control unit Type of long-time rating plug b b b b b b b b b b A A A A A A A A A P P P P P P P P P H H H H H H H H H A A A A A A A A A P P P P P P P P P P H H H H H H H H H HStatus indicationsON/OFF OF Spring charged CH Ready to close PF Fault-trip SDE Connected/disconnected/ test position CE/CD/CTControlsON/OFF MX/XF Spring charging Reset of the mechanical indicator b b A P H A P HProtections and alarms settingsReading of protections settings Writing of fine settings in the range imposed by the adjustment dials Reading/writing of alarms (load shedding and reconnect, M2C, etc.) Reading/writing of custom alarms A P H A P P P H H H HOperating and maintenance aids MeasurementCurrent Voltages, frequency, power, etc. Power quality: fundamental, harmonics Programming of demand metering A P P H H A P P P A P P H H H H H H H H P P P H H HFault readingsType of fault Interrupted currentWaveform captureOn faults On demand or programmedHistories and logsTrip history Alarm history Event logsIndicatorsCounter operation A P H A P H Contact wear P H Maintenance register P H Note: see the description of the Micrologic control units for further details on protection and alarms, measurements, waveform capture, histories, logs and maintenance indicators.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="38">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCommunication Masterpact in a communication network0DB101146DevicesCircuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control units may be connected to either a Digipact or Modbus communication bus. The information made available depends on the type of Micrologic control unit (A, P or H) and on the type of communication bus (Digipact or Modbus). Switch-disconnectors can be connected to the Digipact or Modbus communication bus. The information made available is the status of the switch-disconnector.Communication bus Digipact busThe Digipact bus is the internal bus of the low-voltage switchboard in which the Digipact communicating devices are installed (Masterpact with Digipact COM, PM150, SC150, UA150, etc.). This bus must be equipped with a DC150 data concentrator (see the Powerlogic System catalogue). Addresses Addressing is carried out by the DC150 data concentrator. Number of devices The maximum number of devices that may be connected to the Digipact bus is calculated in terms of &amp;quot;communication points&amp;quot;. These points correspond to the amount of traffic the bus can handle. The total number of points for the various devices connected to a single bus must not exceed 100. If the required devices represent more than 100 points, add a second Digipact internal bus. Communicating device Number of pointsDC150 data concentrator Micrologic + Digipact COM PM150 SC150 UA150 4 4 4 4 4Length of bus The maximum recommended length for the Digipact internal bus is 200 meters. Bus power source Power is supplied by the DC150 data concentrator (24 V).]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCommunication Masterpact in a communication network0DB101146DevicesCircuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control units may be connected to either a Digipact or Modbus communication bus. The information made available depends on the type of Micrologic control unit (A, P or H) and on the type of communication bus (Digipact or Modbus). Switch-disconnectors can be connected to the Digipact or Modbus communication bus. The information made available is the status of the switch-disconnector.Communication bus Digipact busThe Digipact bus is the internal bus of the low-voltage switchboard in which the Digipact communicating devices are installed (Masterpact with Digipact COM, PM150, SC150, UA150, etc.). This bus must be equipped with a DC150 data concentrator (see the Powerlogic System catalogue). Addresses Addressing is carried out by the DC150 data concentrator. Number of devices The maximum number of devices that may be connected to the Digipact bus is calculated in terms of &amp;quot;communication points&amp;quot;. These points correspond to the amount of traffic the bus can handle. The total number of points for the various devices connected to a single bus must not exceed 100. If the required devices represent more than 100 points, add a second Digipact internal bus. Communicating device Number of pointsDC150 data concentrator Micrologic + Digipact COM PM150 SC150 UA150 4 4 4 4 4Length of bus The maximum recommended length for the Digipact internal bus is 200 meters. Bus power source Power is supplied by the DC150 data concentrator (24 V).]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="39">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCommunication Masterpact in a communication networkModbus busThe Modbus RS485 (RTU protocol) system is an open bus on which communicating Modbus devices (Masterpact with Modbus COM, PM300, Sepam, Vigilohm, etc.) are installed. All types of PLCs and microcomputers may be connected to the bus. Addresses The Modbus parameters (address, baud rate, parity) are entered using the keypad on the Micrologic A, P or H. For a switch-disconnector, it is necessary to use the RSU (Remote Setting Utility) Micrologic utility. The software layer of the Modbus protocol can manage up to 255 addresses (1 to 255). The &amp;quot;device&amp;quot; communication module comprises three addresses linked to: b circuit-breaker manager b measurement manager b protection manager. The &amp;quot;chassis&amp;quot; communication module comprises one address linked to the chassis manager. The division of the system into four managers secures data exchange with the supervision system and the circuit-breaker actuators. The manager addresses are automatically derived from the circuit-breaker address @xx entered via the Micrologic control unit (the default address is 47). Logic addresses@xx @xx + 50 @xx + 200 @xx + 100 Circuit-breaker manager Chassis manager Measurement managers Protection manager (1 to 47) (51 to 97) (201 to 247) (101 to 147)0Number of devices The maximum number of devices that may be connected to the Modbus bus depends on the type of device (Masterpact with Modbus COM, PM500, Sepam, Vigilohm, etc.), the baud rate (19200 is recommended), the volume of data exchanged and the desired response time. The RS485 physical layer offers up to 32 connection points on the bus (1 master, 31 slaves). A fixed device requires only one connection point (communication module on the device). A drawout device uses two connection points (communication modules on the device and on the chassis). The number must never exceed 31 fixed devices or 15 drawout devices. Length of bus The maximum recommended length for the Modbus bus is 1200 meters. Bus power source A 24 V DC power supply is required (less than 20 % ripple, insulation class II).Communication interfaceThe Modbus bus may be connected to the central processing device in any of three manners: b direct link to a PLC. The communication interface is not required if the PLC is equipped with a Modbus port b direct link to a computer. The Modbus (RS485) / Serial port (RS232) communication interface is required b connection to a TCP/IP (Ethernet) network. The Modbus (RS485) / TCP/IP (Ethernet) communication interface is required.SoftwareTo make use of the information provided by the communicating devices, software with a Modbus driver must be used.Micrologic utilitiesThis is a set of software that may be used with a PC to: b display the variables (I, U, P, E, etc.) with the RDU (Remote Display Utility) b read/write the settings with the RSU (Remote Setting Utility) b remotely control (ON / OFF) the device with the RCU (Remote Control Utility). Micrologic utilities are available upon requestSMS (System Manager Software)SMS is a software to monitor LV and/or MV electrical energy. The SMS family includes a software range depending on the application and function, from single product monitoring to the management of a multiple building: b Power Meter and Circuit Monitor units b LV devices b Sepam units. ]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCommunication Masterpact in a communication networkModbus busThe Modbus RS485 (RTU protocol) system is an open bus on which communicating Modbus devices (Masterpact with Modbus COM, PM300, Sepam, Vigilohm, etc.) are installed. All types of PLCs and microcomputers may be connected to the bus. Addresses The Modbus parameters (address, baud rate, parity) are entered using the keypad on the Micrologic A, P or H. For a switch-disconnector, it is necessary to use the RSU (Remote Setting Utility) Micrologic utility. The software layer of the Modbus protocol can manage up to 255 addresses (1 to 255). The &amp;quot;device&amp;quot; communication module comprises three addresses linked to: b circuit-breaker manager b measurement manager b protection manager. The &amp;quot;chassis&amp;quot; communication module comprises one address linked to the chassis manager. The division of the system into four managers secures data exchange with the supervision system and the circuit-breaker actuators. The manager addresses are automatically derived from the circuit-breaker address @xx entered via the Micrologic control unit (the default address is 47). Logic addresses@xx @xx + 50 @xx + 200 @xx + 100 Circuit-breaker manager Chassis manager Measurement managers Protection manager (1 to 47) (51 to 97) (201 to 247) (101 to 147)0Number of devices The maximum number of devices that may be connected to the Modbus bus depends on the type of device (Masterpact with Modbus COM, PM500, Sepam, Vigilohm, etc.), the baud rate (19200 is recommended), the volume of data exchanged and the desired response time. The RS485 physical layer offers up to 32 connection points on the bus (1 master, 31 slaves). A fixed device requires only one connection point (communication module on the device). A drawout device uses two connection points (communication modules on the device and on the chassis). The number must never exceed 31 fixed devices or 15 drawout devices. Length of bus The maximum recommended length for the Modbus bus is 1200 meters. Bus power source A 24 V DC power supply is required (less than 20 % ripple, insulation class II).Communication interfaceThe Modbus bus may be connected to the central processing device in any of three manners: b direct link to a PLC. The communication interface is not required if the PLC is equipped with a Modbus port b direct link to a computer. The Modbus (RS485) / Serial port (RS232) communication interface is required b connection to a TCP/IP (Ethernet) network. The Modbus (RS485) / TCP/IP (Ethernet) communication interface is required.SoftwareTo make use of the information provided by the communicating devices, software with a Modbus driver must be used.Micrologic utilitiesThis is a set of software that may be used with a PC to: b display the variables (I, U, P, E, etc.) with the RDU (Remote Display Utility) b read/write the settings with the RSU (Remote Setting Utility) b remotely control (ON / OFF) the device with the RCU (Remote Control Utility). Micrologic utilities are available upon requestSMS (System Manager Software)SMS is a software to monitor LV and/or MV electrical energy. The SMS family includes a software range depending on the application and function, from single product monitoring to the management of a multiple building: b Power Meter and Circuit Monitor units b LV devices b Sepam units. ]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="40">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCommunication Masterpact and the MPS100 Micro Power ServerMicro Power Server makes data collection easy for monitoring Masterpact/Compact circuit breakersNow, more than ever, there is a need to monitor electrical distribution systems in industrial and large commercial applications. The key to managing all equipment, maximising efficiencies, reducing costs and increasing up time is having the right tools. Micro Power Server MPS100 is designed to withstand harsh electrical environments and provide a consistent flow of easy to interpret information.0The MPS100 Micro Power Server: b notifies maintenance staff when any preset alarm or trip is activated by the Micrologic trip unit, automatically sending an e-mail and/or SMS b data logs are periodically forwarded by e-mail b the e-mails are sent via an Ethernet local area network (LAN) or remotely via modem.Micro Power Server is designed for unattended operation within the main LV switchboardThe MPS100 is a self-contained facility information server that serves as a standalone device for power system monitoring. It is used to transfer power system information via a standard web browser over an Ethernet local area network (LAN) or via modem, making it possible to view power system information on a PC with an Ethernet connection. In either capacity, the Micro Power Server functions as a web server for Micrologic trip unit and Power Meter (PM500) supervision, automatically notifying (e-mail and/or SMS) maintenance staff when any preset alarm or trip is activated in the Micrologic trip unit.PB100804-60PB100823-42Benefitsb view your main LV switchboard without installing software on your local PC, eliminating the need for a dedicated PC with specific software b Micro Power Server allows centralised monitoring, so you no longer waste precious time walking around the facility to collect data b view your main LV switchboard via a modem connection (GSM or switched network), avoiding the need for a LAN b maintenance people are automatically notified at any time, wherever they are, so you do not have to stay in front of a monitor all day long b data logs can be periodically forwarded by sending e-mails to the relevant people (maintenance, accounting, application service provider) automatically b possibility to monitor/notify six external events (limit switches, auxiliary switches...) b back-up of Micrologic trip unit settings in the memory of the MPS100, so you know where to retrieve it when necessary.MPS100 Micro Power Server.PB100799-68Main LV switchboard.PB100877-67Monitoring of your main LV switchboard via embedded web pages in the MPS100 accessible with a standard web browser.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCommunication Masterpact and the MPS100 Micro Power ServerMicro Power Server makes data collection easy for monitoring Masterpact/Compact circuit breakersNow, more than ever, there is a need to monitor electrical distribution systems in industrial and large commercial applications. The key to managing all equipment, maximising efficiencies, reducing costs and increasing up time is having the right tools. Micro Power Server MPS100 is designed to withstand harsh electrical environments and provide a consistent flow of easy to interpret information.0The MPS100 Micro Power Server: b notifies maintenance staff when any preset alarm or trip is activated by the Micrologic trip unit, automatically sending an e-mail and/or SMS b data logs are periodically forwarded by e-mail b the e-mails are sent via an Ethernet local area network (LAN) or remotely via modem.Micro Power Server is designed for unattended operation within the main LV switchboardThe MPS100 is a self-contained facility information server that serves as a standalone device for power system monitoring. It is used to transfer power system information via a standard web browser over an Ethernet local area network (LAN) or via modem, making it possible to view power system information on a PC with an Ethernet connection. In either capacity, the Micro Power Server functions as a web server for Micrologic trip unit and Power Meter (PM500) supervision, automatically notifying (e-mail and/or SMS) maintenance staff when any preset alarm or trip is activated in the Micrologic trip unit.PB100804-60PB100823-42Benefitsb view your main LV switchboard without installing software on your local PC, eliminating the need for a dedicated PC with specific software b Micro Power Server allows centralised monitoring, so you no longer waste precious time walking around the facility to collect data b view your main LV switchboard via a modem connection (GSM or switched network), avoiding the need for a LAN b maintenance people are automatically notified at any time, wherever they are, so you do not have to stay in front of a monitor all day long b data logs can be periodically forwarded by sending e-mails to the relevant people (maintenance, accounting, application service provider) automatically b possibility to monitor/notify six external events (limit switches, auxiliary switches...) b back-up of Micrologic trip unit settings in the memory of the MPS100, so you know where to retrieve it when necessary.MPS100 Micro Power Server.PB100799-68Main LV switchboard.PB100877-67Monitoring of your main LV switchboard via embedded web pages in the MPS100 accessible with a standard web browser.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="41">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCommunication Masterpact and the MPS100 Micro Power ServerTypical architecture0PB100799-34DB103810It is possible to combine the different types of architecture.Supported Modbus devicesb Micrologic trip units b Power Meters (PM500, PM700, PM800...). Maximum recommended connected devices is 10.PB100800-15 PB100803-14Featuresb access to the power system via a standard PC web browser b real-time data displayed with an intuitive and user friendly interface (dashboard) b Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP connectivity directly to the LAN or via modem (Point to Point Protocol services) b SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) client (capacity to send e-mail) b local logging of data such as energy, power, current… b set-up and system configuration through MPS100 embedded HTML pages b user interface translatable in any language, factory settings in English and French b 6 inputs/2 outputs (no-volt contact) b DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) client.Micrologic trip unit.Power Meter PM500.Main switchboard at Plaza hotel. Air conditioning breaker tripped on ground fault Ig = 350 A. 06:37 on 10/12/2002PB100805-23Technical characteristicsPower supply 24 V DC ±15 %, consumption = 250 mA Operating temperature 0 to +50 °C Rugged compact metal housing 35 x 218 x 115 mm (H x W x D) Additional information available at: http://194.2.245.4/mkt/microser.nsf User name: MPS, Password: MPS100Part numbersMPS100 Micro Power Server 33507Short Message Service (SMS).]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsCommunication Masterpact and the MPS100 Micro Power ServerTypical architecture0PB100799-34DB103810It is possible to combine the different types of architecture.Supported Modbus devicesb Micrologic trip units b Power Meters (PM500, PM700, PM800...). Maximum recommended connected devices is 10.PB100800-15 PB100803-14Featuresb access to the power system via a standard PC web browser b real-time data displayed with an intuitive and user friendly interface (dashboard) b Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP connectivity directly to the LAN or via modem (Point to Point Protocol services) b SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) client (capacity to send e-mail) b local logging of data such as energy, power, current… b set-up and system configuration through MPS100 embedded HTML pages b user interface translatable in any language, factory settings in English and French b 6 inputs/2 outputs (no-volt contact) b DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) client.Micrologic trip unit.Power Meter PM500.Main switchboard at Plaza hotel. Air conditioning breaker tripped on ground fault Ig = 350 A. 06:37 on 10/12/2002PB100805-23Technical characteristicsPower supply 24 V DC ±15 %, consumption = 250 mA Operating temperature 0 to +50 °C Rugged compact metal housing 35 x 218 x 115 mm (H x W x D) Additional information available at: http://194.2.245.4/mkt/microser.nsf User name: MPS, Password: MPS100Part numbersMPS100 Micro Power Server 33507Short Message Service (SMS).]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="42">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsConnections Overview of solutions0Three types of connection are available: b vertical or horizontal rear connection b front connection b mixed connection. The solutions presented are similar in principle for all Masterpact NT and NW fixed and drawout devices.Rear connectionHorizontalPB100783-40 PB100784-40VerticalSimply turn a horizontal rear connector 90° to make it a vertical connector. For the 6300 A circuit breaker, only vertical connection is available.Front connectionPB100785-40Front connection is available for NW fixed and drawout versions up to 3200 A.Mixed connectionPB100786-40 PB100787-40PB100788-40Note: Masterpact circuit breakers can be connected indifferently with bare-copper, tinned-copper and tinned-aluminium conductors, requiring no particular treatment.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsConnections Overview of solutions0Three types of connection are available: b vertical or horizontal rear connection b front connection b mixed connection. The solutions presented are similar in principle for all Masterpact NT and NW fixed and drawout devices.Rear connectionHorizontalPB100783-40 PB100784-40VerticalSimply turn a horizontal rear connector 90° to make it a vertical connector. For the 6300 A circuit breaker, only vertical connection is available.Front connectionPB100785-40Front connection is available for NW fixed and drawout versions up to 3200 A.Mixed connectionPB100786-40 PB100787-40PB100788-40Note: Masterpact circuit breakers can be connected indifferently with bare-copper, tinned-copper and tinned-aluminium conductors, requiring no particular treatment.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="43">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsConnections Accessories0Type of accessoryMasterpact NT06 to NT16 FixedFront connectionDB101156DrawoutFront connectionDB101156Masterpact NW08 to NW63 Fixed DrawoutRear connection Front connection Rear connection Front connection Rear connectionRear connectionVertical connection adaptersCable lug adaptersDB101147 DB101147Interphase barriersDB101148 DB101149 DB101149 DB101149(1)(1)(2)(2)SpreadersDB101150Disconnectable front-connection adapterDB101151Safety shutters with padlockingDB101152 DB101153standardDB101150standardShutter position indication and lockingDB101154 DB101155(3)DB101155Arc chute screen(4)(1) Mandatory for voltages &amp;gt; 500 V. (2) Except for an NW40 equipped for horizontal rear connection, and for fixed NW40b-NW63. (3) Mandatory for 1000 V and for fixed NT front-connection versions with vertical-connection adapters oriented towards the front. (4) Mandatory for 1000 V.Masterpact M replacement kitA set of connection parts is available to allow replacement of a Masterpact M08 to M32 circuit breaker by a Masterpact NW without modifying the busbars (please consult us).Mounting on a switchboard backplate using special bracketsMasterpact NT and NW fixed front-connected circuit breakers can be installed on a backplate without any additional accessories. Masterpact NW circuit breakers require a set of special brackets.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsConnections Accessories0Type of accessoryMasterpact NT06 to NT16 FixedFront connectionDB101156DrawoutFront connectionDB101156Masterpact NW08 to NW63 Fixed DrawoutRear connection Front connection Rear connection Front connection Rear connectionRear connectionVertical connection adaptersCable lug adaptersDB101147 DB101147Interphase barriersDB101148 DB101149 DB101149 DB101149(1)(1)(2)(2)SpreadersDB101150Disconnectable front-connection adapterDB101151Safety shutters with padlockingDB101152 DB101153standardDB101150standardShutter position indication and lockingDB101154 DB101155(3)DB101155Arc chute screen(4)(1) Mandatory for voltages &amp;gt; 500 V. (2) Except for an NW40 equipped for horizontal rear connection, and for fixed NW40b-NW63. (3) Mandatory for 1000 V and for fixed NT front-connection versions with vertical-connection adapters oriented towards the front. (4) Mandatory for 1000 V.Masterpact M replacement kitA set of connection parts is available to allow replacement of a Masterpact M08 to M32 circuit breaker by a Masterpact NW without modifying the busbars (please consult us).Mounting on a switchboard backplate using special bracketsMasterpact NT and NW fixed front-connected circuit breakers can be installed on a backplate without any additional accessories. Masterpact NW circuit breakers require a set of special brackets.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="44">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsConnections Accessories0Vertical-connection adapters (option)PB100790-32Mounted on front-connected devices or chassis, the adapters facilitate connection to a set of vertical busbars.Cable-lug adapters (option)Cable-lug adapters are used in conjunction with vertical-connection adapters. They can be used to connect a number of cables fitted with lugs. To ensure adequate mechanical strength, the connectors must be secured together via spacers (catalogue number 07251).PB100791-32Interphase barriers (option)These barriers are flexible insulated partitions used to reinforce isolation of connection points in installations with busbars, whether insulated or not. For Masterpact NT/NW devices, they are installed vertically between rear connection terminals. They are mandatory for NT devices at voltages &amp;gt; 500 V.PB100779-32Spreaders (option)PB100792-32Mounted on the front or rear connectors, spreaders are used to increase the distance between bars in certain installation configurations.Arc chute screen (option)For fixed Masterpact NT front-connection versions and with vertical-connection adapters oriented towards the front, an arc chute screen must be installed to respect safety clearances.I Opush push OFFDB101157ONrged dischaFor Masterpact NT 1000 V, an arc chute screen must be installed to respect safety clearances.O OFF]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsConnections Accessories0Vertical-connection adapters (option)PB100790-32Mounted on front-connected devices or chassis, the adapters facilitate connection to a set of vertical busbars.Cable-lug adapters (option)Cable-lug adapters are used in conjunction with vertical-connection adapters. They can be used to connect a number of cables fitted with lugs. To ensure adequate mechanical strength, the connectors must be secured together via spacers (catalogue number 07251).PB100791-32Interphase barriers (option)These barriers are flexible insulated partitions used to reinforce isolation of connection points in installations with busbars, whether insulated or not. For Masterpact NT/NW devices, they are installed vertically between rear connection terminals. They are mandatory for NT devices at voltages &amp;gt; 500 V.PB100779-32Spreaders (option)PB100792-32Mounted on the front or rear connectors, spreaders are used to increase the distance between bars in certain installation configurations.Arc chute screen (option)For fixed Masterpact NT front-connection versions and with vertical-connection adapters oriented towards the front, an arc chute screen must be installed to respect safety clearances.I Opush push OFFDB101157ONrged dischaFor Masterpact NT 1000 V, an arc chute screen must be installed to respect safety clearances.O OFF]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="45">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsConnections Accessories0Disconnectable front-connection adapter (option)PB100793-48Mounted on a fixed front-connected device, the adapter simplifies replacement of a fixed device by enabling fast disconnection from the front.Safety shutters (standard)Mounted on the chassis, the safety shutters automatically block access to the disconnecting contact cluster when the device is in the disconnected or test positions (degree of protection IP 20) When the device is removed from its chassis, no live parts are accessible. The shutter-locking system is made up of a moving block that can be padlocked (padlock not supplied). The block: b prevents connection of the device b locks the shutters in the closed position. For Masterpact NW08 to NW63 A support at the back of the chassis is used to store the blocks when they are not used: b 2 blocks for NW08 to NW40 b 4 blocks for NW40b to NW63.PB100794-48Shutter position indication and locking on front face (option)This option located on the chassis front plate indicates that the shutters are closed. It is possible to independently or separately padlock the two shutters using one to three padlocks (not supplied).DB101158]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsConnections Accessories0Disconnectable front-connection adapter (option)PB100793-48Mounted on a fixed front-connected device, the adapter simplifies replacement of a fixed device by enabling fast disconnection from the front.Safety shutters (standard)Mounted on the chassis, the safety shutters automatically block access to the disconnecting contact cluster when the device is in the disconnected or test positions (degree of protection IP 20) When the device is removed from its chassis, no live parts are accessible. The shutter-locking system is made up of a moving block that can be padlocked (padlock not supplied). The block: b prevents connection of the device b locks the shutters in the closed position. For Masterpact NW08 to NW63 A support at the back of the chassis is used to store the blocks when they are not used: b 2 blocks for NW08 to NW40 b 4 blocks for NW40b to NW63.PB100794-48Shutter position indication and locking on front face (option)This option located on the chassis front plate indicates that the shutters are closed. It is possible to independently or separately padlock the two shutters using one to three padlocks (not supplied).DB101158]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="46">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsLocking On the device01 Reset button for mechanical trip indication. 2 OFF pushbutton. 3 OFF position lock. 4 Electrical closing pushbutton. 5 ON pushbutton. 6 Springs charged indication. 7 Pushbutton locking. 8 Contact position indication. 9 Operation counter.DB101159Pushbutton lockingThe transparent cover blocks access to the pushbuttons used to open and close the device. It is possible to independently lock the opening button and the closing button. The locking device is often combined with a remote operating mechanism. The pushbuttons may be locked using either: b three padlocks (not supplied) b lead seal b two screws.PB100811-32Access to pushbuttons protected by transparent cover.Device locking in the OFF positionThe circuit breaker is locked in the OFF position by physically maintaining the opening pushbutton pressed down: b using padlocks (one to three padlocks, not supplied) b using keylocks (one or two different keylocks, supplied). Keys may be removed only when locking is effective (Profalux or Ronis type locks). The keylocks are available in any of the following configurations: b one keylock b one keylock mounted on the device + one identical keylock supplied separately for interlocking with another device b two different key locks for double locking. Profalux and Ronis keylocks are compatible with each other. A locking kit (without locks) is available for installation of one or two keylocks (Ronis, Profalux, Kirk or Castell). Accessory-compatibility For Masterpact NT: 3 padlocks or 1 keylock For Masterpact NW: 3 padlocks and/or 2 keylocksPB100810-32Pushbutton locking using a padlock.PB100812-32Cable-type door interlockThis option prevents door opening when the circuit breaker is closed and prevents circuit breaker closing when the door is open. For this, a special plate associated with a lock and a cable is mounted on the right side of the circuit breaker. With this interlock installed, the source changeover function cannot be implemented.OFF position locking using a padlock.PB100813-30OFF position locking using a keylock.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsLocking On the device01 Reset button for mechanical trip indication. 2 OFF pushbutton. 3 OFF position lock. 4 Electrical closing pushbutton. 5 ON pushbutton. 6 Springs charged indication. 7 Pushbutton locking. 8 Contact position indication. 9 Operation counter.DB101159Pushbutton lockingThe transparent cover blocks access to the pushbuttons used to open and close the device. It is possible to independently lock the opening button and the closing button. The locking device is often combined with a remote operating mechanism. The pushbuttons may be locked using either: b three padlocks (not supplied) b lead seal b two screws.PB100811-32Access to pushbuttons protected by transparent cover.Device locking in the OFF positionThe circuit breaker is locked in the OFF position by physically maintaining the opening pushbutton pressed down: b using padlocks (one to three padlocks, not supplied) b using keylocks (one or two different keylocks, supplied). Keys may be removed only when locking is effective (Profalux or Ronis type locks). The keylocks are available in any of the following configurations: b one keylock b one keylock mounted on the device + one identical keylock supplied separately for interlocking with another device b two different key locks for double locking. Profalux and Ronis keylocks are compatible with each other. A locking kit (without locks) is available for installation of one or two keylocks (Ronis, Profalux, Kirk or Castell). Accessory-compatibility For Masterpact NT: 3 padlocks or 1 keylock For Masterpact NW: 3 padlocks and/or 2 keylocksPB100810-32Pushbutton locking using a padlock.PB100812-32Cable-type door interlockThis option prevents door opening when the circuit breaker is closed and prevents circuit breaker closing when the door is open. For this, a special plate associated with a lock and a cable is mounted on the right side of the circuit breaker. With this interlock installed, the source changeover function cannot be implemented.OFF position locking using a padlock.PB100813-30OFF position locking using a keylock.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="47">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsLocking On the chassis01 2 3 4 5 6 7Mismatch protection. Door interlock. Racking interlock. Keylock locking. Padlock locking. Position indicator. Chassis front plate (accessible with cubicle door closed). 8 Racking-handle entry. 9 Reset button. 10 Racking-handle storage.DB101160&amp;quot;Disconnected&amp;quot; position lockingMounted on the chassis and accessible with the door closed, these devices lock the circuit breaker in the &amp;quot;disconnected&amp;quot; position in two manners: b using padlocks (standard), up to three padlocks (not supplied) b using keylocks (optional), one or two different keylocks are available. Profalux and Ronis keylocks are available in different options: b one keylock b two different keylocks for double locking b one (or two) keylocks mounted on the device + one (or two) identical keylocks supplied separately for interlocking with another device. A locking kit (without locks) is available for installation of one or two keylocks (Ronis, Profalux, Kirk or Castell).&amp;quot;Disconnected&amp;quot; position locking by keylocks.PB100795-33 PB100796-32&amp;quot;Disconnected&amp;quot; position locking by padlocks.&amp;quot;Connected&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;disconnected&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;test&amp;quot; position lockingThe &amp;quot;connected&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;disconnected&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;test&amp;quot; positions are shown by an indicator. The exact position is obtained when the racking handle blocks. A release button is used to free it. On request, the &amp;quot;disconnected&amp;quot; position locking system may be modified to lock the circuit breaker in any of the three positions, &amp;quot;connected&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;disconnected&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;test&amp;quot;.PB100780-36Door interlock catchMounted on the right or left-hand side of the chassis, this device inhibits opening of the cubicle door when the circuit breaker is in &amp;quot;connected&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;test&amp;quot; position. It the breaker is put in the &amp;quot;connected&amp;quot; position with the door open, the door may be closed without having to disconnect the circuit breaker.Racking interlockDoor interlock.This device prevents insertion of the racking handle when the cubicle door is open.Cable-type door interlockThis option is identical for fixed and drawout versions.PB100814-32Racking interlock between crank and OFF pushbuttonThis option makes it necessary to press the OFF pushbutton in order to insert the racking handle and holds the device open until the handle is removed.Automatic spring discharge before breaker removalThis option discharges the springs before the breaker is removed from the chassis.Racking interlock.Mismatch protectionMismatch protection ensures that a circuit breaker is installed only in a chassis with compatible characteristics. It is made up of two parts (one on the chassis and one on the circuit breaker) offering twenty different combinations that the user may select.PB100815-32Mismatch protection.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsLocking On the chassis01 2 3 4 5 6 7Mismatch protection. Door interlock. Racking interlock. Keylock locking. Padlock locking. Position indicator. Chassis front plate (accessible with cubicle door closed). 8 Racking-handle entry. 9 Reset button. 10 Racking-handle storage.DB101160&amp;quot;Disconnected&amp;quot; position lockingMounted on the chassis and accessible with the door closed, these devices lock the circuit breaker in the &amp;quot;disconnected&amp;quot; position in two manners: b using padlocks (standard), up to three padlocks (not supplied) b using keylocks (optional), one or two different keylocks are available. Profalux and Ronis keylocks are available in different options: b one keylock b two different keylocks for double locking b one (or two) keylocks mounted on the device + one (or two) identical keylocks supplied separately for interlocking with another device. A locking kit (without locks) is available for installation of one or two keylocks (Ronis, Profalux, Kirk or Castell).&amp;quot;Disconnected&amp;quot; position locking by keylocks.PB100795-33 PB100796-32&amp;quot;Disconnected&amp;quot; position locking by padlocks.&amp;quot;Connected&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;disconnected&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;test&amp;quot; position lockingThe &amp;quot;connected&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;disconnected&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;test&amp;quot; positions are shown by an indicator. The exact position is obtained when the racking handle blocks. A release button is used to free it. On request, the &amp;quot;disconnected&amp;quot; position locking system may be modified to lock the circuit breaker in any of the three positions, &amp;quot;connected&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;disconnected&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;test&amp;quot;.PB100780-36Door interlock catchMounted on the right or left-hand side of the chassis, this device inhibits opening of the cubicle door when the circuit breaker is in &amp;quot;connected&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;test&amp;quot; position. It the breaker is put in the &amp;quot;connected&amp;quot; position with the door open, the door may be closed without having to disconnect the circuit breaker.Racking interlockDoor interlock.This device prevents insertion of the racking handle when the cubicle door is open.Cable-type door interlockThis option is identical for fixed and drawout versions.PB100814-32Racking interlock between crank and OFF pushbuttonThis option makes it necessary to press the OFF pushbutton in order to insert the racking handle and holds the device open until the handle is removed.Automatic spring discharge before breaker removalThis option discharges the springs before the breaker is removed from the chassis.Racking interlock.Mismatch protectionMismatch protection ensures that a circuit breaker is installed only in a chassis with compatible characteristics. It is made up of two parts (one on the chassis and one on the circuit breaker) offering twenty different combinations that the user may select.PB100815-32Mismatch protection.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="48">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsIndication contacts0Indication contacts are available: b in the standard version for relay applications b in a low-level version for control of PLCs and electronic circuits. M2C and M6C contacts may be programmed via the Micrologic P and H control units.PB100806-32 PB100807-20ON/OFF indication contacts (OF)Two types of contacts indicate the ON or OFF position of the circuit breaker: b microswitch type changeover contacts for Masterpact NT b rotary type changeover contacts directly driven by the mechanism for Masterpact NW. These contacts trip when the minimum isolation distance between the main circuit-breaker contacts is reached. OFSupplied as standard Maximum number Breaking capacity (A) p.f.: 0.3 AC12/DC12NTNWStandard V AC 240/380 480 690 24/48 125 250 24/48 240 380 24/48 125 250V DCLow-level V AC ON/OFF indication contacts (OF) (rotary type). V DC4 4 4 12 Minimum load: 100 mA/24 V 6 10/6 (1) 6 10/6 (1) 6 6 2.5 10/6 (1) 0.5 10/6 (1) 0.3 3 Minimum load: 2 mA/15 V 5 6 5 6 5 3 5/2.5 6 0.5 6 0.3 3(1) Standard contacts: 10 A; optional contacts: 6 A.&amp;quot;Fault-trip&amp;quot; indication contacts (SDE)Circuit-breaker tripping due to a fault is signalled by: b a red mechanical fault indicator (reset) b one changeover contact (SDE). Following tripping, the mechanical indicator must be reset before the circuit breaker may be closed. One SDE is supplied as standard. An optimal SDE may be added. This latter is incompatible with the electrical reset after fault-trip option (Res). SDE NT/NWSupplied as standard Maximum number Breaking capacity (A) p.f.: 0.3 AC12/DC12 1 2 Minimum load: 100 mA/24 V 5 5 3 3 0.3 0.15 Minimum load: 2 mA/15 V 3 3 3 3 0.3 0.15ON/OFF indication contacts (OF) (microswitch type).PB100820-32Standard V AC 240/380 480 690 24/48 125 250 24/48 240 380 24/48 125 250V DCLow-level V ACAdditional &amp;quot;fault-trip&amp;quot; indication contacts (SDE).V DCCombined &amp;quot;connected/closed&amp;quot; contacts (EF)PB100816-32The contact combines the &amp;quot;device connected&amp;quot; and the &amp;quot;device closed&amp;quot; information to produce the &amp;quot;circuit closed&amp;quot; information. Supplied as an option for Masterpact NW, it is mounted in place of the connector of an additional OF contact. EF NWMaximum number Breaking capacity (A) p.f.: 0.3 AC12/DC12 Standard V AC 240/380 480 690 24/48 125 250 24/48 240 380 24/48 125 250 8 Minimum load: 100 mA/24 V 6 6 6 2.5 0.8 0.3 Minimum load: 2 mA/15 V 5 5 5 2.5 0.8 0.3V DC Combined contacts. Low-level V ACV DC]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsIndication contacts0Indication contacts are available: b in the standard version for relay applications b in a low-level version for control of PLCs and electronic circuits. M2C and M6C contacts may be programmed via the Micrologic P and H control units.PB100806-32 PB100807-20ON/OFF indication contacts (OF)Two types of contacts indicate the ON or OFF position of the circuit breaker: b microswitch type changeover contacts for Masterpact NT b rotary type changeover contacts directly driven by the mechanism for Masterpact NW. These contacts trip when the minimum isolation distance between the main circuit-breaker contacts is reached. OFSupplied as standard Maximum number Breaking capacity (A) p.f.: 0.3 AC12/DC12NTNWStandard V AC 240/380 480 690 24/48 125 250 24/48 240 380 24/48 125 250V DCLow-level V AC ON/OFF indication contacts (OF) (rotary type). V DC4 4 4 12 Minimum load: 100 mA/24 V 6 10/6 (1) 6 10/6 (1) 6 6 2.5 10/6 (1) 0.5 10/6 (1) 0.3 3 Minimum load: 2 mA/15 V 5 6 5 6 5 3 5/2.5 6 0.5 6 0.3 3(1) Standard contacts: 10 A; optional contacts: 6 A.&amp;quot;Fault-trip&amp;quot; indication contacts (SDE)Circuit-breaker tripping due to a fault is signalled by: b a red mechanical fault indicator (reset) b one changeover contact (SDE). Following tripping, the mechanical indicator must be reset before the circuit breaker may be closed. One SDE is supplied as standard. An optimal SDE may be added. This latter is incompatible with the electrical reset after fault-trip option (Res). SDE NT/NWSupplied as standard Maximum number Breaking capacity (A) p.f.: 0.3 AC12/DC12 1 2 Minimum load: 100 mA/24 V 5 5 3 3 0.3 0.15 Minimum load: 2 mA/15 V 3 3 3 3 0.3 0.15ON/OFF indication contacts (OF) (microswitch type).PB100820-32Standard V AC 240/380 480 690 24/48 125 250 24/48 240 380 24/48 125 250V DCLow-level V ACAdditional &amp;quot;fault-trip&amp;quot; indication contacts (SDE).V DCCombined &amp;quot;connected/closed&amp;quot; contacts (EF)PB100816-32The contact combines the &amp;quot;device connected&amp;quot; and the &amp;quot;device closed&amp;quot; information to produce the &amp;quot;circuit closed&amp;quot; information. Supplied as an option for Masterpact NW, it is mounted in place of the connector of an additional OF contact. EF NWMaximum number Breaking capacity (A) p.f.: 0.3 AC12/DC12 Standard V AC 240/380 480 690 24/48 125 250 24/48 240 380 24/48 125 250 8 Minimum load: 100 mA/24 V 6 6 6 2.5 0.8 0.3 Minimum load: 2 mA/15 V 5 5 5 2.5 0.8 0.3V DC Combined contacts. Low-level V ACV DC]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="49">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsIndication contacts0PB100817-32&amp;quot;Connected&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;disconnected&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;test&amp;quot; position carriage switchesThree series of optional auxiliary contacts are available for the chassis: b changeover contacts to indicate the &amp;quot;connected&amp;quot; position (CE) b changeover contacts to indicate the &amp;quot;disconnected&amp;quot; position (CD). This position is indicated when the required clearance for isolation of the power and auxiliary circuits is reached b changeover contacts to indicate the &amp;quot;test&amp;quot; position (CT). In this position, the power circuits are disconnected and the auxiliary circuits are connected. Additional actuators A set of additional actuators may be installed on the chassis to change the functions of the carriage switches. NT NWContacts Maximum number Standard with additional actuators CE/CD/CT 3 3 3 9 0 0 6 3 0 6 0 3 Minimum load: 100 mA/24 V 8 8 8 8 8 8 6 6 2.5 2.5 0.8 0.8 0.3 0.3 Minimum load: 2 mA/15 V 5 5 5 5 5 5 2.5 2.5 0.8 0.8 0.3 0.3 CE/CD/CT 3 2 1CCE, CD and CT &amp;quot;connected/disconnected/test&amp;quot; position carriage switches.PB100778-52Breaking capacity (A) p.f.: 0.3 AC12/DC12Standard V AC 240 380 480 690 24/48 125 250 24/48 240 380 24/48 125 250V DC M2C programmable contacts: circuit-breaker internal relay with two contacts. Low-level V ACPB100781-32V DCM2C / M6C programmable contactsM6C programmable contacts: circuit-breaker external relay with six independent changeover contacts controlled from the circuit breaker via a three-wire connection. (maximum length is 10 meters).These contacts, used with the Micrologic P and H control units, may be programmed via the control unit keypad or via a supervisory station with the COM communication option. They require an external power supply module. They indicate: b the type of fault b instantaneous or delayed threshold overruns. b They may be programmed: b with instantaneous return to the initial state b without return to the initial state b with return to the initial state following a delay. Characteristics M2C/M6CMinimum load Breaking capacity (A) p.f.: 0.7 V AC V DC 240 380 24 48 125 250 100 mA/24 V 5 3 1.8 1.5 0.4 0.15DB101170M2C: 24 V DC power supplied by control unit (consumption 100 mA).DB101161M6C: external 24 V DC power supply required (consumption 100 mA).]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsIndication contacts0PB100817-32&amp;quot;Connected&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;disconnected&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;test&amp;quot; position carriage switchesThree series of optional auxiliary contacts are available for the chassis: b changeover contacts to indicate the &amp;quot;connected&amp;quot; position (CE) b changeover contacts to indicate the &amp;quot;disconnected&amp;quot; position (CD). This position is indicated when the required clearance for isolation of the power and auxiliary circuits is reached b changeover contacts to indicate the &amp;quot;test&amp;quot; position (CT). In this position, the power circuits are disconnected and the auxiliary circuits are connected. Additional actuators A set of additional actuators may be installed on the chassis to change the functions of the carriage switches. NT NWContacts Maximum number Standard with additional actuators CE/CD/CT 3 3 3 9 0 0 6 3 0 6 0 3 Minimum load: 100 mA/24 V 8 8 8 8 8 8 6 6 2.5 2.5 0.8 0.8 0.3 0.3 Minimum load: 2 mA/15 V 5 5 5 5 5 5 2.5 2.5 0.8 0.8 0.3 0.3 CE/CD/CT 3 2 1CCE, CD and CT &amp;quot;connected/disconnected/test&amp;quot; position carriage switches.PB100778-52Breaking capacity (A) p.f.: 0.3 AC12/DC12Standard V AC 240 380 480 690 24/48 125 250 24/48 240 380 24/48 125 250V DC M2C programmable contacts: circuit-breaker internal relay with two contacts. Low-level V ACPB100781-32V DCM2C / M6C programmable contactsM6C programmable contacts: circuit-breaker external relay with six independent changeover contacts controlled from the circuit breaker via a three-wire connection. (maximum length is 10 meters).These contacts, used with the Micrologic P and H control units, may be programmed via the control unit keypad or via a supervisory station with the COM communication option. They require an external power supply module. They indicate: b the type of fault b instantaneous or delayed threshold overruns. b They may be programmed: b with instantaneous return to the initial state b without return to the initial state b with return to the initial state following a delay. Characteristics M2C/M6CMinimum load Breaking capacity (A) p.f.: 0.7 V AC V DC 240 380 24 48 125 250 100 mA/24 V 5 3 1.8 1.5 0.4 0.15DB101170M2C: 24 V DC power supplied by control unit (consumption 100 mA).DB101161M6C: external 24 V DC power supply required (consumption 100 mA).]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="50">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsRemote operation Remote ON / OFF0Two solutions are available for remote operation of Masterpact devices: b a point-to-point solution b a bus solution with the COM communication option.The remote ON / OFF function is used to remotely open and close the circuit breaker. It is made up of: b an electric motor (MCH) equipped with a &amp;quot;springs charged&amp;quot; limit switch contact (CH) b two voltage releases: v a closing release (XF) v an opening release (MX). Optionally, other functions may be added: b a &amp;quot;ready to close&amp;quot; contact (PF) b an electrical closing pushbutton (BPFE) b remote reset following a fault. A remote-operation function is generally combined with: b device ON / OFF indication (OF) b &amp;quot;fault-trip&amp;quot; indication (SDE).PB100765-56Wiring diagram of a point-to-point remote ON / OFF functionDB111783Note: an opening order always takes priority over a closing order. If opening and closing orders occur simultaneously, the mechanism discharges without any movement of the main contacts. The circuit breaker remains in the open position (OFF). In the event of maintained opening and closing orders, the standard mechanism provides an anti-pumping function by blocking the main contacts in open position. Anti-pumping function. After fault tripping or intentional opening using the manual or electrical controls, the closing order must first be discontinued, then reactivated to close the circuit breaker. When the automatic reset after fault trip (RAR) option is installed, to avoid pumping following a fault trip, the automatic control system must take into account the information supplied by the circuit breaker before issuing a new closing order or blocking the circuit breaker in the open position (information on the type of fault, e.g. overload, short-time fault, earth fault, earth leakage, short-circuit, etc.).Wiring diagram of a bus-type remote ON / OFF functionDB101165Note: MX communicating releases are of the impulse type only and cannot be used to lock a circuit breaker in OFF position. For locking in OFF position, use the remote tripping function (2nd MX or MN). When MX or XF communicating releases are used, the third wire (C3, A3) must be connected even if the communication module is not installed. When the control voltage (C3-C1 or A3A1) is applied to the MX or XF releases, it is necessary to wait 1.5 seconds before issuing an order. Consequently, it is advised to use standard MX or XF releases for applications such as source-changeover systems.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsRemote operation Remote ON / OFF0Two solutions are available for remote operation of Masterpact devices: b a point-to-point solution b a bus solution with the COM communication option.The remote ON / OFF function is used to remotely open and close the circuit breaker. It is made up of: b an electric motor (MCH) equipped with a &amp;quot;springs charged&amp;quot; limit switch contact (CH) b two voltage releases: v a closing release (XF) v an opening release (MX). Optionally, other functions may be added: b a &amp;quot;ready to close&amp;quot; contact (PF) b an electrical closing pushbutton (BPFE) b remote reset following a fault. A remote-operation function is generally combined with: b device ON / OFF indication (OF) b &amp;quot;fault-trip&amp;quot; indication (SDE).PB100765-56Wiring diagram of a point-to-point remote ON / OFF functionDB111783Note: an opening order always takes priority over a closing order. If opening and closing orders occur simultaneously, the mechanism discharges without any movement of the main contacts. The circuit breaker remains in the open position (OFF). In the event of maintained opening and closing orders, the standard mechanism provides an anti-pumping function by blocking the main contacts in open position. Anti-pumping function. After fault tripping or intentional opening using the manual or electrical controls, the closing order must first be discontinued, then reactivated to close the circuit breaker. When the automatic reset after fault trip (RAR) option is installed, to avoid pumping following a fault trip, the automatic control system must take into account the information supplied by the circuit breaker before issuing a new closing order or blocking the circuit breaker in the open position (information on the type of fault, e.g. overload, short-time fault, earth fault, earth leakage, short-circuit, etc.).Wiring diagram of a bus-type remote ON / OFF functionDB101165Note: MX communicating releases are of the impulse type only and cannot be used to lock a circuit breaker in OFF position. For locking in OFF position, use the remote tripping function (2nd MX or MN). When MX or XF communicating releases are used, the third wire (C3, A3) must be connected even if the communication module is not installed. When the control voltage (C3-C1 or A3A1) is applied to the MX or XF releases, it is necessary to wait 1.5 seconds before issuing an order. Consequently, it is advised to use standard MX or XF releases for applications such as source-changeover systems.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="51">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsRemote operation Remote ON / OFF0Electric motor (MCH)The electric motor automatically charges and recharges the spring mechanism when the circuit breaker is closed. Instantaneous reclosing of the breaker is thus possible following opening. The spring-mechanism charging handle is used only as a backup if auxiliary power is absent. The electric motor (MCH) is equipped as standard with a limit switch contact (CH) that signals the &amp;quot;charged&amp;quot; position of the mechanism (springs charged). CharacteristicsPower supply V AC 50/60 Hz V DC Operating threshold Consumption (VA or W) Motor overcurrent Charging time Operating frequency CH contact 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/240 - 277- 380/415 - 400/440 - 480 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/125 - 200/250 0.85 to 1.1 Un 180 2 to 3 In for 0.1 s maximum 3 s for Masterpact NT maximum 4 s for Masterpact NW maximum 3 cycles per minute 10 A at 240 VPB100797-23 PB100808-32Electric motor (MCH) for Masterpact NT.Electric motor (MCH) for Masterpact NW.Voltage releases (XF and MX)Their supply can be maintained or automatically disconnected. Closing release (XF) The XF release remotely closes the circuit breaker if the spring mechanism is charged. Opening release (MX) The MX release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when energised. It locks the circuit breaker in OFF position if the order is maintained (except for MX &amp;quot;communicating&amp;quot; releases).Note: whether the operating order is maintened or automatically disconnected (pulse-type), XF or MX &amp;quot;communicating&amp;quot; releases (&amp;quot;bus&amp;quot; solution with &amp;quot;COM&amp;quot; communication option) always have an impulse-type action (see diagram).DB101179CharacteristicsPower supply V AC 50/60 Hz V DC Operating threshold Consumption (VA or W)XFMX24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 277 - 380/480 12 - 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 0.85 to 1.1 Un 0.7 to 1.1 Un Hold: 4.5 Hold: 4.5 Pick-up: 200 (200 ms) Pick-up: 200 (200 ms) Circuit-breaker response time at Un 55 ms ±10 (Masterpact NT) 50 ms ±10 70 ms ±10 (NW y 4000A) 80 ms ±10 (NW &amp;gt; 4000A)PB100809-16&amp;quot;Ready to close&amp;quot; contact (PF)The &amp;quot;ready to close&amp;quot; position of the circuit breaker is indicated by a mechanical indicator and a PF changeover contact. This signal indicates that all the following are valid: b the circuit breaker is in the OFF position b the spring mechanism is charged b a maintained opening order is not present: v MX energised v fault trip v remote tripping (second MX or MN) v device not completely racked in v device locked in OFF position v device interlocked with a second device. Characteristics NT/NWMaximum number Breaking capacity (A) p.f.: 0.3 AC12/DC12 Standard V AC 240/380 480 690 24/48 125 250 24/48 240 380 24/48 125 250 1 Minimum load: 100 mA/24 V 5 5 3 3 0.3 0.15 Minimum load: 2 mA/15 V 3 3 3 3 0.3 0.15XF and MX voltage releases.PB100818-16V DCLow-level V AC &amp;quot;Ready to close&amp;quot; contacts (PF). V DC]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsRemote operation Remote ON / OFF0Electric motor (MCH)The electric motor automatically charges and recharges the spring mechanism when the circuit breaker is closed. Instantaneous reclosing of the breaker is thus possible following opening. The spring-mechanism charging handle is used only as a backup if auxiliary power is absent. The electric motor (MCH) is equipped as standard with a limit switch contact (CH) that signals the &amp;quot;charged&amp;quot; position of the mechanism (springs charged). CharacteristicsPower supply V AC 50/60 Hz V DC Operating threshold Consumption (VA or W) Motor overcurrent Charging time Operating frequency CH contact 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/240 - 277- 380/415 - 400/440 - 480 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/125 - 200/250 0.85 to 1.1 Un 180 2 to 3 In for 0.1 s maximum 3 s for Masterpact NT maximum 4 s for Masterpact NW maximum 3 cycles per minute 10 A at 240 VPB100797-23 PB100808-32Electric motor (MCH) for Masterpact NT.Electric motor (MCH) for Masterpact NW.Voltage releases (XF and MX)Their supply can be maintained or automatically disconnected. Closing release (XF) The XF release remotely closes the circuit breaker if the spring mechanism is charged. Opening release (MX) The MX release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when energised. It locks the circuit breaker in OFF position if the order is maintained (except for MX &amp;quot;communicating&amp;quot; releases).Note: whether the operating order is maintened or automatically disconnected (pulse-type), XF or MX &amp;quot;communicating&amp;quot; releases (&amp;quot;bus&amp;quot; solution with &amp;quot;COM&amp;quot; communication option) always have an impulse-type action (see diagram).DB101179CharacteristicsPower supply V AC 50/60 Hz V DC Operating threshold Consumption (VA or W)XFMX24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 277 - 380/480 12 - 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 0.85 to 1.1 Un 0.7 to 1.1 Un Hold: 4.5 Hold: 4.5 Pick-up: 200 (200 ms) Pick-up: 200 (200 ms) Circuit-breaker response time at Un 55 ms ±10 (Masterpact NT) 50 ms ±10 70 ms ±10 (NW y 4000A) 80 ms ±10 (NW &amp;gt; 4000A)PB100809-16&amp;quot;Ready to close&amp;quot; contact (PF)The &amp;quot;ready to close&amp;quot; position of the circuit breaker is indicated by a mechanical indicator and a PF changeover contact. This signal indicates that all the following are valid: b the circuit breaker is in the OFF position b the spring mechanism is charged b a maintained opening order is not present: v MX energised v fault trip v remote tripping (second MX or MN) v device not completely racked in v device locked in OFF position v device interlocked with a second device. Characteristics NT/NWMaximum number Breaking capacity (A) p.f.: 0.3 AC12/DC12 Standard V AC 240/380 480 690 24/48 125 250 24/48 240 380 24/48 125 250 1 Minimum load: 100 mA/24 V 5 5 3 3 0.3 0.15 Minimum load: 2 mA/15 V 3 3 3 3 0.3 0.15XF and MX voltage releases.PB100818-16V DCLow-level V AC &amp;quot;Ready to close&amp;quot; contacts (PF). V DC]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="52">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsRemote operation Remote ON / OFF0Electrical closing pushbutton (BPFE)Located on the front panel, this pushbutton carries out electrical closing of the circuit breaker. It is generally associated with the transparent cover that protects access to the closing pushbutton. Electrical closing via the BPFE pushbutton takes into account all the safety functions that are part of the control/monitoring system of the installation. The BPFE connects to the closing release (XF com) in place of the COM module. The COM module is incompatible with this option. Different types of voltage exist and the XF electromagnet is compulsary if the BPFE option is selected .DB101167 PB100798-56Electrical closing pushbutton (BPFE).Remote reset after fault tripElectrical reset after fault trip (Res) Following tripping, this function resets the &amp;quot;fault trip&amp;quot; indication contacts (SDE) and the mechanical indicator and enables circuit breaker closing. Power supply: 110 / 130 V AC and 200 / 240 V AC.DB108436Automatic reset after fault trip (RAR) Following tripping, a reset of the mechanical indicator (reset button) is no longer required to enable circuit-breaker closing. The mechanical (reset button) and electrical (SDE) indications remain in fault position until the reset button is pressed.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsRemote operation Remote ON / OFF0Electrical closing pushbutton (BPFE)Located on the front panel, this pushbutton carries out electrical closing of the circuit breaker. It is generally associated with the transparent cover that protects access to the closing pushbutton. Electrical closing via the BPFE pushbutton takes into account all the safety functions that are part of the control/monitoring system of the installation. The BPFE connects to the closing release (XF com) in place of the COM module. The COM module is incompatible with this option. Different types of voltage exist and the XF electromagnet is compulsary if the BPFE option is selected .DB101167 PB100798-56Electrical closing pushbutton (BPFE).Remote reset after fault tripElectrical reset after fault trip (Res) Following tripping, this function resets the &amp;quot;fault trip&amp;quot; indication contacts (SDE) and the mechanical indicator and enables circuit breaker closing. Power supply: 110 / 130 V AC and 200 / 240 V AC.DB108436Automatic reset after fault trip (RAR) Following tripping, a reset of the mechanical indicator (reset button) is no longer required to enable circuit-breaker closing. The mechanical (reset button) and electrical (SDE) indications remain in fault position until the reset button is pressed.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="53">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsRemote operation Remote tripping0This function opens the circuit breaker via an electrical order. It is made up of: b a shunt release (second MX) b or an undervoltage release (MN) b or a delayed undervoltage release (MN + delay unit). These releases (2nd MX or MN) cannot be operated by the communication bus. The delay unit, installed outside the circuit breaker, may be disabled by an emergency OFF button to obtain instantaneous opening of the circuit breaker. Wiring diagram for the remote-tripping functionDB101172 DB101175 DB101177DB100809-16PB100819-68Voltage releases (second MX)MX or MN voltage release.When energised, the MX voltage release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker. A continuous supply of power to the second MX locks the circuit breaker in the OFF position. CharacteristicsPower supply V AC 50/60Hz 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 277- 380/480 V DC 12 - 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 Operating threshold 0.7 to 1.1 Un Permanent locking function 0.85 to 1.1 Un Consumption (VA or W) Circuit-breaker response time at Un Pick-up: 200 (200 ms) 50 ms ±10 Hold: 4.5Instantaneous voltage releases (MN)The MN release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when its supply voltage drops to a value between 35 % and 70 % of its rated voltage. If there is no supply on the release, it is impossible to close the circuit breaker, either manually or electrically. Any attempt to close the circuit breaker has no effect on the main contacts. Circuitbreaker closing is enabled again when the supply voltage of the release returns to 85 % of its rated value. CharacteristicsPower supply V AC 50/60 Hz V DC Operating threshold Opening Closing Consumption (VA or W) MN consumption with delay unit (VA or W) Circuit-breaker response time at Un 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 0.35 to 0.7 Un 0.85 Un Pick-up: 200 (200 ms) Hold: 4.5 Pick-up: 200 (200 ms) Hold: 4.5 40 ms ±5 for NT 90 ms ±5 for NWMN delay unitsTo eliminate circuit-breaker nuisance tripping during short voltage dips, operation of the MN release can be delayed. This function is achieved by adding an external delay unit in the MN voltage-release circuit. Two versions are available, adjustable and non-adjustable. CharacteristicsPower supply V AC 50-60 Hz /DC Operating threshold Delay unit consumption Circuit-breaker response time at Un Non-adjustable 100/130 - 200/250 Adjustable 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480 Opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un Closing 0.85 Un Pick-up: 200 (200 ms) Hold: 4.5 Non-adjustable 0.25 s Adjustable 0.5 s - 0.9 s - 1.5 s - 3 s]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsRemote operation Remote tripping0This function opens the circuit breaker via an electrical order. It is made up of: b a shunt release (second MX) b or an undervoltage release (MN) b or a delayed undervoltage release (MN + delay unit). These releases (2nd MX or MN) cannot be operated by the communication bus. The delay unit, installed outside the circuit breaker, may be disabled by an emergency OFF button to obtain instantaneous opening of the circuit breaker. Wiring diagram for the remote-tripping functionDB101172 DB101175 DB101177DB100809-16PB100819-68Voltage releases (second MX)MX or MN voltage release.When energised, the MX voltage release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker. A continuous supply of power to the second MX locks the circuit breaker in the OFF position. CharacteristicsPower supply V AC 50/60Hz 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 277- 380/480 V DC 12 - 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 Operating threshold 0.7 to 1.1 Un Permanent locking function 0.85 to 1.1 Un Consumption (VA or W) Circuit-breaker response time at Un Pick-up: 200 (200 ms) 50 ms ±10 Hold: 4.5Instantaneous voltage releases (MN)The MN release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when its supply voltage drops to a value between 35 % and 70 % of its rated voltage. If there is no supply on the release, it is impossible to close the circuit breaker, either manually or electrically. Any attempt to close the circuit breaker has no effect on the main contacts. Circuitbreaker closing is enabled again when the supply voltage of the release returns to 85 % of its rated value. CharacteristicsPower supply V AC 50/60 Hz V DC Operating threshold Opening Closing Consumption (VA or W) MN consumption with delay unit (VA or W) Circuit-breaker response time at Un 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 0.35 to 0.7 Un 0.85 Un Pick-up: 200 (200 ms) Hold: 4.5 Pick-up: 200 (200 ms) Hold: 4.5 40 ms ±5 for NT 90 ms ±5 for NWMN delay unitsTo eliminate circuit-breaker nuisance tripping during short voltage dips, operation of the MN release can be delayed. This function is achieved by adding an external delay unit in the MN voltage-release circuit. Two versions are available, adjustable and non-adjustable. CharacteristicsPower supply V AC 50-60 Hz /DC Operating threshold Delay unit consumption Circuit-breaker response time at Un Non-adjustable 100/130 - 200/250 Adjustable 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480 Opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un Closing 0.85 Un Pick-up: 200 (200 ms) Hold: 4.5 Non-adjustable 0.25 s Adjustable 0.5 s - 0.9 s - 1.5 s - 3 s]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="54">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsAccessories0Auxiliary terminal shield (CB)PB100821-68Optional equipment mounted on the chassis, the shield prevents access to the terminal block of the electrical auxiliaries.Operation counter (CDM)PB100822-32The operation counter sums the number of operating cycles and is visible on the front panel. It is compatible with manual and electrical control functions.Escutcheon (CDP)Optional equipment mounted on the door of the cubicle, the escutcheon increases the degree of protection to IP 40 (circuit breaker installed free standing: IP30) . It is available in fixed and drawout versions.DB101173Blanking plate (OP) for escutcheonUsed with the escutcheon, this option closes off the door cut-out of a cubicle not yet equipped with a device. It may be used with the escutcheon for both fixed and drawout devices.Transparent cover (CP) for escutcheonOptional equipment mounted on the escutcheon, the cover is hinged and secured by a screw. It increases the degree of protection to IP54, IK10. It adapts to drawout devices.Escutcheon (CDP) with blanking plate.PB100776-42Transparent cover (CP) for escutcheon.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsAccessories0Auxiliary terminal shield (CB)PB100821-68Optional equipment mounted on the chassis, the shield prevents access to the terminal block of the electrical auxiliaries.Operation counter (CDM)PB100822-32The operation counter sums the number of operating cycles and is visible on the front panel. It is compatible with manual and electrical control functions.Escutcheon (CDP)Optional equipment mounted on the door of the cubicle, the escutcheon increases the degree of protection to IP 40 (circuit breaker installed free standing: IP30) . It is available in fixed and drawout versions.DB101173Blanking plate (OP) for escutcheonUsed with the escutcheon, this option closes off the door cut-out of a cubicle not yet equipped with a device. It may be used with the escutcheon for both fixed and drawout devices.Transparent cover (CP) for escutcheonOptional equipment mounted on the escutcheon, the cover is hinged and secured by a screw. It increases the degree of protection to IP54, IK10. It adapts to drawout devices.Escutcheon (CDP) with blanking plate.PB100776-42Transparent cover (CP) for escutcheon.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="55">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsSource-changeover systems Presentation0Manual source-changeover systemThis is the most simple type. It is controlled manually by an operator and consequently the time required to switch from the normal to the replacement source can vary. A manual source-changeover system is made up of two or three mechanically interlocked manually-operated circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors.PB100843Remote-operated source-changeover systemThis is the most commonly employed system for devices with high ratings (above 400 A). No human intervention is required. Transfer from the normal to the replacement source is controlled electrically. A remote-controlled source-changeover system is made up of two or three circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors linked by an electrical interlocking system that may have different configurations. In addition, a mechanical interlocking system protects against electrical malfunctions or incorrect manual operations.PB100844Automatic source-changeover systemsAn automatic controller may be added to a remote-operated source-changeover system for automatic source control according to programmable operating modes. This solution ensures optimum energy management: b transfer to a replacement source according to external requirements b management of power sources b regulation b emergency source replacement, etc. The automatic controller may be fitted with an option for communication with a supervisor.Service sector: b hospital operating rooms b safety systems for tall buildings b computer rooms (banks, insurance companies, etc.) b lighting systems in shopping centres.Communication optionThe communication option must not be used to control the opening or closing of source-changeover system circuit breakers. It should be used only to transmit measurement data or circuit-breaker status. The eco COM option is perfectly suited to these equipments.PB100845Industry: b assembly lines b propulsion systems on ships b essential auxiliaries in thermal power stations...PB100847PB100846Infrastructure: b port and railway installations b runway lighting systems b control systems for military installations...]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsSource-changeover systems Presentation0Manual source-changeover systemThis is the most simple type. It is controlled manually by an operator and consequently the time required to switch from the normal to the replacement source can vary. A manual source-changeover system is made up of two or three mechanically interlocked manually-operated circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors.PB100843Remote-operated source-changeover systemThis is the most commonly employed system for devices with high ratings (above 400 A). No human intervention is required. Transfer from the normal to the replacement source is controlled electrically. A remote-controlled source-changeover system is made up of two or three circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors linked by an electrical interlocking system that may have different configurations. In addition, a mechanical interlocking system protects against electrical malfunctions or incorrect manual operations.PB100844Automatic source-changeover systemsAn automatic controller may be added to a remote-operated source-changeover system for automatic source control according to programmable operating modes. This solution ensures optimum energy management: b transfer to a replacement source according to external requirements b management of power sources b regulation b emergency source replacement, etc. The automatic controller may be fitted with an option for communication with a supervisor.Service sector: b hospital operating rooms b safety systems for tall buildings b computer rooms (banks, insurance companies, etc.) b lighting systems in shopping centres.Communication optionThe communication option must not be used to control the opening or closing of source-changeover system circuit breakers. It should be used only to transmit measurement data or circuit-breaker status. The eco COM option is perfectly suited to these equipments.PB100845Industry: b assembly lines b propulsion systems on ships b essential auxiliaries in thermal power stations...PB100847PB100846Infrastructure: b port and railway installations b runway lighting systems b control systems for military installations...]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="56">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsSource-changeover systems Mechanical interlocking0DB101572Interlocking of two Compact NS630b to 1600 or two Masterpact NT and NW devices using connecting rodsThe two devices must be mounted one above the other (either 2 fixed or 2 withdrawable/drawout devices). Combinations are possible between Compact NS630b to NS1600 devices and between Masterpact NT and Masterpact NW devices. Installation This function requires: b an adaptation fixture on the right side of each circuit breaker or switchdisconnector b a set of connecting rods with no-slip adjustments. The adaptation fixtures, connecting rods and circuit breakers or switchdisconnectors are supplied separately, ready for assembly by the customer. The maximum vertical distance between the fixing planes is 900 mm.Possible combinations of “Normal” and “Replacement” source circuit breakers&amp;quot;Normal N&amp;quot;&amp;quot;Replacement&amp;quot; RNS630b to NS1600 NT06 to NT16 NW08 to NW40 NW40b to NW63Interlocking of two Masterpact NT or NW circuit breakers using connecting rods.NS630b to NS1600 Ratings 250... 1600 A NT06 to NT16 Ratings 250... 1600 A NW08 to NW40 Ratings 320... 4000 A NW40b to NW63 Ratings 4000... 6300 Ab b b b b b b b b b]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsSource-changeover systems Mechanical interlocking0DB101572Interlocking of two Compact NS630b to 1600 or two Masterpact NT and NW devices using connecting rodsThe two devices must be mounted one above the other (either 2 fixed or 2 withdrawable/drawout devices). Combinations are possible between Compact NS630b to NS1600 devices and between Masterpact NT and Masterpact NW devices. Installation This function requires: b an adaptation fixture on the right side of each circuit breaker or switchdisconnector b a set of connecting rods with no-slip adjustments. The adaptation fixtures, connecting rods and circuit breakers or switchdisconnectors are supplied separately, ready for assembly by the customer. The maximum vertical distance between the fixing planes is 900 mm.Possible combinations of “Normal” and “Replacement” source circuit breakers&amp;quot;Normal N&amp;quot;&amp;quot;Replacement&amp;quot; RNS630b to NS1600 NT06 to NT16 NW08 to NW40 NW40b to NW63Interlocking of two Masterpact NT or NW circuit breakers using connecting rods.NS630b to NS1600 Ratings 250... 1600 A NT06 to NT16 Ratings 250... 1600 A NW08 to NW40 Ratings 320... 4000 A NW40b to NW63 Ratings 4000... 6300 Ab b b b b b b b b b]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="57">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsSource-changeover systems Mechanical interlocking0PB100842_68Interlocking of two Masterpact NT/NW or up to three Masterpact NW devices using cablesFor cable interlocking, the circuit breakers may be mounted one above the other or side-by-side. The interlocked devices may be fixed or drawout, three-pole or four-pole, and have different ratings and sizes. Interlocking between two devices (Masterpact NT and NW) This function requires: b an adaptation fixture on the right side of each device b a set of cables with no-slip adjustments. The maximum distance between the fixing planes (vertical or horizontal) is 2000 mm. Interlocking between three devices (Masterpact NW only) This function requires: b a specific adaptation fixture for each type of interlocking, installed on the right side of each device b two or three sets of cables with no-slip adjustments. The maximum distance between the fixing planes (vertical or horizontal) is 1000 mm. Installation The adaptation fixtures, sets of cables and circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors are supplied separately, ready for assembly by the customer. Installation conditions for cable interlocking systems: b cable length: 2.5 m b radius of curvature: 100 mm b maximum number of curves: 3.Possible combinations of “Normal” and “Replacement” source circuit breakersInterlocking of two Masterpact circuit breakers using cables.&amp;quot;Normal N&amp;quot;NT06 to NT16 Ratings 250... 1600 A NW08 to NW40 Ratings 320... 4000 A NW40b to NW63 Ratings 4000... 6300 A&amp;quot;Replacement&amp;quot; RNT06 to NT16 b b b NW08 to NW40 b b b NW40b to NW63 b b bAll combinations of two Masterpact NT and Masterpact NW devices are possible, whatever the rating or size of the devices.Possible combinations of three device NT06 to NT16 NT06 to NT16 Ratings 250... 1600 A NW08 to NW40 Ratings 320... 4000 A NW40b to NW63 Ratings 4000... 6300 A NW08 to NW40 NW40b to NW63b bb bOnly Masterpact NW may be used for three-device combinations.Types of mechanical interlocking and combinationsSee catalogue &amp;quot;Source changeover systems&amp;quot;, réf. ABTED201149EN.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsSource-changeover systems Mechanical interlocking0PB100842_68Interlocking of two Masterpact NT/NW or up to three Masterpact NW devices using cablesFor cable interlocking, the circuit breakers may be mounted one above the other or side-by-side. The interlocked devices may be fixed or drawout, three-pole or four-pole, and have different ratings and sizes. Interlocking between two devices (Masterpact NT and NW) This function requires: b an adaptation fixture on the right side of each device b a set of cables with no-slip adjustments. The maximum distance between the fixing planes (vertical or horizontal) is 2000 mm. Interlocking between three devices (Masterpact NW only) This function requires: b a specific adaptation fixture for each type of interlocking, installed on the right side of each device b two or three sets of cables with no-slip adjustments. The maximum distance between the fixing planes (vertical or horizontal) is 1000 mm. Installation The adaptation fixtures, sets of cables and circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors are supplied separately, ready for assembly by the customer. Installation conditions for cable interlocking systems: b cable length: 2.5 m b radius of curvature: 100 mm b maximum number of curves: 3.Possible combinations of “Normal” and “Replacement” source circuit breakersInterlocking of two Masterpact circuit breakers using cables.&amp;quot;Normal N&amp;quot;NT06 to NT16 Ratings 250... 1600 A NW08 to NW40 Ratings 320... 4000 A NW40b to NW63 Ratings 4000... 6300 A&amp;quot;Replacement&amp;quot; RNT06 to NT16 b b b NW08 to NW40 b b b NW40b to NW63 b b bAll combinations of two Masterpact NT and Masterpact NW devices are possible, whatever the rating or size of the devices.Possible combinations of three device NT06 to NT16 NT06 to NT16 Ratings 250... 1600 A NW08 to NW40 Ratings 320... 4000 A NW40b to NW63 Ratings 4000... 6300 A NW08 to NW40 NW40b to NW63b bb bOnly Masterpact NW may be used for three-device combinations.Types of mechanical interlocking and combinationsSee catalogue &amp;quot;Source changeover systems&amp;quot;, réf. ABTED201149EN.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="58">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsSource-changeover systems Electrical interlocking0Electrical interlocking is used with the mechanical interlocking system. It electrically interlocks the two circuit breakers and implements the time delays required for proper operation of the system. An automatic controller may be added to take into account information from the distribution system.Electrical interlocking is carried out by an electrical control device. For Masterpact, this function can be implemented in one of two ways: b using the IVE unit b by an electrician based on the diagrams presented in the “Electrical diagrams” part of this catalogue.Characteristics of the IVE unitb external connection terminal block: v inputs: circuit breaker control signals v outputs: status of the SDE contacts on the “Normal” and “Replacement” source circuit breakers b 2 connectors for the two “Normal” and “Replacement” source circuit breakers: v inputs: - status of the OF contacts on each circuit breaker (ON or OFF) - status of the SDE contacts on the “Normal” and “Replacement” source circuit breakers v outputs: power supply for operating mechanisms b control voltage: v 24 to 250 V DC v 48 to 415 V 50/60 Hz - 440 V 60 Hz. The IVE unit control voltage must be same as that of the circuit breaker operating mechanisms.DB101573IVE unit.Necessary equipmentFor Masterpact NT and NW, each circuit breaker must be equipped with: b a remote-operation system made up of: v MCH gear motor v MX or MN opening release v XF closing release v PF “ready to close” contact b an available OF contact b one to three CE connected-position contacts (carriage switches) on drawout circuit breakers (depending on the installation).]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsSource-changeover systems Electrical interlocking0Electrical interlocking is used with the mechanical interlocking system. It electrically interlocks the two circuit breakers and implements the time delays required for proper operation of the system. An automatic controller may be added to take into account information from the distribution system.Electrical interlocking is carried out by an electrical control device. For Masterpact, this function can be implemented in one of two ways: b using the IVE unit b by an electrician based on the diagrams presented in the “Electrical diagrams” part of this catalogue.Characteristics of the IVE unitb external connection terminal block: v inputs: circuit breaker control signals v outputs: status of the SDE contacts on the “Normal” and “Replacement” source circuit breakers b 2 connectors for the two “Normal” and “Replacement” source circuit breakers: v inputs: - status of the OF contacts on each circuit breaker (ON or OFF) - status of the SDE contacts on the “Normal” and “Replacement” source circuit breakers v outputs: power supply for operating mechanisms b control voltage: v 24 to 250 V DC v 48 to 415 V 50/60 Hz - 440 V 60 Hz. The IVE unit control voltage must be same as that of the circuit breaker operating mechanisms.DB101573IVE unit.Necessary equipmentFor Masterpact NT and NW, each circuit breaker must be equipped with: b a remote-operation system made up of: v MCH gear motor v MX or MN opening release v XF closing release v PF “ready to close” contact b an available OF contact b one to three CE connected-position contacts (carriage switches) on drawout circuit breakers (depending on the installation).]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="59">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsSource-changeover systems Standard configuration0Compact NS, Masterpact NT and NWTypes of mechanical interlocking2 devicesDB101574Possible combinations Typical electrical diagramsQN 0 1 0 QR 0 0 1 Masterpact NT and NW: b electrical interlocking with lockout after fault: v permanent replacement source (without IVE) v with EPO by MX (without IVE) v with EPO by MN (without IVE) v permanent replacement source (with IVE) v with EPO by MX (with IVE) v with EPO by MN (with IVE) b automatic control without lockout after fault: v permanent replacement source (without IVE) v engine generator set (without IVE) b automatic control with lockout after fault: v permanent replacement source (with IVE) v engine generator set (with IVE) b BA/UA controller (with IVE)Diagram no.51201139 51201140 51201141 51201142 51201143 51201144 51156226 51156227 51156904 51156905 51156903Masterpact NW onlyTypes of mechanical interlocking3 devices: 2 “Normal” sources and 1 “Replacement” source QN1 0 1 0 QN2 0 1 0 QR 0 0 1DB101575Possible combinations Typical electrical diagramsb electrical interlocking: v without lockout after fault v with lockout after faultDiagram no.51156906 511569073 devices: 2 “Normal” sources and 1 “Replacement” source with source selection QN1 QN2 QR 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 3 devices: 3 sources, only one device QS1 0 1 0 0 3 devices: 2 sources + 1 coupling QS2 0 0 1 0 QS3 0 0 0 1DB101576b automatic control with engine generator set: v without lockout after fault (with MN) v with lockout after fault (with MN)51156908 51156909DB101577b electrical interlocking: v without lockout after fault v with lockout after fault51156910 51156911QS1 QC QS2 b electrical interlocking: 0 0 0 v without lockout after fault 1 0 1 v with lockout after fault 1 1 0 b automatic control with lockout after fault 0 1 1 (1) 1 0 0 (1) 0 0 1 (1) possible by forcing operation “Lockout after fault” option. This option makes it necessary to manually reset the device following fault tripping.51156912 51156913 51156914DB101578]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsSource-changeover systems Standard configuration0Compact NS, Masterpact NT and NWTypes of mechanical interlocking2 devicesDB101574Possible combinations Typical electrical diagramsQN 0 1 0 QR 0 0 1 Masterpact NT and NW: b electrical interlocking with lockout after fault: v permanent replacement source (without IVE) v with EPO by MX (without IVE) v with EPO by MN (without IVE) v permanent replacement source (with IVE) v with EPO by MX (with IVE) v with EPO by MN (with IVE) b automatic control without lockout after fault: v permanent replacement source (without IVE) v engine generator set (without IVE) b automatic control with lockout after fault: v permanent replacement source (with IVE) v engine generator set (with IVE) b BA/UA controller (with IVE)Diagram no.51201139 51201140 51201141 51201142 51201143 51201144 51156226 51156227 51156904 51156905 51156903Masterpact NW onlyTypes of mechanical interlocking3 devices: 2 “Normal” sources and 1 “Replacement” source QN1 0 1 0 QN2 0 1 0 QR 0 0 1DB101575Possible combinations Typical electrical diagramsb electrical interlocking: v without lockout after fault v with lockout after faultDiagram no.51156906 511569073 devices: 2 “Normal” sources and 1 “Replacement” source with source selection QN1 QN2 QR 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 3 devices: 3 sources, only one device QS1 0 1 0 0 3 devices: 2 sources + 1 coupling QS2 0 0 1 0 QS3 0 0 0 1DB101576b automatic control with engine generator set: v without lockout after fault (with MN) v with lockout after fault (with MN)51156908 51156909DB101577b electrical interlocking: v without lockout after fault v with lockout after fault51156910 51156911QS1 QC QS2 b electrical interlocking: 0 0 0 v without lockout after fault 1 0 1 v with lockout after fault 1 1 0 b automatic control with lockout after fault 0 1 1 (1) 1 0 0 (1) 0 0 1 (1) possible by forcing operation “Lockout after fault” option. This option makes it necessary to manually reset the device following fault tripping.51156912 51156913 51156914DB101578]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="60">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsSource-changeover systems Associated automatic controllers0By combining a remote-operated sourcechangeover system with an integrated BA or UA automatic controller, it is possible to automatically control source transfer according to user-selected sequences. These controllers can be used on sourcechangeover systems comprising 2 circuit breakers. For source-changeover systems comprising 3 circuit breakers, the automatic control diagram must be prepared by the installer as a complement to to diagrams provided in the “electrical diagrams” section of this catalogue.PB100855ControllerCompatible circuit breakersBAUAAll Masterpact circuit breakers b b b b b b b b b b b b b b4-position switchAutomatic operation Forced operation on “Normal” source Forced operation on “Replacement” source Stop (both “Normal” and “Replacement” sources off)Automatic operationMonitoring of the “Normal” source and automatic transfer Generator set startup control Delayed shutdown (adjustable) of generator set Load shedding and reconnection of non-priority circuits Transfer to the “Replacement” source if one of the phases of the “Normal” phase is absentTestBy opening the P25M circuit breaker supplying the controller By pressing the test button on the front of the controller b b b b b b b b b b b b bIndicationsCircuit breaker status indication on the front of the controller: on, off, fault trip Automatic mode indicating contactOther functionsSelection of type of “Normal” source (single-phase or three-phase)(1)BA controller.Voluntary transfer to “Replacement” source (e.g. energy management commands) During peak-tariff periods (energy management commands) forced operation on “Normal” sourceif “Replacement” source not operational Additional contact (not part of controller). Transfer to “Replacement” source only if contact is closed. (e.g. used to test the frequency of UR). Setting of maximum startup time for the replacement sourceOptionsCommunication optionPB100856Power supplyControl voltages (2) 110 V 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz 380 to 415 V 50/60 Hz and 440 V 60 Hz 0.35 Un y voltage y 0.7 Un 0.5 Un y voltage y 0.7 Un voltage u 0.85 Un b b b b b bOperating thresholdsUndervoltage Phase failure Voltage presence b b b b bIP degree of protection (EN 60529) and IK degree of protection against external mechanical impacts (EN 50102)Front Side Connectors Front IP40 IP30 IP20 IK07 b b b b b b b bUA controller.Characteristics of output contacts (dry, volt-free contacts)Rated thermal current (A) 8 Minimum load 10 mA at 12 V Output contacts: Position of the Auto/Stop switch b b Load shedding and reconnection order b Generator set start order. b AC DC Utilisation category (IEC 947-5-1) AC12 AC13 AC14 AC15 DC12 DC13 Operational current (A) 24 V 8 7 5 5 8 2 48 V 8 7 5 5 2 110 V 8 6 4 4 0.6 220/240 V 8 6 4 3 250 V 0.4 380/415 V 5 440 V 4 660/690 V (1) For example, 220 V single-phase or 220 V three-phase. (2) The controller is powered by the ACP auxiliaries control plate. The same voltage must be used for the ACP plate, the IVE unit and the circuit-breaker operating mechanisms. If this voltage is the same as the source voltage, then the “Normal” and “Replacement” sources can be used directly for the power supply. If not, an isolation transformer must be used.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsSource-changeover systems Associated automatic controllers0By combining a remote-operated sourcechangeover system with an integrated BA or UA automatic controller, it is possible to automatically control source transfer according to user-selected sequences. These controllers can be used on sourcechangeover systems comprising 2 circuit breakers. For source-changeover systems comprising 3 circuit breakers, the automatic control diagram must be prepared by the installer as a complement to to diagrams provided in the “electrical diagrams” section of this catalogue.PB100855ControllerCompatible circuit breakersBAUAAll Masterpact circuit breakers b b b b b b b b b b b b b b4-position switchAutomatic operation Forced operation on “Normal” source Forced operation on “Replacement” source Stop (both “Normal” and “Replacement” sources off)Automatic operationMonitoring of the “Normal” source and automatic transfer Generator set startup control Delayed shutdown (adjustable) of generator set Load shedding and reconnection of non-priority circuits Transfer to the “Replacement” source if one of the phases of the “Normal” phase is absentTestBy opening the P25M circuit breaker supplying the controller By pressing the test button on the front of the controller b b b b b b b b b b b b bIndicationsCircuit breaker status indication on the front of the controller: on, off, fault trip Automatic mode indicating contactOther functionsSelection of type of “Normal” source (single-phase or three-phase)(1)BA controller.Voluntary transfer to “Replacement” source (e.g. energy management commands) During peak-tariff periods (energy management commands) forced operation on “Normal” sourceif “Replacement” source not operational Additional contact (not part of controller). Transfer to “Replacement” source only if contact is closed. (e.g. used to test the frequency of UR). Setting of maximum startup time for the replacement sourceOptionsCommunication optionPB100856Power supplyControl voltages (2) 110 V 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz 380 to 415 V 50/60 Hz and 440 V 60 Hz 0.35 Un y voltage y 0.7 Un 0.5 Un y voltage y 0.7 Un voltage u 0.85 Un b b b b b bOperating thresholdsUndervoltage Phase failure Voltage presence b b b b bIP degree of protection (EN 60529) and IK degree of protection against external mechanical impacts (EN 50102)Front Side Connectors Front IP40 IP30 IP20 IK07 b b b b b b b bUA controller.Characteristics of output contacts (dry, volt-free contacts)Rated thermal current (A) 8 Minimum load 10 mA at 12 V Output contacts: Position of the Auto/Stop switch b b Load shedding and reconnection order b Generator set start order. b AC DC Utilisation category (IEC 947-5-1) AC12 AC13 AC14 AC15 DC12 DC13 Operational current (A) 24 V 8 7 5 5 8 2 48 V 8 7 5 5 2 110 V 8 6 4 4 0.6 220/240 V 8 6 4 3 250 V 0.4 380/415 V 5 440 V 4 660/690 V (1) For example, 220 V single-phase or 220 V three-phase. (2) The controller is powered by the ACP auxiliaries control plate. The same voltage must be used for the ACP plate, the IVE unit and the circuit-breaker operating mechanisms. If this voltage is the same as the source voltage, then the “Normal” and “Replacement” sources can be used directly for the power supply. If not, an isolation transformer must be used.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="61">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsDisplay modules0Perfectly integrated in the Compact and Masterpact ranges, Display modules are designed for use with Micrologic control units to provide instant and highly intuitive access to all the information provided by the circuit breakers, including device status, current, voltage and power values, etc.PB100830-58DMB300 and DMC300 display modules use the power and communications capabilities of the Micrologic control units to centralise the display of electrical values, status conditions and alarms of one or more Compact or Masterpact circuit breakers. The mounting and cabling system for the display modules ensures fast, easy and reliable installation. Start-up is immediate with no configuration or programming required. Display modules are high-performance devices combining: b simple and easy-to-read dials b powerful and accurate digital processing. Their small size and extensive communications capabilities make for easy and flexible installation and operation.Display modulesAssociated circuit breakersType NumberDMB300DMC300Compact or Masterpact equipped with Micrologic control units 1 to 4 1 to 16 Black and white 240 x 64 pixels 5 buttons Colour, touch screen 5&amp;quot;, 320 x 240 pixels Touch screenDisplayScreen type Screen size Entry DMB300 display module: basic and harmonic measurements.Information displayedCurrents (per phase) Currents I1, I2, I3, IN A P H A P H Maximum current A P H A P H Earth-fault and earth-leakage currents A P H A P H Demand current P H P H Maximum demand current P H P H Total harmonic distortion (THD) H H Maximum total harmonic distortion H H Amplitudes of individual harmonics H Voltages Phase-to-phase voltages (U1-2, U2-3, U3-1) P H P H Minimum/maximum phase-to-phase voltages P H P H Phase-to-neutral voltages (V1-N, V2-N, V3-N) P H P H Minimum/maximum phase-to-neutral voltages P H Frequency P H P H Voltage imbalance (% per phase) P H P H Total harmonic distortion (% per phase) H H Maximum total harmonic distortion (% per phase) H H Amplitudes of individual harmonics H H Power Active (P), reactive (Q) and apparent (S) power P H P H Power factor and cosϕ P H P H Maximum power (P, Q, S) P H P H Demand power (P, Q, S) P H P H Maximum demand power P H P H Metering Active, reactive and apparent energy P H P H On-line help On-line help is available for each type of information supplied by the module Circuit-breaker diagnostics Identification of control units A P H A P H Reading of protections A P H A P H Circuit-breaker status A P H A P H Type of trip A P H A P H Current alarms P H P H Maintenance indicator P H Installation diagnosis Indication of faulty devices A P H Fault log A P HPB100832-66DMC300 display module: measurements, harmonic analysis, diagnosis.Associated Micrologic control unit A = Micrologic A P = Micrologic P H = Micrologic HInstallation and start-upMounting Connection Mounted through door, without tools, using 6 spring-clips supplied with the mod. Prefabricated wiring systems]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsDisplay modules0Perfectly integrated in the Compact and Masterpact ranges, Display modules are designed for use with Micrologic control units to provide instant and highly intuitive access to all the information provided by the circuit breakers, including device status, current, voltage and power values, etc.PB100830-58DMB300 and DMC300 display modules use the power and communications capabilities of the Micrologic control units to centralise the display of electrical values, status conditions and alarms of one or more Compact or Masterpact circuit breakers. The mounting and cabling system for the display modules ensures fast, easy and reliable installation. Start-up is immediate with no configuration or programming required. Display modules are high-performance devices combining: b simple and easy-to-read dials b powerful and accurate digital processing. Their small size and extensive communications capabilities make for easy and flexible installation and operation.Display modulesAssociated circuit breakersType NumberDMB300DMC300Compact or Masterpact equipped with Micrologic control units 1 to 4 1 to 16 Black and white 240 x 64 pixels 5 buttons Colour, touch screen 5&amp;quot;, 320 x 240 pixels Touch screenDisplayScreen type Screen size Entry DMB300 display module: basic and harmonic measurements.Information displayedCurrents (per phase) Currents I1, I2, I3, IN A P H A P H Maximum current A P H A P H Earth-fault and earth-leakage currents A P H A P H Demand current P H P H Maximum demand current P H P H Total harmonic distortion (THD) H H Maximum total harmonic distortion H H Amplitudes of individual harmonics H Voltages Phase-to-phase voltages (U1-2, U2-3, U3-1) P H P H Minimum/maximum phase-to-phase voltages P H P H Phase-to-neutral voltages (V1-N, V2-N, V3-N) P H P H Minimum/maximum phase-to-neutral voltages P H Frequency P H P H Voltage imbalance (% per phase) P H P H Total harmonic distortion (% per phase) H H Maximum total harmonic distortion (% per phase) H H Amplitudes of individual harmonics H H Power Active (P), reactive (Q) and apparent (S) power P H P H Power factor and cosϕ P H P H Maximum power (P, Q, S) P H P H Demand power (P, Q, S) P H P H Maximum demand power P H P H Metering Active, reactive and apparent energy P H P H On-line help On-line help is available for each type of information supplied by the module Circuit-breaker diagnostics Identification of control units A P H A P H Reading of protections A P H A P H Circuit-breaker status A P H A P H Type of trip A P H A P H Current alarms P H P H Maintenance indicator P H Installation diagnosis Indication of faulty devices A P H Fault log A P HPB100832-66DMC300 display module: measurements, harmonic analysis, diagnosis.Associated Micrologic control unit A = Micrologic A P = Micrologic P H = Micrologic HInstallation and start-upMounting Connection Mounted through door, without tools, using 6 spring-clips supplied with the mod. Prefabricated wiring systems]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="62">
		<raw><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsDisplay modules0Wiring system The wiring system is designed for low-voltage power switchboards. Installation requires no tools or special skills. The prefabricated wiring ensures both data transmission (ModBus protocol) and 24 V DC power distribution for the display module and the communications modules on the Micrologic control units.Connection of DMB300 display moduleDB101186DB101181 DB1011821ON ONn˚ 4n˚ 4 4 ON n˚ ˚ n˚ 3n˚ 3 n˚ 4 n˚ 2n˚ 2 n˚ 3 n˚ 3 n˚ 1n˚ 1 n˚ 2 n˚ 2 OUT OUT n˚ 1 IN IN TONONINOU2Resetpushresetpush OFFONNX 32H2Icu (kA) 100 100 85 Icw 85kA/1s Icu50/60Hz70 Micrologic ApUe (V) 220/440 525 690IrIg Isd I Iied dischargcat.B Ics = 100%O OFF947-2 IEC EN 60947-2 CEI BSUTE VDEUNEAS NEMA01253CDM 303: Connection cable between display module and junction block.comDMB300 Digipactvolets shuttersTest1 2 3selectIUP?42NWUimp1251H112kVUimp Icu (kA) 100 85Ui 1000V 8kV Ue (V) 220/240 480/690pushO OFFpushI ONdischargedO OFFIcs =100%IcuONIECUTEVDE947-2 CEI UNE BS01253INn˚ 1 OUTn˚ 2n˚ 3n˚ 4ONNWUimp1251H112kVUimp Icu (kA) 100 85Ui 1000V 8kV Ue (V) 220/240 480/690pushO OFFpushI ONdischargedO OFFIcs =100%IcuIECUTEVDE947-2 CEI UNE BS01253CJB 306 junction block.DB1011833Masterpact circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control units and the ModBus COM option.Connection of DMC300 display moduleMaximum distance between module and circuit breaker: 1200 m.CCP 303: Connection cable between Masterpact or Compact and junction block.DB101184 DB101185DB1011874CCR 301: Roll of RS 485 cable (2 RS 485 wires + 2 power supply wires).5CSD 309: SubD 9-pin connector for colour-coded connection of wires to screw terminals. Masterpact circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control units and the ModBus eco COM option.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Functions and characteristicsDisplay modules0Wiring system The wiring system is designed for low-voltage power switchboards. Installation requires no tools or special skills. The prefabricated wiring ensures both data transmission (ModBus protocol) and 24 V DC power distribution for the display module and the communications modules on the Micrologic control units.Connection of DMB300 display moduleDB101186DB101181 DB1011821ON ONn˚ 4n˚ 4 4 ON n˚ ˚ n˚ 3n˚ 3 n˚ 4 n˚ 2n˚ 2 n˚ 3 n˚ 3 n˚ 1n˚ 1 n˚ 2 n˚ 2 OUT OUT n˚ 1 IN IN TONONINOU2Resetpushresetpush OFFONNX 32H2Icu (kA) 100 100 85 Icw 85kA/1s Icu50/60Hz70 Micrologic ApUe (V) 220/440 525 690IrIg Isd I Iied dischargcat.B Ics = 100%O OFF947-2 IEC EN 60947-2 CEI BSUTE VDEUNEAS NEMA01253CDM 303: Connection cable between display module and junction block.comDMB300 Digipactvolets shuttersTest1 2 3selectIUP?42NWUimp1251H112kVUimp Icu (kA) 100 85Ui 1000V 8kV Ue (V) 220/240 480/690pushO OFFpushI ONdischargedO OFFIcs =100%IcuONIECUTEVDE947-2 CEI UNE BS01253INn˚ 1 OUTn˚ 2n˚ 3n˚ 4ONNWUimp1251H112kVUimp Icu (kA) 100 85Ui 1000V 8kV Ue (V) 220/240 480/690pushO OFFpushI ONdischargedO OFFIcs =100%IcuIECUTEVDE947-2 CEI UNE BS01253CJB 306 junction block.DB1011833Masterpact circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control units and the ModBus COM option.Connection of DMC300 display moduleMaximum distance between module and circuit breaker: 1200 m.CCP 303: Connection cable between Masterpact or Compact and junction block.DB101184 DB101185DB1011874CCR 301: Roll of RS 485 cable (2 RS 485 wires + 2 power supply wires).5CSD 309: SubD 9-pin connector for colour-coded connection of wires to screw terminals. Masterpact circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control units and the ModBus eco COM option.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="63">
		<raw><![CDATA[]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="64">
		<raw><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: b complete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochures… b selection guides from the e-catalog. b product discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contacts…The CAD software and tools enhance productivity and safety. They help you create your installations by simplifying product choice through easy browsing in the Guiding System offers. Last but not least, they optimise use of our products while also complying with standards and proper procedures.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: b complete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochures… b selection guides from the e-catalog. b product discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contacts…The CAD software and tools enhance productivity and safety. They help you create your installations by simplifying product choice through easy browsing in the Guiding System offers. Last but not least, they optimise use of our products while also complying with standards and proper procedures.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="65">
		<raw><![CDATA[MasterpactDimensions and connectionPresentation Functions and characteristics6 13NT06 to NT16 circuit breakersFixed 3/4-poles device Drawout 3/4-poles device6464 68NW08 to NW32 circuit breakersFixed 3/4-poles device Drawout 3/4-poles device7272 74NW40 circuit breakersFixed 3/4-poles device Drawout 3/4-poles device7676 78NW40b to NW63 circuit breakersFixed 3/4-poles device Drawout 3/4-poles device8080 82NT/NW accessories NT/NW external modulesElectrical diagrams Installation recommendations Additional characteristics Catalogue numbers and order form84 8693 103 127 133]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[MasterpactDimensions and connectionPresentation Functions and characteristics6 13NT06 to NT16 circuit breakersFixed 3/4-poles device Drawout 3/4-poles device6464 68NW08 to NW32 circuit breakersFixed 3/4-poles device Drawout 3/4-poles device7272 74NW40 circuit breakersFixed 3/4-poles device Drawout 3/4-poles device7676 78NW40b to NW63 circuit breakersFixed 3/4-poles device Drawout 3/4-poles device8080 82NT/NW accessories NT/NW external modulesElectrical diagrams Installation recommendations Additional characteristics Catalogue numbers and order form84 8693 103 127 133]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="66">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT06 to NT16 circuit breakers Fixed 3/4-poles device0DimensionsDB101188 DB101189Bottom mounting (on base plate or rails)Rear mounting detail (on upright or backplate)DB101190DB101191Safety clearancesDoor cutoutDB101192Rear panel cutoutDB101193DB101194DB101195For voltages &amp;lt; 690 VParts Insulated 0 0 Metal 0 0 Energised 100 60For 1000 VParts Insulated 0 0 Metal 100 50 Energised 500 (3) 100 (3)A BA B(3) With a minimum distance between bars of 65 mm (A and B) if the bars are not insulated. : datum. (1) Without escutcheon. (2) With escutcheon. Note: X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device. A(*) An overhead clearance of 50 mm is required to remove the arc chutes. An overhead clearance of 20 mm is required to remove the terminal block.64DB1011]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT06 to NT16 circuit breakers Fixed 3/4-poles device0DimensionsDB101188 DB101189Bottom mounting (on base plate or rails)Rear mounting detail (on upright or backplate)DB101190DB101191Safety clearancesDoor cutoutDB101192Rear panel cutoutDB101193DB101194DB101195For voltages &amp;lt; 690 VParts Insulated 0 0 Metal 0 0 Energised 100 60For 1000 VParts Insulated 0 0 Metal 100 50 Energised 500 (3) 100 (3)A BA B(3) With a minimum distance between bars of 65 mm (A and B) if the bars are not insulated. : datum. (1) Without escutcheon. (2) With escutcheon. Note: X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device. A(*) An overhead clearance of 50 mm is required to remove the arc chutes. An overhead clearance of 20 mm is required to remove the terminal block.64DB1011]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="67">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT06 to NT16 circuit breakers Fixed 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsHorizontal rear connection DetailDB101197DB101198Vertical rear connectionDB101200DB101199DetailDB101201DB101202DB101230oDB101204View A detail.Front connectionDetailDB101205DB101206DB101231Top connectionDB101208Bottom connectionView A detail.Note: recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT06 to NT16 circuit breakers Fixed 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsHorizontal rear connection DetailDB101197DB101198Vertical rear connectionDB101200DB101199DetailDB101201DB101202DB101230oDB101204View A detail.Front connectionDetailDB101205DB101206DB101231Top connectionDB101208Bottom connectionView A detail.Note: recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="68">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT06 to NT16 circuit breakers Fixed 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsFront connection with spreadersDB101210 DB101211 DB101527 DB101528DetailRear connection with spreadersDetailDB101214DB101215Spreader detail Middle left or middle right spreader for 4P. Middle spreader for 3P. Left or right spreader for 4P. Left or right spreader for 3P.DB101218DB101219DB101220DB101217DB101216View A detail.: datum.Note: X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.66DB1012]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT06 to NT16 circuit breakers Fixed 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsFront connection with spreadersDB101210 DB101211 DB101527 DB101528DetailRear connection with spreadersDetailDB101214DB101215Spreader detail Middle left or middle right spreader for 4P. Middle spreader for 3P. Left or right spreader for 4P. Left or right spreader for 3P.DB101218DB101219DB101220DB101217DB101216View A detail.: datum.Note: X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.66DB1012]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="69">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT06 to NT16 circuit breakers Fixed 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsFront connection via vertical connection adapters DetailDB101222DB101223DB101225DB101232View A detail.Front connection via vertical connection adapters fitted with cable-lug adaptersDetailDB101226DB101227DB101229DB101233View A detail.Note: recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.(1) 2 connection possibilities on vertical connection adapters (21 mm between centres).]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT06 to NT16 circuit breakers Fixed 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsFront connection via vertical connection adapters DetailDB101222DB101223DB101225DB101232View A detail.Front connection via vertical connection adapters fitted with cable-lug adaptersDetailDB101226DB101227DB101229DB101233View A detail.Note: recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.(1) 2 connection possibilities on vertical connection adapters (21 mm between centres).]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="70">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT06 to NT16 circuit breakers Drawout 3/4-poles device0DimensionsDB101234 DB101235(*) Disconnected position.Bottom mounting (on base plate or rails)Rear mounting detail (on upright or backplate)DB101236DB101237Safety clearancesDoor cutoutDB101238Rear panel cutoutDB101256DB101239DB101240For voltages &amp;lt; 690 V or equal to 1000 V.Parts Insulated 0 10 0 Metal 0 10 0 Energised 30 60 30 : datum. (1) Without escutcheon. (2) With escutcheon. Note: X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.A B C68DB1012]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT06 to NT16 circuit breakers Drawout 3/4-poles device0DimensionsDB101234 DB101235(*) Disconnected position.Bottom mounting (on base plate or rails)Rear mounting detail (on upright or backplate)DB101236DB101237Safety clearancesDoor cutoutDB101238Rear panel cutoutDB101256DB101239DB101240For voltages &amp;lt; 690 V or equal to 1000 V.Parts Insulated 0 10 0 Metal 0 10 0 Energised 30 60 30 : datum. (1) Without escutcheon. (2) With escutcheon. Note: X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.A B C68DB1012]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="71">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT06 to NT16 circuit breakers Drawout 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsHorizontal rear connection DetailDB101242DB101243Vertical rear connectionDB101200DB101244DetailDB101246DB101247DB101250DB101249View A detail.Front connectionDetailDB101251DB101252DB101254Top connectionDB101255Bottom connectionView A detail. Note: recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT06 to NT16 circuit breakers Drawout 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsHorizontal rear connection DetailDB101242DB101243Vertical rear connectionDB101200DB101244DetailDB101246DB101247DB101250DB101249View A detail.Front connectionDetailDB101251DB101252DB101254Top connectionDB101255Bottom connectionView A detail. Note: recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="72">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT06 to NT16 circuit breakers Drawout 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsFront connection with spreadersDB101257 DB101258 DB101265Spreader detail Middle left or middle right spreader for 4P. Middle spreader for 3P. Left or right spreader for 4P. Left or right spreader for 3P.DB101218DB101219DB101220DB101266View A detail.: datum.Note: X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.70DB1012]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT06 to NT16 circuit breakers Drawout 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsFront connection with spreadersDB101257 DB101258 DB101265Spreader detail Middle left or middle right spreader for 4P. Middle spreader for 3P. Left or right spreader for 4P. Left or right spreader for 3P.DB101218DB101219DB101220DB101266View A detail.: datum.Note: X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.70DB1012]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="73">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT06 to NT16 circuit breakers Drawout 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsFront connection via vertical connection adapters fitted with cable-lug adaptersDB101261 DB101262 DB101264 DB101229View A detail.Note: recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT06 to NT16 circuit breakers Drawout 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsFront connection via vertical connection adapters fitted with cable-lug adaptersDB101261 DB101262 DB101264 DB101229View A detail.Note: recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="74">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW08 to NW32 circuit breakers Fixed 3/4-poles device0DimensionsDB101267Mounting on base plate or railsDB101268Mounting detailDB101269Safety clearancesDB101270Door cutoutDB101271DB101272Insulated partsA B 0 0 : datum.Metal parts0 0Energised parts100 60DB101273(1) Without escutcheon. (2) With escutcheon. Note: X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device. A(*) An overhead clearance of 50 mm is required to remove the arc chutes. An overhead clearance of 20 mm is required to remove the terminal block.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW08 to NW32 circuit breakers Fixed 3/4-poles device0DimensionsDB101267Mounting on base plate or railsDB101268Mounting detailDB101269Safety clearancesDB101270Door cutoutDB101271DB101272Insulated partsA B 0 0 : datum.Metal parts0 0Energised parts100 60DB101273(1) Without escutcheon. (2) With escutcheon. Note: X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device. A(*) An overhead clearance of 50 mm is required to remove the arc chutes. An overhead clearance of 20 mm is required to remove the terminal block.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="75">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW08 to NW32 circuit breakers Fixed 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsHorizontal rear connection DetailDB101274DB101276Vertical rear connectionDB101278DB101277DetailDB101279DB101280DB101282DB101287View A detail.Front connectionDetailDB101283DB101284DB101288Top connectionDB101286Bottom connectionView A detail.Note: recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW08 to NW32 circuit breakers Fixed 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsHorizontal rear connection DetailDB101274DB101276Vertical rear connectionDB101278DB101277DetailDB101279DB101280DB101282DB101287View A detail.Front connectionDetailDB101283DB101284DB101288Top connectionDB101286Bottom connectionView A detail.Note: recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="76">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW08 to NW32 circuit breakers Drawout 3/4-poles device0DimensionsDB101289 DB101290(*) Disconnected position.Mounting on base plate or railsMounting detailDB101291Safety clearancesDB101292Door cutoutDB101293DB101294Insulated partsA B 0 0 : datum.Metal parts0 0Energised parts0 60 (1) Without escutcheon. (2) With escutcheon. Note: X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.74DB1012]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW08 to NW32 circuit breakers Drawout 3/4-poles device0DimensionsDB101289 DB101290(*) Disconnected position.Mounting on base plate or railsMounting detailDB101291Safety clearancesDB101292Door cutoutDB101293DB101294Insulated partsA B 0 0 : datum.Metal parts0 0Energised parts0 60 (1) Without escutcheon. (2) With escutcheon. Note: X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.74DB1012]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="77">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW08 to NW32 circuit breakers Drawout 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsHorizontal rear connection DetailDB101296DB101297Vertical rear connectionDB101278DB101298DetailDB101300DB101301DB101282DB101307View A detail.Front connectionDetailDB101303DB101304DB101308Top connectionDB101306Bottom connectionView A detail. Note: recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW08 to NW32 circuit breakers Drawout 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsHorizontal rear connection DetailDB101296DB101297Vertical rear connectionDB101278DB101298DetailDB101300DB101301DB101282DB101307View A detail.Front connectionDetailDB101303DB101304DB101308Top connectionDB101306Bottom connectionView A detail. Note: recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="78">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW40 circuit breakers Fixed 3/4-poles device0DimensionsDB101267 DB101268Mounting on base plate or railsMounting detailDB101269Safety clearancesDB101270Door cutoutDB101271DB101272Insulated partsA B 0 0 : datum.Metal parts0 0Energised parts100 60DB101273(1) Without escutcheon. (2) With escutcheon. Note: X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device. A(*) An overhead clearance of 110 mm is required to remove the arc chutes. An overhead clearance of 20 mm is required to remove the terminal block.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW40 circuit breakers Fixed 3/4-poles device0DimensionsDB101267 DB101268Mounting on base plate or railsMounting detailDB101269Safety clearancesDB101270Door cutoutDB101271DB101272Insulated partsA B 0 0 : datum.Metal parts0 0Energised parts100 60DB101273(1) Without escutcheon. (2) With escutcheon. Note: X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device. A(*) An overhead clearance of 110 mm is required to remove the arc chutes. An overhead clearance of 20 mm is required to remove the terminal block.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="79">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW40 circuit breakers Fixed 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsHorizontal rear connectionDB101309DB101276DetailDB101310Vertical rear connectionDB101312DB101313DetailDB101287Note: recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.DB101314DB101315DB101311]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW40 circuit breakers Fixed 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsHorizontal rear connectionDB101309DB101276DetailDB101310Vertical rear connectionDB101312DB101313DetailDB101287Note: recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.DB101314DB101315DB101311]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="80">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW40 circuit breakers Drawout 3/4-poles device0DimensionsDB101289 DB101290(*) Disconnected position.Mounting on base plate or railsMounting detailDB101291Safety clearancesDB101292Door cutoutDB101293DB101294Insulated partsA B 0 0 : datum.Metal parts0 0Energised parts0 60 (1) Without escutcheon. (2) With escutcheon. Note: X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device. The safety clearances take into account the space required to remove the arc chutes.78DB1012]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW40 circuit breakers Drawout 3/4-poles device0DimensionsDB101289 DB101290(*) Disconnected position.Mounting on base plate or railsMounting detailDB101291Safety clearancesDB101292Door cutoutDB101293DB101294Insulated partsA B 0 0 : datum.Metal parts0 0Energised parts0 60 (1) Without escutcheon. (2) With escutcheon. Note: X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device. The safety clearances take into account the space required to remove the arc chutes.78DB1012]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="81">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW40 circuit breakers Drawout 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsHorizontal rear connectionDB101316DB101297DetailDB101317Vertical rear connectionDB101318DB101319DB101314DB101315DB101311View A detail.DetailNote: recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.DB101307]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW40 circuit breakers Drawout 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsHorizontal rear connectionDB101316DB101297DetailDB101317Vertical rear connectionDB101318DB101319DB101314DB101315DB101311View A detail.DetailNote: recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.DB101307]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="82">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW40b to NW63 circuit breakers Fixed 3/4-poles device0DimensionsDB101267 DB101320Mounting on base plate or railsMounting detailDB101269Safety clearancesDB101321Door cutoutDB101271DB101323Insulated partsA B 0 0 : datum.Metal parts0 0Energised parts100 60(1) Without escutcheon. (2) With escutcheon. Note: X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device. A(*) An overhead clearance of 110 mm is required to remove the arc chutes. An overhead clearance of 20 mm is required to remove the terminal block.80DB1013]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW40b to NW63 circuit breakers Fixed 3/4-poles device0DimensionsDB101267 DB101320Mounting on base plate or railsMounting detailDB101269Safety clearancesDB101321Door cutoutDB101271DB101323Insulated partsA B 0 0 : datum.Metal parts0 0Energised parts100 60(1) Without escutcheon. (2) With escutcheon. Note: X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device. A(*) An overhead clearance of 110 mm is required to remove the arc chutes. An overhead clearance of 20 mm is required to remove the terminal block.80DB1013]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="83">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW40b to NW63 circuit breakers Fixed 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsHorizontal rear connection (NW40b - NW50) DetailDB101332DB101324Vertical rear connection (NW40b - NW50)DB101278DB101325DetailDB101327DB101328DB101282DB101333View A detail.Vertical rear connection (NW63)DetailDB101330DB101331Note: recommended connection screws: M10 s/s class A4 80. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.DB101314DB101333View A detail.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW40b to NW63 circuit breakers Fixed 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsHorizontal rear connection (NW40b - NW50) DetailDB101332DB101324Vertical rear connection (NW40b - NW50)DB101278DB101325DetailDB101327DB101328DB101282DB101333View A detail.Vertical rear connection (NW63)DetailDB101330DB101331Note: recommended connection screws: M10 s/s class A4 80. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.DB101314DB101333View A detail.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="84">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW40b to NW63 circuit breakers Drawout 3/4-poles device0DimensionsDB101334 DB101335(*) Disconnected position.Mounting on base plate or railsMounting detailDB101336Safety clearancesDB101337Door cutoutDB101293DB101338Insulated partsA B 0 0Metal parts0 0Energised parts0 60(1) Without escutcheon. (2) With escutcheon. Note: X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device. : datum.82DB1013]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW40b to NW63 circuit breakers Drawout 3/4-poles device0DimensionsDB101334 DB101335(*) Disconnected position.Mounting on base plate or railsMounting detailDB101336Safety clearancesDB101337Door cutoutDB101293DB101338Insulated partsA B 0 0Metal parts0 0Energised parts0 60(1) Without escutcheon. (2) With escutcheon. Note: X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device. : datum.82DB1013]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="85">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW40b to NW63 circuit breakers Drawout 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsHorizontal rear connection (NW40b - NW50) DetailDB101341DB101342Vertical rear connection (NW40b - NW50)DB101278DB101343DetailDB101344DB101345DB101282DB101349View A detail.Vertical rear connection (NW63)DetailDB101347DB101348DB101314DB101349View A detail. Note: recommended connection screws: M10 s/s class A4 80. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNW40b to NW63 circuit breakers Drawout 3/4-poles device0ConnectionsHorizontal rear connection (NW40b - NW50) DetailDB101341DB101342Vertical rear connection (NW40b - NW50)DB101278DB101343DetailDB101344DB101345DB101282DB101349View A detail.Vertical rear connection (NW63)DetailDB101347DB101348DB101314DB101349View A detail. Note: recommended connection screws: M10 s/s class A4 80. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="86">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT/NW accessories0Mounting on backplate with special brackets (Masterpact NW08 to 32 fixed)DB101350 DB101351Disconnectable front-connection adapter (Masterpact NW08 to 32 fixed)Horizontal rear connection DetailDB101352DB101353DB101278DB101354View A detail.Vertical rear connectionDetailDB101355DB101356DB101282DB101358Note: recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer. : datum.View A detail.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT/NW accessories0Mounting on backplate with special brackets (Masterpact NW08 to 32 fixed)DB101350 DB101351Disconnectable front-connection adapter (Masterpact NW08 to 32 fixed)Horizontal rear connection DetailDB101352DB101353DB101278DB101354View A detail.Vertical rear connectionDetailDB101355DB101356DB101282DB101358Note: recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer. : datum.View A detail.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="87">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT/NW accessories0Rear panel cutout (drawout devices)NW08 to NW40 Rear viewDB101359 DB101360NW40b to NW63 Rear viewDB101361 DB101362EscutcheonMasterpact NT Fixed deviceDB101363 DB101364Drawout deviceMasterpact NW Fixed deviceDB101365 DB101366Drawout device: datum.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT/NW accessories0Rear panel cutout (drawout devices)NW08 to NW40 Rear viewDB101359 DB101360NW40b to NW63 Rear viewDB101361 DB101362EscutcheonMasterpact NT Fixed deviceDB101363 DB101364Drawout deviceMasterpact NW Fixed deviceDB101365 DB101366Drawout device: datum.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="88">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT/NW external modules0Connection of auxilary wiring to terminal blockDB101367 DB101368One conductor only per connection point.M6C relay moduleDB102199 DB102196357911131517192123 25M6c9 57 S1 S3 2 4 11 S2 S4 24V S5 25 21 23 17 19 . com 0V S6S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S61322 24 18 20 14 16 10 12 68External power supply module (AD)DB102077 DB102076Battery module (BAT)MountingDB10137386DB1013]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT/NW external modules0Connection of auxilary wiring to terminal blockDB101367 DB101368One conductor only per connection point.M6C relay moduleDB102199 DB102196357911131517192123 25M6c9 57 S1 S3 2 4 11 S2 S4 24V S5 25 21 23 17 19 . com 0V S6S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S61322 24 18 20 14 16 10 12 68External power supply module (AD)DB102077 DB102076Battery module (BAT)MountingDB10137386DB1013]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="89">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT/NW external modules0Delay unit for MN releaseMNRDB101375DB1013763456S 36 0.5 MN UVR 30 V 100/1C AC/D 11.5 3 MN r de R UV dateu Retardelay for Time 10 123&amp;quot;Chassis&amp;quot; communication moduleModBUS BatiBUSDB101377External sensor for source ground return (SGR) protectionSensor &amp;quot;MGDF summer&amp;quot; moduleDB101379DB101380DB101378]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT/NW external modules0Delay unit for MN releaseMNRDB101375DB1013763456S 36 0.5 MN UVR 30 V 100/1C AC/D 11.5 3 MN r de R UV dateu Retardelay for Time 10 123&amp;quot;Chassis&amp;quot; communication moduleModBUS BatiBUSDB101377External sensor for source ground return (SGR) protectionSensor &amp;quot;MGDF summer&amp;quot; moduleDB101379DB101380DB101378]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="90">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT/NW external modules0External sensor for external neutralDimensions 400/1600 A (NT06 to NT16)DB101381 DB101382400/2000 A (NW08 to NW20)High: 137 mm.High: 162 mm.1000/4000 A (NW025 to NW40)DB101383 DB1021902000/6300 A (NW40b to NW63)High: 162 mm.High: 168 mm.Installation 400/1600 A (NT06 to NT16)400/2000 A (NW08 to NW20)DB1013851000/4000 A (NW025 to NW40)DB1013862000/6300 A (NW40b to NW63)DB10138788DB1013]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT/NW external modules0External sensor for external neutralDimensions 400/1600 A (NT06 to NT16)DB101381 DB101382400/2000 A (NW08 to NW20)High: 137 mm.High: 162 mm.1000/4000 A (NW025 to NW40)DB101383 DB1021902000/6300 A (NW40b to NW63)High: 162 mm.High: 168 mm.Installation 400/1600 A (NT06 to NT16)400/2000 A (NW08 to NW20)DB1013851000/4000 A (NW025 to NW40)DB1013862000/6300 A (NW40b to NW63)DB10138788DB1013]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="91">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT/NW external modules0Rectangular sensor for earth leakage protection (Vigi)280 x 115 mm windowDB101389 DB101390470 x 160 mm windowDB101391 DB101392BusbarsWindow (mm) Weight (kg)I y 1600 A280 x 115 14I y 3200470 x 160 18Busbars path280 x 115 window Busbars spaced 70 mm centre-to-centre 470 x 160 window Busbars spaced 115 mm centre-to-centreM1M2M3DB1013932 bars 50 x 10. 4 bars 100 x 5.DB101394M1M2M3DB1013952 bars 100 x 5. 4 bars 125 x 5.DB101396]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT/NW external modules0Rectangular sensor for earth leakage protection (Vigi)280 x 115 mm windowDB101389 DB101390470 x 160 mm windowDB101391 DB101392BusbarsWindow (mm) Weight (kg)I y 1600 A280 x 115 14I y 3200470 x 160 18Busbars path280 x 115 window Busbars spaced 70 mm centre-to-centre 470 x 160 window Busbars spaced 115 mm centre-to-centreM1M2M3DB1013932 bars 50 x 10. 4 bars 100 x 5.DB101394M1M2M3DB1013952 bars 100 x 5. 4 bars 125 x 5.DB101396]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="92">
		<raw><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT/NW external modules0Installation and connection for Digipact DMB300Dimensions and front-panel cut-outDB101397(*) With Digipact wiring system.Installation and connection for Digipact DMC300Dimensions and front-panel cut-outDB101398(*) With Digipact Modbus wiring system.90DB1013]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Dimensions and connectionNT/NW external modules0Installation and connection for Digipact DMB300Dimensions and front-panel cut-outDB101397(*) With Digipact wiring system.Installation and connection for Digipact DMC300Dimensions and front-panel cut-outDB101398(*) With Digipact Modbus wiring system.90DB1013]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="93">
		<raw><![CDATA[]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="94">
		<raw><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: b complete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochures… b selection guides from the e-catalog. b product discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contacts…Training allows you to acquire the Merlin Gerin expertise (installation design, work with power on, etc.) for increased efficiency and a guarantee of improved customer service. The training catalogue includes beginner’s courses in electrical distribution, knowledge of MV and LV switchgear, operation and maintenance of installations, design of LV installations to give but a few examples.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: b complete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochures… b selection guides from the e-catalog. b product discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contacts…Training allows you to acquire the Merlin Gerin expertise (installation design, work with power on, etc.) for increased efficiency and a guarantee of improved customer service. The training catalogue includes beginner’s courses in electrical distribution, knowledge of MV and LV switchgear, operation and maintenance of installations, design of LV installations to give but a few examples.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="95">
		<raw><![CDATA[MasterpactElectrical diagramsPresentation Functions and characteristics Dimensions and connection6 13 63Masterpact NT06 to NT16Fixed and drawout devices9494Masterpact NW08 to NW63Fixed and drawout devices9696Masterpact NT and NWCommunications option 24 V DC external power supply Earth-fault and earth-leakage protection Neutral protection Zone selective interlocking Installation recommendations Additional characteristics Catalogue numbers and order form9898100 103 127 133]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[MasterpactElectrical diagramsPresentation Functions and characteristics Dimensions and connection6 13 63Masterpact NT06 to NT16Fixed and drawout devices9494Masterpact NW08 to NW63Fixed and drawout devices9696Masterpact NT and NWCommunications option 24 V DC external power supply Earth-fault and earth-leakage protection Neutral protection Zone selective interlocking Installation recommendations Additional characteristics Catalogue numbers and order form9898100 103 127 133]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="96">
		<raw><![CDATA[Electrical diagramsMasterpact NT06 to NT16 Fixed and drawout devices0The diagram is shown with circuits deenergised, all devices open, connected and charged and relays in normal position.PowerDB101401Control unitRemote operationControl unitTerminal block marking Com UC1 UC2 UC3F2+ VN F1 –Remote operationUC4V3 V2 V1/ M2C / M6C/ / / 484 474 471 / / / Q3 Q2 Q1SDE2 /184 182 181 / /ResK2SDE184 82MND2/ MX2/ C12MX1C2 C3XFA2 A3 A1PF254 252 251MCHB2 B3 B1E5 E6 Z5 M1 M2 M3 E3 E4 Z3 E1 E2 Z1 Z4 Z2 T3 T1 T4 T2K181D1/C11C1Ab bPb bHb bControl unit Com : E1-E6 communication UC1 : Z1-Z5 zone selective interlocking Z1 = ZSI OUT SOURCE Z2 = ZSI OUT ; Z3 = ZSI IN SOURCE Z4 = ZSI IN ST (short time) Z5 = ZSI IN GF (earth fault) M1 = Vigi module input (Micrologic 7) UC2 : T1, T2, T3, T4 = external neutral M2, M3 = Vigi module input (Micrologic 7)Remote operation SDE2 : fault-trip indication contact or Res : remote reset SDE1 : fault-trip indication contact (supplied as standard) MN : undervoltage release or MX2 : shunt release MX1 : shunt release (standard or communicating) closing release (standard or communicating) ready-to-close contactb b b bb b b b bb b b b bUC3 : F2+, F1– external 24 V DC power supply XF : VN external voltage connector (must be connected to the neutral with a 3P circuit breaker) PF : UC4 : External Voltage Connector (PTE option)orb bb bMCH : electric motorNote: when communicating MX or XF releases are used, the third wire (C3,A3) must be connected even if the communication module is not installed.M2C : 2 programmable contacts (external relay) ext. 24 V DC power supply required.orbbM6C : 6 programmable contacts to be connected to the external module M6C) ext. 24 V DC power supply required.A : digital ammeter. P : A + power meter + additional protection. H : P + harmonics.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Electrical diagramsMasterpact NT06 to NT16 Fixed and drawout devices0The diagram is shown with circuits deenergised, all devices open, connected and charged and relays in normal position.PowerDB101401Control unitRemote operationControl unitTerminal block marking Com UC1 UC2 UC3F2+ VN F1 –Remote operationUC4V3 V2 V1/ M2C / M6C/ / / 484 474 471 / / / Q3 Q2 Q1SDE2 /184 182 181 / /ResK2SDE184 82MND2/ MX2/ C12MX1C2 C3XFA2 A3 A1PF254 252 251MCHB2 B3 B1E5 E6 Z5 M1 M2 M3 E3 E4 Z3 E1 E2 Z1 Z4 Z2 T3 T1 T4 T2K181D1/C11C1Ab bPb bHb bControl unit Com : E1-E6 communication UC1 : Z1-Z5 zone selective interlocking Z1 = ZSI OUT SOURCE Z2 = ZSI OUT ; Z3 = ZSI IN SOURCE Z4 = ZSI IN ST (short time) Z5 = ZSI IN GF (earth fault) M1 = Vigi module input (Micrologic 7) UC2 : T1, T2, T3, T4 = external neutral M2, M3 = Vigi module input (Micrologic 7)Remote operation SDE2 : fault-trip indication contact or Res : remote reset SDE1 : fault-trip indication contact (supplied as standard) MN : undervoltage release or MX2 : shunt release MX1 : shunt release (standard or communicating) closing release (standard or communicating) ready-to-close contactb b b bb b b b bb b b b bUC3 : F2+, F1– external 24 V DC power supply XF : VN external voltage connector (must be connected to the neutral with a 3P circuit breaker) PF : UC4 : External Voltage Connector (PTE option)orb bb bMCH : electric motorNote: when communicating MX or XF releases are used, the third wire (C3,A3) must be connected even if the communication module is not installed.M2C : 2 programmable contacts (external relay) ext. 24 V DC power supply required.orbbM6C : 6 programmable contacts to be connected to the external module M6C) ext. 24 V DC power supply required.A : digital ammeter. P : A + power meter + additional protection. H : P + harmonics.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="97">
		<raw><![CDATA[Electrical diagramsMasterpact NT06 to NT16 Fixed and drawout devices0Indication contactsDB101406 DB101407Chassis contactsIndication contactsOF444 42 41Chassis contactsOF114 12 11OF334 32 31OF224 22 21CD2824 822 821CD1814 812 811CE3334 332 331CE2324 322 321CE1314 312 311CT1914 912 911Indication contacts OF4 / OF3 / OF2 / OF1 : ON/OFF indication contacts.(*) Spring charging motor 440/480 V AC (380 V motor + additional resistor).Chassis contactsCD2 : disconnected CD1 position contacts CE3 : connected CE2 position CE1 contacts CT1 : test position contactsDB101408Key: drawout device only. XXX SDE1, OF1, OF2, OF3, OF4 supplied as standard. interconnected connections (only one wire per connection point).]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Electrical diagramsMasterpact NT06 to NT16 Fixed and drawout devices0Indication contactsDB101406 DB101407Chassis contactsIndication contactsOF444 42 41Chassis contactsOF114 12 11OF334 32 31OF224 22 21CD2824 822 821CD1814 812 811CE3334 332 331CE2324 322 321CE1314 312 311CT1914 912 911Indication contacts OF4 / OF3 / OF2 / OF1 : ON/OFF indication contacts.(*) Spring charging motor 440/480 V AC (380 V motor + additional resistor).Chassis contactsCD2 : disconnected CD1 position contacts CE3 : connected CE2 position CE1 contacts CT1 : test position contactsDB101408Key: drawout device only. XXX SDE1, OF1, OF2, OF3, OF4 supplied as standard. interconnected connections (only one wire per connection point).]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="98">
		<raw><![CDATA[Electrical diagramsMasterpact NW08 to NW63 Fixed and drawout devices0The diagram is shown with circuits deenergised, all devices open, connected and charged and relays in normal position.PowerDB101401Control unitRemote operationControl unitTerminal block marking ComE5 E6 E3 E4 E1 E2Remote operationUC2 UC3F2+ VN F1 –UC1UC4V3 V2 V1M2C / M6C484 474 471 / / / Q3 Q2 Q1SDE2 /184 182 181 / /ResK2SDE184 82MND2/ MX2/ C12MX1C2 C3XFA2 A3 A1PF254 252 251MCHB2 B3 B1Z5 M1 M2 M3 Z3 Z1 Z4 Z2 T3 T1 T4 T2K181D1/C11C1Ab bPb bHb bControl unit Com : E1-E6 communication UC1 : Z1-Z5 zone selective interlocking Z1 = ZSI OUT SOURCE Z2 = ZSI OUT ; Z3 = ZSI IN SOURCE Z4 = ZSI IN ST (short time) Z5 = ZSI IN GF (earth fault) M1 = Vigi module input (Micrologic 7) UC2 : T1, T2, T3, T4 = external neutral M2, M3 = Vigi module input (Micrologic 7)Remote operation SDE2 : fault-trip indication contact or Res : remote reset SDE1 : fault-trip indication contact (supplied as standard) MN : undervoltage release or MX2 : shunt release MX1 : shunt release (standard or communicating) closing release (standard or communicating) ready-to-close contactb b b bb b b b bb b b b bUC3 : F2+, F1– external 24 V DC power supply XF : VN external voltage connector (must be connected to the neutral with a 3P circuit breaker) PF : UC4 : External Voltage Connector (PTE option) M2C : 2 programmable contacts (internal relay) ext. 24 V DC power supply requiredorb bb bMCH : electric motorNote: when communicating MX or XF releases are used, the third wire (C3,A3) must be connected even if the communication module is not installed.bbM6C : 6 programmable contacts (to be connected to the external module M6C) ext. 24 V DC power supply requiredA : digital ammeter. P : A + power meter + additional protection. H : P + harmonics.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Electrical diagramsMasterpact NW08 to NW63 Fixed and drawout devices0The diagram is shown with circuits deenergised, all devices open, connected and charged and relays in normal position.PowerDB101401Control unitRemote operationControl unitTerminal block marking ComE5 E6 E3 E4 E1 E2Remote operationUC2 UC3F2+ VN F1 –UC1UC4V3 V2 V1M2C / M6C484 474 471 / / / Q3 Q2 Q1SDE2 /184 182 181 / /ResK2SDE184 82MND2/ MX2/ C12MX1C2 C3XFA2 A3 A1PF254 252 251MCHB2 B3 B1Z5 M1 M2 M3 Z3 Z1 Z4 Z2 T3 T1 T4 T2K181D1/C11C1Ab bPb bHb bControl unit Com : E1-E6 communication UC1 : Z1-Z5 zone selective interlocking Z1 = ZSI OUT SOURCE Z2 = ZSI OUT ; Z3 = ZSI IN SOURCE Z4 = ZSI IN ST (short time) Z5 = ZSI IN GF (earth fault) M1 = Vigi module input (Micrologic 7) UC2 : T1, T2, T3, T4 = external neutral M2, M3 = Vigi module input (Micrologic 7)Remote operation SDE2 : fault-trip indication contact or Res : remote reset SDE1 : fault-trip indication contact (supplied as standard) MN : undervoltage release or MX2 : shunt release MX1 : shunt release (standard or communicating) closing release (standard or communicating) ready-to-close contactb b b bb b b b bb b b b bUC3 : F2+, F1– external 24 V DC power supply XF : VN external voltage connector (must be connected to the neutral with a 3P circuit breaker) PF : UC4 : External Voltage Connector (PTE option) M2C : 2 programmable contacts (internal relay) ext. 24 V DC power supply requiredorb bb bMCH : electric motorNote: when communicating MX or XF releases are used, the third wire (C3,A3) must be connected even if the communication module is not installed.bbM6C : 6 programmable contacts (to be connected to the external module M6C) ext. 24 V DC power supply requiredA : digital ammeter. P : A + power meter + additional protection. H : P + harmonics.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="99">
		<raw><![CDATA[Electrical diagramsMasterpact NW08 to NW63 Fixed and drawout devices0Indication contactsDB101409Chassis contactsIndication contactsOF4 44 42 41 OF3 34 32 31 OF2 24 22 21 OF1 14 12 11 OF24 OF23 OF22 OF21 OF14 OF13 OF12 OF11 244 242 241 234 232 231 224 222 221 214 212 211 144 142 141 134 132 131 124 122 121 114 112 111Chassis contactsCD3 834 832 831 CE6 364 362 361 CD2 824 822 821 CD1 814 812 811 CE4 344 342 341 CE3 334 332 331 CE2 324 322 321 CE1 314 312 311 CT3 934 932 931 CE9 394 392 391 CT2 924 922 921 CT1 914 912 911 CE7 374 372 371orororororororororCE5 354 352 351orCE8 384 382 381EF24 EF23 EF22 EF21 EF14 EF13 EF12 EF11 248 246 245 238 236 235 228 226 225 218 216 215 148 146 145 138 136 135 128 126 125 118 116 115Indication contactsOF4 : OF3 OF2 OF1 ON/OFF indication contacts OF24 or EF24 OF23 or EF23 OF22 or EF22 OF21 or EF21 OF14 or EF14 OF13 or EF13 OF12 or EF12 OF11 or EF11 Combined &amp;quot;connected-deconnected&amp;quot; indication contactsChassis contactsCD3 CD2 CD1 or CE6 CE5 CE4 disconnected CE3 position CE2 contacts CE1 connected position contacts CT3 CT2 CT1 or CE9 CE8 CE7 or CD6 CD5 CD4 test position contactsconnected position contactsconnected position contacts disconnected position contactsKey: drawout device only. XXX SDE1, OF1, OF2, OF3, OF4 supplied as standard. interconnected connections (only one wire per connection point).]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Electrical diagramsMasterpact NW08 to NW63 Fixed and drawout devices0Indication contactsDB101409Chassis contactsIndication contactsOF4 44 42 41 OF3 34 32 31 OF2 24 22 21 OF1 14 12 11 OF24 OF23 OF22 OF21 OF14 OF13 OF12 OF11 244 242 241 234 232 231 224 222 221 214 212 211 144 142 141 134 132 131 124 122 121 114 112 111Chassis contactsCD3 834 832 831 CE6 364 362 361 CD2 824 822 821 CD1 814 812 811 CE4 344 342 341 CE3 334 332 331 CE2 324 322 321 CE1 314 312 311 CT3 934 932 931 CE9 394 392 391 CT2 924 922 921 CT1 914 912 911 CE7 374 372 371orororororororororCE5 354 352 351orCE8 384 382 381EF24 EF23 EF22 EF21 EF14 EF13 EF12 EF11 248 246 245 238 236 235 228 226 225 218 216 215 148 146 145 138 136 135 128 126 125 118 116 115Indication contactsOF4 : OF3 OF2 OF1 ON/OFF indication contacts OF24 or EF24 OF23 or EF23 OF22 or EF22 OF21 or EF21 OF14 or EF14 OF13 or EF13 OF12 or EF12 OF11 or EF11 Combined &amp;quot;connected-deconnected&amp;quot; indication contactsChassis contactsCD3 CD2 CD1 or CE6 CE5 CE4 disconnected CE3 position CE2 contacts CE1 connected position contacts CT3 CT2 CT1 or CE9 CE8 CE7 or CD6 CD5 CD4 test position contactsconnected position contactsconnected position contacts disconnected position contactsKey: drawout device only. XXX SDE1, OF1, OF2, OF3, OF4 supplied as standard. interconnected connections (only one wire per connection point).]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="100">
		<raw><![CDATA[Electrical diagramsMasterpact NT and NW Communications option 24 V DC external power supply0Connection of the communications optionDB101417None of the control-unit protection functions require an auxiliary source. However, the 24 V DC external power-supply (AD module) is required for certain operating configurations as indicated in the table below. Circuit breaker Closed Open Voltage measurement inputs Powered Powered Not poweredM2C, M6C programmable contacts option Protection function Display function Time-stamping function Circuit-breaker status indications and control via communications bus Identification, settings, operation and maintenance aids via communications bus Yes No No (3) No No No (3) Yes No No (4) No No No (4) Yes No Yes Yes (5) No Yes(1) Drawout device equipped with Modbus chassis COM. (2) Drawout device equipped with Digipact chassis COM. (3) Except for Micrologic A control units (if current &amp;lt; 20 % In). (4) Except for Micrologic A control units. (5) Time setting is manual and can be carried out automatically by the supervisor via the communications bus.The communications bus requires its own 24 V DC power source (E1, E2). This source is not the same as the 24 V DC external power-supply module (F1-, F2+). In case of using the 24 V DC external power supply (AD module), maximum cable length between 24 V DC (G1, G2) and the control unit (F1-, F2+) must not exceed 10 meters. The BAT battery module, mounted in series upstream of the AD module, ensures an uninterrupted supply of power if the AD module power supply fails. The voltage measurement inputs are standard equipment on the downstream connectors of the circuit breaker. External connections are possible using the PTE external voltage measurement input option. With this option, the internal voltage measurement inputs are disconnected and terminals VN, V1, V2, V3 are connected only to the control unit (Micrologic P and H only). The PTE option is required for voltages less than 220 V and greater than 690 V (in which case a voltage transformer is compulsory). For three-pole devices, the system is supplied with terminal VN connected only to the control unit (Micrologic P and H). When the PTE option is implemented, the voltage measurement input must be protected against short-circuits. Installed as close as possible to the busbars, this protection function is ensured by a P25M circuit breaker (1 A rating) with an auxiliary contact (cat. no. 21104 and 21117). This voltage measurement input is reserved exclusively for the control unit and must not ever be used to supply other circuits outside the switchboard.]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Electrical diagramsMasterpact NT and NW Communications option 24 V DC external power supply0Connection of the communications optionDB101417None of the control-unit protection functions require an auxiliary source. However, the 24 V DC external power-supply (AD module) is required for certain operating configurations as indicated in the table below. Circuit breaker Closed Open Voltage measurement inputs Powered Powered Not poweredM2C, M6C programmable contacts option Protection function Display function Time-stamping function Circuit-breaker status indications and control via communications bus Identification, settings, operation and maintenance aids via communications bus Yes No No (3) No No No (3) Yes No No (4) No No No (4) Yes No Yes Yes (5) No Yes(1) Drawout device equipped with Modbus chassis COM. (2) Drawout device equipped with Digipact chassis COM. (3) Except for Micrologic A control units (if current &amp;lt; 20 % In). (4) Except for Micrologic A control units. (5) Time setting is manual and can be carried out automatically by the supervisor via the communications bus.The communications bus requires its own 24 V DC power source (E1, E2). This source is not the same as the 24 V DC external power-supply module (F1-, F2+). In case of using the 24 V DC external power supply (AD module), maximum cable length between 24 V DC (G1, G2) and the control unit (F1-, F2+) must not exceed 10 meters. The BAT battery module, mounted in series upstream of the AD module, ensures an uninterrupted supply of power if the AD module power supply fails. The voltage measurement inputs are standard equipment on the downstream connectors of the circuit breaker. External connections are possible using the PTE external voltage measurement input option. With this option, the internal voltage measurement inputs are disconnected and terminals VN, V1, V2, V3 are connected only to the control unit (Micrologic P and H only). The PTE option is required for voltages less than 220 V and greater than 690 V (in which case a voltage transformer is compulsory). For three-pole devices, the system is supplied with terminal VN connected only to the control unit (Micrologic P and H). When the PTE option is implemented, the voltage measurement input must be protected against short-circuits. Installed as close as possible to the busbars, this protection function is ensured by a P25M circuit breaker (1 A rating) with an auxiliary contact (cat. no. 21104 and 21117). This voltage measurement input is reserved exclusively for the control unit and must not ever be used to supply other circuits outside the switchboard.]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="101">
		<raw><![CDATA[Electrical diagramsMasterpact NT and NW Communications option 24 V DC external power supply0Examples using the COM communications option Switchboard display unitThis architecture provides remote display of the variables managed by Micrologic control units equipped with the eco COM Modbus module. b I (Micrologic A) b I, U, P, E (Micrologic P) b I, U, P, E, THD (Micrologic H) No programming is required. For Micrologic A control unit (if current &amp;lt; 20 % In), it is recommended to use the 24 V DC external power supply (AD module).DB101418Communicating switchboardThis configuration provides remote display and control of Masterpacts equipped with the Modbus or Digipact COM module. The Digipact bus can be combined with the Modbus bus.DB101419]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Electrical diagramsMasterpact NT and NW Communications option 24 V DC external power supply0Examples using the COM communications option Switchboard display unitThis architecture provides remote display of the variables managed by Micrologic control units equipped with the eco COM Modbus module. b I (Micrologic A) b I, U, P, E (Micrologic P) b I, U, P, E, THD (Micrologic H) No programming is required. For Micrologic A control unit (if current &amp;lt; 20 % In), it is recommended to use the 24 V DC external power supply (AD module).DB101418Communicating switchboardThis configuration provides remote display and control of Masterpacts equipped with the Modbus or Digipact COM module. The Digipact bus can be combined with the Modbus bus.DB101419]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="102">
		<raw><![CDATA[Electrical diagramsMasterpact NT and NW Earth-fault and earth-leakage protection Neutral protection Zone selective interlocking0External sensor (CT) for residual earth-fault protectionConnection of current-transformer secondary circuit for external neutral Masterpact equipped with a Micrologic 6 A/P/H: b shielded cable with 2 twisted pairs b T1 twisted with T2 b T3 twisted with T4 b shielding connected to GND on one end only b maximum length 10 meters b cable cross-sectional area 0.4 to 1.5 mm2 b recommended cable: Belden 9552 or equivalent. If supply is via the top, follow the shematics. If supply is via the bottom, control wiring is identical; for the power wiring, H1 is connected to the source side, H2 to the load side. For four-pole versions, for residual earth-fault protection, the current transformer for the external neutral is not necessary. If the 2000/6300 current transformer is used: b signals T1 and T2 must be wired in series b signals T3 and T4 must be wired in parallel. Connection for signal VN is required only for power measurements (3 Ø, 4 wires, 4CTs).DB101413 DB102191External transformer for source ground return (SGR) earth-fault protectionConnection of the secondary circuit Masterpact equipped with a Micrologic 6 A/P/H: b unshielded cable with 1 twisted pair b maximum length 150 meters b cable cross-sectional area 0.4 to 1.5 mm2 b terminals 5 and 6 may not be used at the same time b use terminal 5 for NW08 to 40 b use terminal 6 for NW40b to 63 b recommended cable: Belden 9409 or equivalent.1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Electrical diagramsMasterpact NT and NW Earth-fault and earth-leakage protection Neutral protection Zone selective interlocking0External sensor (CT) for residual earth-fault protectionConnection of current-transformer secondary circuit for external neutral Masterpact equipped with a Micrologic 6 A/P/H: b shielded cable with 2 twisted pairs b T1 twisted with T2 b T3 twisted with T4 b shielding connected to GND on one end only b maximum length 10 meters b cable cross-sectional area 0.4 to 1.5 mm2 b recommended cable: Belden 9552 or equivalent. If supply is via the top, follow the shematics. If supply is via the bottom, control wiring is identical; for the power wiring, H1 is connected to the source side, H2 to the load side. For four-pole versions, for residual earth-fault protection, the current transformer for the external neutral is not necessary. If the 2000/6300 current transformer is used: b signals T1 and T2 must be wired in series b signals T3 and T4 must be wired in parallel. Connection for signal VN is required only for power measurements (3 Ø, 4 wires, 4CTs).DB101413 DB102191External transformer for source ground return (SGR) earth-fault protectionConnection of the secondary circuit Masterpact equipped with a Micrologic 6 A/P/H: b unshielded cable with 1 twisted pair b maximum length 150 meters b cable cross-sectional area 0.4 to 1.5 mm2 b terminals 5 and 6 may not be used at the same time b use terminal 5 for NW08 to 40 b use terminal 6 for NW40b to 63 b recommended cable: Belden 9409 or equivalent.1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="103">
		<raw><![CDATA[Electrical diagramsMasterpact NT and NW Earth-fault and earth-leakage protection Neutral protection Zone selective interlocking0Earth-leakage protectionDB101415 DB101420Connection of the rectangular-sensor secondary circuit Use the cable shipped with the rectangular sensor.Neutral protectionb three pole circuit breaker: v Masterpact equipped with Micrologic P or H v the current transformer for external neutral is necessary (the wiring diagram is identical to the one used for the residual earth-fault protection) b four pole circuit breaker: v Masterpact equipped with Micrologic A, P or H v the current transformer for external neutral is not necessary.Zone selective interlockingZone-selective interlocking is used to reduce the electrodynamic forces exerted on the installation by shortening the time required to clear faults, while maintaining time discrimination between the various devices. A pilot wire interconnects a number of circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic A/P/H control units, as illustrated in the diagram above. The control unit detecting a fault sends a signal upstream and checks for a signal arriving from downstream. If there is a signal from downstream, the circuit breaker remains closed for the full duration of its tripping delay. If there is no signal from downstream, the circuit breaker opens immediately, regardless of the tripping-delay setting. Fault 1. Only circuit breaker A detects the fault. Because it receives no signal from downstream, it opens immediately, regardless of its tripping delay set to 0.3. Fault 2. Circuit breakers A and B detect the fault. Circuit breaker A receives a signal from B and remains closed for the full duration of its tripping delay set to 0.3. Circuit breaker B does not receive a signal from downstream and opens immediately, in spite of its tripping delay set to 0.2.Note: the maximum permissible distance between two devices is 3000 m. A downstream circuit breaker can &amp;quot;control&amp;quot; up to ten upstream circuit breakers.1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Electrical diagramsMasterpact NT and NW Earth-fault and earth-leakage protection Neutral protection Zone selective interlocking0Earth-leakage protectionDB101415 DB101420Connection of the rectangular-sensor secondary circuit Use the cable shipped with the rectangular sensor.Neutral protectionb three pole circuit breaker: v Masterpact equipped with Micrologic P or H v the current transformer for external neutral is necessary (the wiring diagram is identical to the one used for the residual earth-fault protection) b four pole circuit breaker: v Masterpact equipped with Micrologic A, P or H v the current transformer for external neutral is not necessary.Zone selective interlockingZone-selective interlocking is used to reduce the electrodynamic forces exerted on the installation by shortening the time required to clear faults, while maintaining time discrimination between the various devices. A pilot wire interconnects a number of circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic A/P/H control units, as illustrated in the diagram above. The control unit detecting a fault sends a signal upstream and checks for a signal arriving from downstream. If there is a signal from downstream, the circuit breaker remains closed for the full duration of its tripping delay. If there is no signal from downstream, the circuit breaker opens immediately, regardless of the tripping-delay setting. Fault 1. Only circuit breaker A detects the fault. Because it receives no signal from downstream, it opens immediately, regardless of its tripping delay set to 0.3. Fault 2. Circuit breakers A and B detect the fault. Circuit breaker A receives a signal from B and remains closed for the full duration of its tripping delay set to 0.3. Circuit breaker B does not receive a signal from downstream and opens immediately, in spite of its tripping delay set to 0.2.Note: the maximum permissible distance between two devices is 3000 m. A downstream circuit breaker can &amp;quot;control&amp;quot; up to ten upstream circuit breakers.1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="104">
		<raw><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: b complete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochures… b selection guides from the e-catalog. b product discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contacts…According to IEC 60364 This guide, part of the Guiding System, is the essential tool to &amp;quot;guide&amp;quot; you any time in your business: b design office, consultant b contractor, panelbuilder b teacher, trainer. Comprehensive and concrete information on: b all the new technical solutions b all the components of an installation from a global point of view b all the IEC standards modifications b all the fundamental electrotechnical knowledge b all the design stages, from medium to low voltage.1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: b complete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochures… b selection guides from the e-catalog. b product discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contacts…According to IEC 60364 This guide, part of the Guiding System, is the essential tool to &amp;quot;guide&amp;quot; you any time in your business: b design office, consultant b contractor, panelbuilder b teacher, trainer. Comprehensive and concrete information on: b all the new technical solutions b all the components of an installation from a global point of view b all the IEC standards modifications b all the fundamental electrotechnical knowledge b all the design stages, from medium to low voltage.1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="105">
		<raw><![CDATA[MasterpactInstallation recommendationsPresentation Functions and characteristics Dimensions and connection Electrical diagrams6 13 63 93Operating conditions Installation in switchboard Door interlock catch Control wiring Power connection Recommended busbars drillingMasterpact NT06 to NT16 Masterpact NW08 to NW63104 106 108 109 110 112112 113Busbar sizing Temperature derating Power dissipation and input / output resistance Derating in switchboards Substitution kitFixed / drawout devices 800 to 3200 A Additional characteristics Catalogue numbers and order form114 116 117 124124 127 1331]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[MasterpactInstallation recommendationsPresentation Functions and characteristics Dimensions and connection Electrical diagrams6 13 63 93Operating conditions Installation in switchboard Door interlock catch Control wiring Power connection Recommended busbars drillingMasterpact NT06 to NT16 Masterpact NW08 to NW63104 106 108 109 110 112112 113Busbar sizing Temperature derating Power dissipation and input / output resistance Derating in switchboards Substitution kitFixed / drawout devices 800 to 3200 A Additional characteristics Catalogue numbers and order form114 116 117 124124 127 1331]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="106">
		<raw><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsOperating conditions0Ambient temperatureMasterpact devices can operate under the following temperature conditions: b the electrical and mechanical characteristics are stipulated for an ambient temperature of -5 °C to +70 °C b circuit-breaker closing is guaranteed down to -35 °C. Storage conditions are as follows: b -40 to +85 °C for a Masterpact device without its control unit b -25 °C to +85 °C for the control unit.DB101422Extreme atmospheric conditionsMasterpact devices have successfully passed the tests defined by the following standards for extreme atmospheric conditions: b IEC 60068-2-1: dry cold at -55 °C b IEC 60068-2-2: dry heat at +85 °C b IEC 60068-2-30: damp heat (temperature +55 °C, relative humidity 95 %) b IEC 60068-2-52 level 2: salt mist. Masterpact devices can operate in the industrial environments defined by standard IEC 60947 (pollution degree up to 4). It is nonetheless advised to check that the devices are installed in suitably cooled switchboards without excessive dust.DB101423VibrationsMasterpact devices are guaranteed against electromagnetic or mechanical vibrations. Tests are carried out in compliance with standard IEC 60068-2-6 for the levels required by merchant-marine inspection organisations (Veritas, Lloyd’s, etc.): b 2 to 13.2 Hz: amplitude ±1 mm b 13.2 to 100 Hz: constant acceleration 0.7 g. Excessive vibration may cause tripping, breaks in connections or damage to mechanical parts.DB1014241]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsOperating conditions0Ambient temperatureMasterpact devices can operate under the following temperature conditions: b the electrical and mechanical characteristics are stipulated for an ambient temperature of -5 °C to +70 °C b circuit-breaker closing is guaranteed down to -35 °C. Storage conditions are as follows: b -40 to +85 °C for a Masterpact device without its control unit b -25 °C to +85 °C for the control unit.DB101422Extreme atmospheric conditionsMasterpact devices have successfully passed the tests defined by the following standards for extreme atmospheric conditions: b IEC 60068-2-1: dry cold at -55 °C b IEC 60068-2-2: dry heat at +85 °C b IEC 60068-2-30: damp heat (temperature +55 °C, relative humidity 95 %) b IEC 60068-2-52 level 2: salt mist. Masterpact devices can operate in the industrial environments defined by standard IEC 60947 (pollution degree up to 4). It is nonetheless advised to check that the devices are installed in suitably cooled switchboards without excessive dust.DB101423VibrationsMasterpact devices are guaranteed against electromagnetic or mechanical vibrations. Tests are carried out in compliance with standard IEC 60068-2-6 for the levels required by merchant-marine inspection organisations (Veritas, Lloyd’s, etc.): b 2 to 13.2 Hz: amplitude ±1 mm b 13.2 to 100 Hz: constant acceleration 0.7 g. Excessive vibration may cause tripping, breaks in connections or damage to mechanical parts.DB1014241]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="107">
		<raw><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsOperating conditions0AltitudeDB101425At altitudes higher than 2000 metres, the modifications in the ambient air (electrical resistance, cooling capacity) lower the following characteristics as follows:Altitude (m) Dielectric resistance voltage (V) Average insulation level (V) Maximum utilisation voltage (V) Average thermal current (A) at 40 °C 2000 3500 1000 690 1 x In 3000 3150 900 590 0.99 x In 4000 2500 700 520 0.96 x In 5000 2100 600 460 0.94 x InElectromagnetic disturbancesMasterpact devices are protected against: b overvoltages caused by devices that generate electromagnetic disturbances b overvoltages caused by atmospheric disturbances or by a distribution-system outage (e.g. failure of a lighting system) b devices emitting radio waves (radios, walkie-talkies, radar, etc.) b electrostatic discharges produced by users. Masterpact devices have successfully passed the electromagnetic-compatibility tests (EMC) defined by the following international standards: b IEC 60947-2, appendix F b IEC 60947-2, appendix B (trip units with earth-leakage function). The above tests guarantee that: b no nuisance tripping occurs b tripping times are respected.DB1014261]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsOperating conditions0AltitudeDB101425At altitudes higher than 2000 metres, the modifications in the ambient air (electrical resistance, cooling capacity) lower the following characteristics as follows:Altitude (m) Dielectric resistance voltage (V) Average insulation level (V) Maximum utilisation voltage (V) Average thermal current (A) at 40 °C 2000 3500 1000 690 1 x In 3000 3150 900 590 0.99 x In 4000 2500 700 520 0.96 x In 5000 2100 600 460 0.94 x InElectromagnetic disturbancesMasterpact devices are protected against: b overvoltages caused by devices that generate electromagnetic disturbances b overvoltages caused by atmospheric disturbances or by a distribution-system outage (e.g. failure of a lighting system) b devices emitting radio waves (radios, walkie-talkies, radar, etc.) b electrostatic discharges produced by users. Masterpact devices have successfully passed the electromagnetic-compatibility tests (EMC) defined by the following international standards: b IEC 60947-2, appendix F b IEC 60947-2, appendix B (trip units with earth-leakage function). The above tests guarantee that: b no nuisance tripping occurs b tripping times are respected.DB1014261]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="108">
		<raw><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsInstallation in switchboard0Possible positionsDB101427 DB101428 DB101429 DB101432Power supplyMasterpact devices can be supplied either from the top or from the bottom without reduction in performance, in order to facilitate connection when installed in a switchboard.DB101430Mounting the circuit-breakerIt is important to distribute the weight of the device uniformily over a rigid mounting surface such as rails or a base plate. This mounting plane should be perfectly flat (tolerance on support flatness: 2 mm). This eliminates any risk of deformation which could interfere with correct operation of the circuit breaker. Masterpact devices can also be mounted on a vertical plane using the special brackets.DB101431Mounting on rails.DB101433Mounting with vertical brackets.1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsInstallation in switchboard0Possible positionsDB101427 DB101428 DB101429 DB101432Power supplyMasterpact devices can be supplied either from the top or from the bottom without reduction in performance, in order to facilitate connection when installed in a switchboard.DB101430Mounting the circuit-breakerIt is important to distribute the weight of the device uniformily over a rigid mounting surface such as rails or a base plate. This mounting plane should be perfectly flat (tolerance on support flatness: 2 mm). This eliminates any risk of deformation which could interfere with correct operation of the circuit breaker. Masterpact devices can also be mounted on a vertical plane using the special brackets.DB101431Mounting on rails.DB101433Mounting with vertical brackets.1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="109">
		<raw><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsInstallation in switchboard0PartitionsSufficient openings must be provided in partitions to ensure good air circulation around the circuit breaker; Any partition between upstream and downstream connections of the device must be made of nonmagnetic material. For high currents, of 2500 A and upwards, the metal supports or barriers in the immediate vicinity of a conductor must be made of non-magnetic material A. Metal barriers through which a conductor passes must not form a magnetic loop.DB101434A : non magnetic material.Busbars (NT, NW)The mechanical connection must be exclude the possibility of formation of a magnetic loop around a conductor.DB101440 DB101436 DB101439Busbars (NT)For live busbars installed immediately above the circuit breaker (respecting the 100 mm safety clearance), the distance between bars must be 65 mm minimum. In a 1000 V system, the bars must be insulated.DB103879 DB101438Interphase barrierIf the insulation distance between phases is not sufficient (y 14 mm), it is advised to install phase barriers (taking into account the safety clearances). Mandatory for a Masterpact NT &amp;gt; 500 V.DB1014351]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsInstallation in switchboard0PartitionsSufficient openings must be provided in partitions to ensure good air circulation around the circuit breaker; Any partition between upstream and downstream connections of the device must be made of nonmagnetic material. For high currents, of 2500 A and upwards, the metal supports or barriers in the immediate vicinity of a conductor must be made of non-magnetic material A. Metal barriers through which a conductor passes must not form a magnetic loop.DB101434A : non magnetic material.Busbars (NT, NW)The mechanical connection must be exclude the possibility of formation of a magnetic loop around a conductor.DB101440 DB101436 DB101439Busbars (NT)For live busbars installed immediately above the circuit breaker (respecting the 100 mm safety clearance), the distance between bars must be 65 mm minimum. In a 1000 V system, the bars must be insulated.DB103879 DB101438Interphase barrierIf the insulation distance between phases is not sufficient (y 14 mm), it is advised to install phase barriers (taking into account the safety clearances). Mandatory for a Masterpact NT &amp;gt; 500 V.DB1014351]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="110">
		<raw><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsDoor interlock catch0Door interlockMounted on the right or left-hand side of the chassis, this device inhibits opening of the cubicle door when the circuit breaker is in &amp;quot;connected&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;test&amp;quot; position. It the breaker is put in the &amp;quot;connected&amp;quot; position with the door open, the door may be closed without having to disconnect the circuit breaker.DB101441YXDimensions (mm)Type NT08-16 (3P) NT08-16 (4P) NW08-40 (3P) NW08-40 (4P) NW40b-63 (3P) NW40b-63 (4P) (1) 135 205 215 330 660 775 (2) 168 168 215 215 215 21515 (1) 8 17Catch not supplied(2)5Breaker in &amp;quot;connected&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;test&amp;quot; positionDoor cannot be openedDB103819 DB102194Breaker in &amp;quot;disconnected&amp;quot; positionDoor can be openedDimensions (mm) Type (1) NT 5 NW 83(2) 23 103Cable-type door interlockThis option prevents door opening when the circuit breaker is closed and prevents circuit breaker closing when the door is open. For this, a special plate associated with a lock and a cable is mounted on the right side of the circuit breaker. With this interlock installed, the source changeover function cannot be implemented.DB101445 DB101446Note: the door interlock can either be mounted on the right side or the left side of the breaker. : datum.1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsDoor interlock catch0Door interlockMounted on the right or left-hand side of the chassis, this device inhibits opening of the cubicle door when the circuit breaker is in &amp;quot;connected&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;test&amp;quot; position. It the breaker is put in the &amp;quot;connected&amp;quot; position with the door open, the door may be closed without having to disconnect the circuit breaker.DB101441YXDimensions (mm)Type NT08-16 (3P) NT08-16 (4P) NW08-40 (3P) NW08-40 (4P) NW40b-63 (3P) NW40b-63 (4P) (1) 135 205 215 330 660 775 (2) 168 168 215 215 215 21515 (1) 8 17Catch not supplied(2)5Breaker in &amp;quot;connected&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;test&amp;quot; positionDoor cannot be openedDB103819 DB102194Breaker in &amp;quot;disconnected&amp;quot; positionDoor can be openedDimensions (mm) Type (1) NT 5 NW 83(2) 23 103Cable-type door interlockThis option prevents door opening when the circuit breaker is closed and prevents circuit breaker closing when the door is open. For this, a special plate associated with a lock and a cable is mounted on the right side of the circuit breaker. With this interlock installed, the source changeover function cannot be implemented.DB101445 DB101446Note: the door interlock can either be mounted on the right side or the left side of the breaker. : datum.1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="111">
		<raw><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsControl wiring0Wiring of voltage releasesDuring pick-up, the power consumed is approximately 150 to 200 VA. For low control voltages (12, 24, 48 V), maximum cable lengths are imposed by the voltage and the cross-sectional area of cables. Recommended maximum cable lengths (meter).12 V 24 V 2,5 mm2 1,5 mm2 2,5 mm2 MN U source 100 % – – 58 U source 85 % – – 16 MX-XF U source 100 % 21 12 115 U source 85 % 10 6 75 Note: the indicated length is that of each of the two wires. 1,5 mm2 35 10 70 44 48 V 2,5 mm2 280 75 550 350 1,5 mm2 165 45 330 21024 V DC power-supply moduleExternal 24 V DC power-supply module for Micrologic (F1-, F2+) b do not connect the positive terminal (F2+) to earth b the negative terminal (F1-) can be connected to earth, except in IT systems b a number of Micrologic control units and M6C modules can be connected to the same 24 V DC power supply (the consumption of a Micrologic control unit or an M6C module is approximately 100 mA) b do not connect any devices other than a Micrologic control unit or an M6C module b the maximum length for each conductor is ten metres. For greater distances, it is advised to twist the supply wires together b the 24 V DC supply wires must cross the power cables perpendicularly. If this is difficult, it is advised to twist the supply wires together b the technical characteristics of the external 24 V DC power-supply module for Micrologic control units are indicated on page 32 Communication bus b do not connect the positive terminal (E1) to earth b the negative terminal (E2) can be connected to earth b a number of &amp;quot;device&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;chassis&amp;quot; communication modules can be connected to the same 24 V DC power supply (the consumption of each module is approximately 30 mA) b the 24 V DC (E1, E2) power supply for the communication bus must be separate from the external 24 V DC power-supply module for Micrologic control units (F1-, F2+). E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 + A/TxB/Tx+ A’/RxB’/Rx+ - with Rx- and To create a two-wire Modbus communication bus, simply connect Tx Tx+ with Rx+. To connect a Modbus slave (Micrologic) to a Modbus master (PLC), connect: the slave Tx- to the master Rxthe slave Rx- to the master Txthe slave Tx+ to the master Rx+ the slave Rx+ to the master Tx+.RS485 Modbus Junction BlockPins 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal 0V 24 V NC B’ / Rx+ B / Tx+ 0V 24 V A’ / RxA / TxColor Black Red Blue Yellow Black Red White BrownDB1038204 Wires2 Wires1 2 3 46 7 8 91 2 3 40/IN5Termination ON OFFWiring of ZSI:It is recommended to use twisted shielded cable. The shield must be connected to earth at both ends. 1095/O]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsControl wiring0Wiring of voltage releasesDuring pick-up, the power consumed is approximately 150 to 200 VA. For low control voltages (12, 24, 48 V), maximum cable lengths are imposed by the voltage and the cross-sectional area of cables. Recommended maximum cable lengths (meter).12 V 24 V 2,5 mm2 1,5 mm2 2,5 mm2 MN U source 100 % – – 58 U source 85 % – – 16 MX-XF U source 100 % 21 12 115 U source 85 % 10 6 75 Note: the indicated length is that of each of the two wires. 1,5 mm2 35 10 70 44 48 V 2,5 mm2 280 75 550 350 1,5 mm2 165 45 330 21024 V DC power-supply moduleExternal 24 V DC power-supply module for Micrologic (F1-, F2+) b do not connect the positive terminal (F2+) to earth b the negative terminal (F1-) can be connected to earth, except in IT systems b a number of Micrologic control units and M6C modules can be connected to the same 24 V DC power supply (the consumption of a Micrologic control unit or an M6C module is approximately 100 mA) b do not connect any devices other than a Micrologic control unit or an M6C module b the maximum length for each conductor is ten metres. For greater distances, it is advised to twist the supply wires together b the 24 V DC supply wires must cross the power cables perpendicularly. If this is difficult, it is advised to twist the supply wires together b the technical characteristics of the external 24 V DC power-supply module for Micrologic control units are indicated on page 32 Communication bus b do not connect the positive terminal (E1) to earth b the negative terminal (E2) can be connected to earth b a number of &amp;quot;device&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;chassis&amp;quot; communication modules can be connected to the same 24 V DC power supply (the consumption of each module is approximately 30 mA) b the 24 V DC (E1, E2) power supply for the communication bus must be separate from the external 24 V DC power-supply module for Micrologic control units (F1-, F2+). E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 + A/TxB/Tx+ A’/RxB’/Rx+ - with Rx- and To create a two-wire Modbus communication bus, simply connect Tx Tx+ with Rx+. To connect a Modbus slave (Micrologic) to a Modbus master (PLC), connect: the slave Tx- to the master Rxthe slave Rx- to the master Txthe slave Tx+ to the master Rx+ the slave Rx+ to the master Tx+.RS485 Modbus Junction BlockPins 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal 0V 24 V NC B’ / Rx+ B / Tx+ 0V 24 V A’ / RxA / TxColor Black Red Blue Yellow Black Red White BrownDB1038204 Wires2 Wires1 2 3 46 7 8 91 2 3 40/IN5Termination ON OFFWiring of ZSI:It is recommended to use twisted shielded cable. The shield must be connected to earth at both ends. 1095/O]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="112">
		<raw><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsPower connection0Cables connectionsIf cables are used for the power connections, make sure that they do not apply excessive mechanical forces to the circuit breaker terminals. For this, make the connections as follows: b extend the circuit breaker terminals using short bars designed and installed according to the recommendations for bar-type power connections: v for a single cable, use solution B opposite v for multiple cables, use solution C opposite b in all cases, follow the general rules for connections to busbars: v position the cable lugs before inserting the bolts v the cables should firmly secured to the framework E.DB101448 DB101449Busbars connectionsThe busbars should be suitably adjusted to ensure that the connection points are positioned on the terminals before the bolts are inserted B The connections are held by the support which is solidly fixed to the framework of the switchboard, such that the circuit breaker terminals do not have to support its weight C. (This support should be placed close to the terminals).DB101451 DB101452DB101453DB101450Electrodynamic stresses The first busbar support or spacer shall be situated within a maximum distance from the connection point of the breaker (see table below). This distance must be respected so that the connection can withstand the electrodynamic stresses between phases in the event of a short circuit.Maximum distance A between busbar to circuit breaker connection and the first busbar support or spacer with respect to the value of the prospective short-circuit current. Isc (kA) Distance A (mm) 30 350 50 300 65 250 80 150 100 150 150 1501]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsPower connection0Cables connectionsIf cables are used for the power connections, make sure that they do not apply excessive mechanical forces to the circuit breaker terminals. For this, make the connections as follows: b extend the circuit breaker terminals using short bars designed and installed according to the recommendations for bar-type power connections: v for a single cable, use solution B opposite v for multiple cables, use solution C opposite b in all cases, follow the general rules for connections to busbars: v position the cable lugs before inserting the bolts v the cables should firmly secured to the framework E.DB101448 DB101449Busbars connectionsThe busbars should be suitably adjusted to ensure that the connection points are positioned on the terminals before the bolts are inserted B The connections are held by the support which is solidly fixed to the framework of the switchboard, such that the circuit breaker terminals do not have to support its weight C. (This support should be placed close to the terminals).DB101451 DB101452DB101453DB101450Electrodynamic stresses The first busbar support or spacer shall be situated within a maximum distance from the connection point of the breaker (see table below). This distance must be respected so that the connection can withstand the electrodynamic stresses between phases in the event of a short circuit.Maximum distance A between busbar to circuit breaker connection and the first busbar support or spacer with respect to the value of the prospective short-circuit current. Isc (kA) Distance A (mm) 30 350 50 300 65 250 80 150 100 150 150 1501]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="113">
		<raw><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsPower connection0ClampingCorrect clamping of busbars depends amongst other things, on the tightening torques used for the nuts and bolts. Over-tightening may have the same consequences as under-tightening. For connecting busbars (Cu ETP-NFA51-100) to the circuit breaker, the tightening torques to be used are shown in the table below. These values are for use with copper busbars and steel nuts and bolts, class 8.8. The same torques can be used with AGS-T52 quality aluminium bars (French standard NFA 02-104 or American National Standard H-35-1). ExamplesDB101455 DB101456 DB101457 DB1014541 2 3 4 5 6Terminal screw factory-tightened to 16 Nm (NW), 13 Nm (NT). Breaker terminal. Busbar. Bolt. Washer. Nut.Tightening torques Ø (mm) Ø (mm) Nominal Drilling 10 11Tightening torques (Nm) with grower or flat washers 37.5Tightening torques (Nm) with contact or corrugatec washers 50Busbar drilling ExamplesDB101458 DB101459 DB101460Isolation distanceDB101461Dimensions (mm)Ui 600 V 1000 V X min 8 mm 14 mmBusbar bending When bending busbars maintain the radius indicated below(a smaller radius would cause cracks).DB101462Dimensions (mm)e 5 10 Radius of curvature r Min 5 15 Recommended 7.5 18 to 201]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsPower connection0ClampingCorrect clamping of busbars depends amongst other things, on the tightening torques used for the nuts and bolts. Over-tightening may have the same consequences as under-tightening. For connecting busbars (Cu ETP-NFA51-100) to the circuit breaker, the tightening torques to be used are shown in the table below. These values are for use with copper busbars and steel nuts and bolts, class 8.8. The same torques can be used with AGS-T52 quality aluminium bars (French standard NFA 02-104 or American National Standard H-35-1). ExamplesDB101455 DB101456 DB101457 DB1014541 2 3 4 5 6Terminal screw factory-tightened to 16 Nm (NW), 13 Nm (NT). Breaker terminal. Busbar. Bolt. Washer. Nut.Tightening torques Ø (mm) Ø (mm) Nominal Drilling 10 11Tightening torques (Nm) with grower or flat washers 37.5Tightening torques (Nm) with contact or corrugatec washers 50Busbar drilling ExamplesDB101458 DB101459 DB101460Isolation distanceDB101461Dimensions (mm)Ui 600 V 1000 V X min 8 mm 14 mmBusbar bending When bending busbars maintain the radius indicated below(a smaller radius would cause cracks).DB101462Dimensions (mm)e 5 10 Radius of curvature r Min 5 15 Recommended 7.5 18 to 201]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="114">
		<raw><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsRecommended busbars drilling Masterpact NT06 to NT160Rear connectionDB101463 DB101463Rear connection with spreadersDB101464 DB101465Middle left or middle right spreader for 4PMiddle spreader for 3PLeft or right spreader for 4PLeft or right spreader for 3PDB101466DB101467DB101480DB101468Vertical rear connectionDB101470DB101471Front connectionDB101463 DB101463Front connection via vertical connection adaptersDB101464 DB101465Top connectionBottom connectionDB101483DB101481112DB101482DB1014]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsRecommended busbars drilling Masterpact NT06 to NT160Rear connectionDB101463 DB101463Rear connection with spreadersDB101464 DB101465Middle left or middle right spreader for 4PMiddle spreader for 3PLeft or right spreader for 4PLeft or right spreader for 3PDB101466DB101467DB101480DB101468Vertical rear connectionDB101470DB101471Front connectionDB101463 DB101463Front connection via vertical connection adaptersDB101464 DB101465Top connectionBottom connectionDB101483DB101481112DB101482DB1014]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="115">
		<raw><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsRecommended busbars drilling Masterpact NW08 to NW630Horizontal rear connection NW08 to NW32DB101463 DB101464 DB101465 DB101472NW40b to NW50DB101473DB101474Vertical rear connection NW08 to NW32, NW40b to NW50DB101476DB101477Front connection NW08 to NW32DB101463 DB101464 DB101465Top connectionBottom connectionDB101478DB101479DB1014751]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsRecommended busbars drilling Masterpact NW08 to NW630Horizontal rear connection NW08 to NW32DB101463 DB101464 DB101465 DB101472NW40b to NW50DB101473DB101474Vertical rear connection NW08 to NW32, NW40b to NW50DB101476DB101477Front connection NW08 to NW32DB101463 DB101464 DB101465Top connectionBottom connectionDB101478DB101479DB1014751]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="116">
		<raw><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsBusbar sizing0Basis of tables: b maximum permissible busbars temperature: 100 °C b Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connection b busbar material is unpainted copper.Front or rear horizontal connectionDB101484MasterpactMaximum service current400 630 800 1000 1250Ti : 40 °C No. of 5 mm thick bars2b.30 x 5 2b.40 x 5 2b.50 x 5 3b.50 x 5 3b.50 x 5 2b.80 x 5 2b.80 x 5 3b.80 x 5 3b.80 x 5 3b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 5 4b.100 x 5 4b.100 x 5 5b.100 x 5 6b.100 x 5No. of 10 mm thick barsTi : 50 °C No. of 5 mm thick barsNo. of 10 mm thick barsTi : 60 °C No. of 5 mm thick bars2b.30 x 5 2b.40 x 5 2b.50 x 5 3b.63 x 5 3b.63 x 5 3b.80 x 5 3b.80 x 5 3b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 5 4b.80 x 5 4b.100 x 5 5b.100 x 5 8b.100 x 5No. of 10 mm thick bars1b.30 x 10 1b.40 x 10 1b.63 x 10 2b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 10 2b.63 x 10 3b.50 x 10 2b.80 x 10 3b.63 x 10 2b.100 x 10 3b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 10 4b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 10NT06 NT06 NT08 ou NW08 NT10 ou NW10 NT12 ou NW121b.30 x 10 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 1b.40 x 10 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 1b.63 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 10 2b.40 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 10 2b.40 x 10 2b.80 x 5 NT16 ou NW16 1400 2b.40 x 10 2b.80 x 5 2b.50 x 10 NT16 ou NW16 1600 2b.63 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10 NW20 1800 2b.63 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10 NW20 2000 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 NW25 2200 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 NW25 2500 2b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10 NW32 2800 3b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 NW32 3000 3b.80 x 10 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 NW32 3200 3b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 NW40 3800 4b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 NW40 4000 5b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 NW50 4500 6b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 10 NW50 5000 7b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 10 With Masterpact NT, it is recommanded to use 50 mm wideness bars (see &amp;quot;Recommended busbars drilling&amp;quot;).ExampleConditions: b drawout version b horizontal busbars b Ti: 50 °C b service current: 1800 A. Solution: For Ti = 50 °C, use an NW20 which can be connected with three 80 x 5 mm bars or two 63 x 10 mm bars.Note: the values indicated in these tables have been extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test.1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsBusbar sizing0Basis of tables: b maximum permissible busbars temperature: 100 °C b Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connection b busbar material is unpainted copper.Front or rear horizontal connectionDB101484MasterpactMaximum service current400 630 800 1000 1250Ti : 40 °C No. of 5 mm thick bars2b.30 x 5 2b.40 x 5 2b.50 x 5 3b.50 x 5 3b.50 x 5 2b.80 x 5 2b.80 x 5 3b.80 x 5 3b.80 x 5 3b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 5 4b.100 x 5 4b.100 x 5 5b.100 x 5 6b.100 x 5No. of 10 mm thick barsTi : 50 °C No. of 5 mm thick barsNo. of 10 mm thick barsTi : 60 °C No. of 5 mm thick bars2b.30 x 5 2b.40 x 5 2b.50 x 5 3b.63 x 5 3b.63 x 5 3b.80 x 5 3b.80 x 5 3b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 5 4b.80 x 5 4b.100 x 5 5b.100 x 5 8b.100 x 5No. of 10 mm thick bars1b.30 x 10 1b.40 x 10 1b.63 x 10 2b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 10 2b.63 x 10 3b.50 x 10 2b.80 x 10 3b.63 x 10 2b.100 x 10 3b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 10 4b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 10NT06 NT06 NT08 ou NW08 NT10 ou NW10 NT12 ou NW121b.30 x 10 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 1b.40 x 10 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 1b.63 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 10 2b.40 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 10 2b.40 x 10 2b.80 x 5 NT16 ou NW16 1400 2b.40 x 10 2b.80 x 5 2b.50 x 10 NT16 ou NW16 1600 2b.63 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10 NW20 1800 2b.63 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10 NW20 2000 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 NW25 2200 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 NW25 2500 2b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10 NW32 2800 3b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 NW32 3000 3b.80 x 10 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 NW32 3200 3b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 NW40 3800 4b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 NW40 4000 5b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 NW50 4500 6b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 10 NW50 5000 7b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 10 With Masterpact NT, it is recommanded to use 50 mm wideness bars (see &amp;quot;Recommended busbars drilling&amp;quot;).ExampleConditions: b drawout version b horizontal busbars b Ti: 50 °C b service current: 1800 A. Solution: For Ti = 50 °C, use an NW20 which can be connected with three 80 x 5 mm bars or two 63 x 10 mm bars.Note: the values indicated in these tables have been extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test.1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="117">
		<raw><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsBusbar sizing0Basis of tables: b maximum permissible busbars temperature: 100 °C b Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connection b busbar material is unpainted copper.Rear vertical connectionDB101487MasterpactMaximum service current400 630 800 1000 1250 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2500 2800 3000 3200 3800 4000 4500 5000 5700 6300Ti : 40 °C No. of 5 mm thick bars2b.30 x 5 2b.40 x 5 2b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 5 2b.63 x 5 2b.80 x 5 3b.63 x 5 2b.80 x 5 2b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 5 4b.80 x 5 4b.100 x 5 5b.100 x 5 6b.100 x 5No. of 10 mm thick bars1b.30 x 10 1b.40 x 10 1b.50 x 10 1b.50 x 10 1b.63 x 10 1b.80 x 10 2b.50 x 10 1b.80 x 10 2b.63 x 10 2b.63 x 10 2b.80 x 10 2b.100 x 10 3b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 10Ti : 50 °C No. of 5 mm thick bars2b.30 x 5 2b.40 x 5 2b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 5 3b.50 x 5 2b.80 x 5 3b.63 x 5 2b.80 x 5 2b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 5 4b.80 x 5 4b.100 x 5 6b.100 x 5 6b.100 x 5No. of 10 mm thick bars1b.30 x 10 1b.40 x 10 1b.50 x 10 1b.50 x 10 2b.40 x 10 2b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 10 2b.63 x 10 2b.63 x 10 2b.80 x 10 2b.100 x 10 3b.100 x 10 3b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 10Ti : 60 °C No. of 5 mm thick bars2b.30 x 5 2b.40 x 5 2b.50 x 5 2b.63 x 5 3b.50 x 5 3b.63 x 5 3b.80 x 5 3b.80 x 5 3b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 5 4b.100 x 5 4b.100 x 5 5b.100 x 5No. of 10 mm thick bars1b.30 x 10 1b.40 x 10 1b.50 x 10 1b.63 x 10 2b.40 x 10 2b.50 x 10 2b.63 x 10 2b.63 x 10 2b.80 x 10 2b.80 x 10 3b.80 x 10 3b.80 x 10 4b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 10NT06 NT06 NT08 ou NW08 NT10 ou NW10 NT12 ou NW12 NT16 ou NW16 NT16 ou NW16 NW20 NW20 NW25 NW25 NW32 NW32 NW32 NW40 NW40 NW50 NW50 NW63 NW63ExampleConditions: b drawout version b vertical connections b Ti: 40 °C b service current: 1100 A. Solution : For Ti = 40 °C use an NT12 or NW12 which can be connected with two 63 x 5 mm bars or with one 63 x 10 mm bar.Note: the values indicated in these tables have been extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test.1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsBusbar sizing0Basis of tables: b maximum permissible busbars temperature: 100 °C b Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connection b busbar material is unpainted copper.Rear vertical connectionDB101487MasterpactMaximum service current400 630 800 1000 1250 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2500 2800 3000 3200 3800 4000 4500 5000 5700 6300Ti : 40 °C No. of 5 mm thick bars2b.30 x 5 2b.40 x 5 2b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 5 2b.63 x 5 2b.80 x 5 3b.63 x 5 2b.80 x 5 2b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 5 4b.80 x 5 4b.100 x 5 5b.100 x 5 6b.100 x 5No. of 10 mm thick bars1b.30 x 10 1b.40 x 10 1b.50 x 10 1b.50 x 10 1b.63 x 10 1b.80 x 10 2b.50 x 10 1b.80 x 10 2b.63 x 10 2b.63 x 10 2b.80 x 10 2b.100 x 10 3b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 10Ti : 50 °C No. of 5 mm thick bars2b.30 x 5 2b.40 x 5 2b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 5 3b.50 x 5 2b.80 x 5 3b.63 x 5 2b.80 x 5 2b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 5 4b.80 x 5 4b.100 x 5 6b.100 x 5 6b.100 x 5No. of 10 mm thick bars1b.30 x 10 1b.40 x 10 1b.50 x 10 1b.50 x 10 2b.40 x 10 2b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 10 2b.63 x 10 2b.63 x 10 2b.80 x 10 2b.100 x 10 3b.100 x 10 3b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 10Ti : 60 °C No. of 5 mm thick bars2b.30 x 5 2b.40 x 5 2b.50 x 5 2b.63 x 5 3b.50 x 5 3b.63 x 5 3b.80 x 5 3b.80 x 5 3b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 5 4b.100 x 5 4b.100 x 5 5b.100 x 5No. of 10 mm thick bars1b.30 x 10 1b.40 x 10 1b.50 x 10 1b.63 x 10 2b.40 x 10 2b.50 x 10 2b.63 x 10 2b.63 x 10 2b.80 x 10 2b.80 x 10 3b.80 x 10 3b.80 x 10 4b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 10NT06 NT06 NT08 ou NW08 NT10 ou NW10 NT12 ou NW12 NT16 ou NW16 NT16 ou NW16 NW20 NW20 NW25 NW25 NW32 NW32 NW32 NW40 NW40 NW50 NW50 NW63 NW63ExampleConditions: b drawout version b vertical connections b Ti: 40 °C b service current: 1100 A. Solution : For Ti = 40 °C use an NT12 or NW12 which can be connected with two 63 x 5 mm bars or with one 63 x 10 mm bar.Note: the values indicated in these tables have been extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test.1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="118">
		<raw><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsTemperature derating Power dissipation and input / output resistance0Temperature deratingThe table below indicates the maximum current rating, for each connection type, as a function of Ti around the circuit breaker and the busbars. Circuit breakers with mixed connections have the same derating as horizontally connected breakers. For Ti greater than 60 °C, consult us. Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connection.Version Connection Temp. Ti NT06 H1/H2/L1 NT08 H1/H2/L1 NT10 H1/H2/L1 NT12 H1/H2 NT16 H1/H2 NW08 N/H/L NW10 N/H/L NW12 N/H/L NW16 N/H/L NW20 H1/H2/H3 NW20 L1 NW25 H1/H2/H3 NW32 H1/H2/H3 NW40 H1/H2/H3 NW40b H1/H2 NW50 H1/H2 NW63 H1/H2 Drawout Front or rear horizontal 40 45 50 55 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 – – Fixed Front or rear horizontal 40 45 50 55 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 – – 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 – –60Rear vertical 40 45 50 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 6300556060Rear vertical 40 45 50 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 – – 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 630055601520 1480 14301560 151015501980 1890 1900 1850 1800 3100 3000 2900 3900 3750 3650––1920 ––––38503900 3800–––6200–––Power dissipation and input / output resistanceTotal power dissipation is the value measured at IN, 50/60 Hz, for a 3 pole or 4 pole breaker (values above the power P = 3RI2). The resistance between input / output is the value measured per pole (cold state).Drawout Power dissipation (Watts) NT06 H1/H2/L1 55/115 (H1/L1) NT08 H1/H2/L1 90/140 (H1/L1) NT10 H1/H2/L1 150/230 (H1/L1) NT12 H1/H2 250 NT16 H1/H2 460 NW08 N1 137 NW08 H/L 100 NW10 N1 220 NW10 H/L 150 NW12 N1 330 NW12 H/L 230 NW16 N1 480 NW16 H/L 390 NW20 H/L 470 NW25 H1/H2/H3 600 NW32 H1/H2/H3 670 NW40 H1/H2/H3 900 NW40b H1/H2 550 NW50 H1/H2 950 NW63 H1/H2 1200 Version Fixed Power dissipation (Watts) 30/45 50/80 80/110 130 220 62 42 100 70 150 100 220 170 250 260 420 650 390 660 1050Input/output resistance (µohm) 38/72 38/72 38/72 36 36 42 30 42 30 42 27 37 27 27 19 13 11 7 7 7Input/output resistance (µohm) 26/39 26/39 26/39 26 26 19 13 19 13 19 13 19 13 13 8 8 8 5 5 51]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsTemperature derating Power dissipation and input / output resistance0Temperature deratingThe table below indicates the maximum current rating, for each connection type, as a function of Ti around the circuit breaker and the busbars. Circuit breakers with mixed connections have the same derating as horizontally connected breakers. For Ti greater than 60 °C, consult us. Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connection.Version Connection Temp. Ti NT06 H1/H2/L1 NT08 H1/H2/L1 NT10 H1/H2/L1 NT12 H1/H2 NT16 H1/H2 NW08 N/H/L NW10 N/H/L NW12 N/H/L NW16 N/H/L NW20 H1/H2/H3 NW20 L1 NW25 H1/H2/H3 NW32 H1/H2/H3 NW40 H1/H2/H3 NW40b H1/H2 NW50 H1/H2 NW63 H1/H2 Drawout Front or rear horizontal 40 45 50 55 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 – – Fixed Front or rear horizontal 40 45 50 55 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 – – 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 – –60Rear vertical 40 45 50 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 6300556060Rear vertical 40 45 50 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 – – 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 630055601520 1480 14301560 151015501980 1890 1900 1850 1800 3100 3000 2900 3900 3750 3650––1920 ––––38503900 3800–––6200–––Power dissipation and input / output resistanceTotal power dissipation is the value measured at IN, 50/60 Hz, for a 3 pole or 4 pole breaker (values above the power P = 3RI2). The resistance between input / output is the value measured per pole (cold state).Drawout Power dissipation (Watts) NT06 H1/H2/L1 55/115 (H1/L1) NT08 H1/H2/L1 90/140 (H1/L1) NT10 H1/H2/L1 150/230 (H1/L1) NT12 H1/H2 250 NT16 H1/H2 460 NW08 N1 137 NW08 H/L 100 NW10 N1 220 NW10 H/L 150 NW12 N1 330 NW12 H/L 230 NW16 N1 480 NW16 H/L 390 NW20 H/L 470 NW25 H1/H2/H3 600 NW32 H1/H2/H3 670 NW40 H1/H2/H3 900 NW40b H1/H2 550 NW50 H1/H2 950 NW63 H1/H2 1200 Version Fixed Power dissipation (Watts) 30/45 50/80 80/110 130 220 62 42 100 70 150 100 220 170 250 260 420 650 390 660 1050Input/output resistance (µohm) 38/72 38/72 38/72 36 36 42 30 42 30 42 27 37 27 27 19 13 11 7 7 7Input/output resistance (µohm) 26/39 26/39 26/39 26 26 19 13 19 13 19 13 19 13 13 8 8 8 5 5 51]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="119">
		<raw><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsDerating in switchboards0Factors affecting switchboard designThe temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections: This is used to define the type of circuit breaker to be used and its connection arrangement. Vents at the top and bottom of the cubicles: Vents considerably reduce the temperature inside the switchboard, but must be designed so as to respect the degree of protection provided by the enclosure. For weatherproof heavy-duty cubicles, a forced ventilation system may be required. The heat dissipated by the devices installed in the switchboard: This is the heat dissipated by the circuit breakers under normal conditions (service current). The size of the enclosure: This determines the volume for cooling calculations. Switchboard installation mode: Free-standing, against a wall, etc. Horizontal partitions: Partitions can obstruct air circulation within the enclosure.Basis of tablesb switchboard dimensions b number of circuit-breakers installed b type of breaker connections b drawout versions b ambient temperature outside of the switchboard: Ta (IEC 60439-1).Masterpact NT06-16 H1/H2/L1 (switchboard 2000 x 400 x 400) - area of outlet vents: 150 cm2TypeSwitchboard composition 4 3 2 1 Connection type Busbar dimensions (mm) Ventilated switchboard (➨ IP31)DB108437NT06 H1/H2/L1NT08 H1/H2/L1NT10 H1/H2/L1NT12 H1/H2NT16 H1/H22b. 40 x 5 4 3 630 2 1 4 3 630 2 1 4 3 630 2 12b. 50 x 53b. 63 x 5 H1/L1 H1/L1 1000/1000 1000/10003b. 63 x 5 3b. 50 x 53b. 80 x 5 3b. 63 x 5 1400 152063080080012501250Ta = 35 °CTa = 45 °C6308008001000/9501000/10001250125013301440Ta = 55 °C6308008001000/8901000/9601200125012501340(1) Area of outlet vents: 150 cm². (2) Area of intlet vents: 150 cm². Non ventilated switchboard 4 (➨ IP54) 3 630 Ta = 35 °C 2 1 4 3 630 Ta = 45 °C 2 1 4 3 630 Ta = 55 °C 2 16308008001000/9601000/10001250125013301400DB1014956308008001000/9101000/98012201250126013306308008001000/8601000/9301150123012001260Note: the values indicated in these tables have been extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test. The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only given that the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, e.g. shape, porosity and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsDerating in switchboards0Factors affecting switchboard designThe temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections: This is used to define the type of circuit breaker to be used and its connection arrangement. Vents at the top and bottom of the cubicles: Vents considerably reduce the temperature inside the switchboard, but must be designed so as to respect the degree of protection provided by the enclosure. For weatherproof heavy-duty cubicles, a forced ventilation system may be required. The heat dissipated by the devices installed in the switchboard: This is the heat dissipated by the circuit breakers under normal conditions (service current). The size of the enclosure: This determines the volume for cooling calculations. Switchboard installation mode: Free-standing, against a wall, etc. Horizontal partitions: Partitions can obstruct air circulation within the enclosure.Basis of tablesb switchboard dimensions b number of circuit-breakers installed b type of breaker connections b drawout versions b ambient temperature outside of the switchboard: Ta (IEC 60439-1).Masterpact NT06-16 H1/H2/L1 (switchboard 2000 x 400 x 400) - area of outlet vents: 150 cm2TypeSwitchboard composition 4 3 2 1 Connection type Busbar dimensions (mm) Ventilated switchboard (➨ IP31)DB108437NT06 H1/H2/L1NT08 H1/H2/L1NT10 H1/H2/L1NT12 H1/H2NT16 H1/H22b. 40 x 5 4 3 630 2 1 4 3 630 2 1 4 3 630 2 12b. 50 x 53b. 63 x 5 H1/L1 H1/L1 1000/1000 1000/10003b. 63 x 5 3b. 50 x 53b. 80 x 5 3b. 63 x 5 1400 152063080080012501250Ta = 35 °CTa = 45 °C6308008001000/9501000/10001250125013301440Ta = 55 °C6308008001000/8901000/9601200125012501340(1) Area of outlet vents: 150 cm². (2) Area of intlet vents: 150 cm². Non ventilated switchboard 4 (➨ IP54) 3 630 Ta = 35 °C 2 1 4 3 630 Ta = 45 °C 2 1 4 3 630 Ta = 55 °C 2 16308008001000/9601000/10001250125013301400DB1014956308008001000/9101000/98012201250126013306308008001000/8601000/9301150123012001260Note: the values indicated in these tables have been extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test. The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only given that the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, e.g. shape, porosity and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="120">
		<raw><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsDerating in switchboards0Masterpact NT06-08 H1/H2/L1 (switchboard 2300 x 1100 x 500) - area of outlet vents: 300 cm²TypeSwitchboard composition 5 4 3 2 1 Connection type Busbar dimensions (mm) Ventilated switchboard (➨ IP31)DB108444NT06 H1/H2/L1NT08 H1/H2/L12b. 40 x 5 5 4 3 2 630 1 5 4 3 2 630 1 5 4 3 2 630 1 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 6302b. 50 x 5 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800Ta = 35 °C630630 630630 630 630800800800 800800 800 800Ta = 45 °C630630 630630 630 630800800800 800800 800 800Ta = 55 °C630630 630630 630 630800800800 800800 800 800(1) Area of outlet vents: 300 cm². (2) Area of intlet vents: 300 cm². Non ventilated switchboard (➨ IP54) Ta = 35 °CDB101489Ta = 45 °CTa = 55 °C5 4 3 2 630 1 5 4 3 2 630 1 5 4 3 2 630 1630630 630630 630 630630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630630630 630630 630 630630630 630630 630 630630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630800800800 800800 800 800800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800800800800 800800 800 800800800800 800800 800 800Note: the values indicated in these tables have been extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test. The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only given that the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, e.g. shape, porosity and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsDerating in switchboards0Masterpact NT06-08 H1/H2/L1 (switchboard 2300 x 1100 x 500) - area of outlet vents: 300 cm²TypeSwitchboard composition 5 4 3 2 1 Connection type Busbar dimensions (mm) Ventilated switchboard (➨ IP31)DB108444NT06 H1/H2/L1NT08 H1/H2/L12b. 40 x 5 5 4 3 2 630 1 5 4 3 2 630 1 5 4 3 2 630 1 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 6302b. 50 x 5 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800Ta = 35 °C630630 630630 630 630800800800 800800 800 800Ta = 45 °C630630 630630 630 630800800800 800800 800 800Ta = 55 °C630630 630630 630 630800800800 800800 800 800(1) Area of outlet vents: 300 cm². (2) Area of intlet vents: 300 cm². Non ventilated switchboard (➨ IP54) Ta = 35 °CDB101489Ta = 45 °CTa = 55 °C5 4 3 2 630 1 5 4 3 2 630 1 5 4 3 2 630 1630630 630630 630 630630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630630630 630630 630 630630630 630630 630 630630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630800800800 800800 800 800800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800800800800 800800 800 800800800800 800800 800 800Note: the values indicated in these tables have been extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test. The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only given that the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, e.g. shape, porosity and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="121">
		<raw><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsDerating in switchboards0Disjoncteurs Masterpact NT10-16 H1/H2/L1 (switchboard 2300 x 1100 x 500) - area of outlet vents: 300 cm²TypeSwitchboard composition 5 4 3 2 1 Connection type Busbar dimensions (mm) Ventilated switchboard (➨ IP31) 5 4 3 Ta = 35 °C 2 1 5 4 Ta = 45 °C 3 2 1 5 4 Ta = 55 °C 3 2 1 (1) Area of outlet vents: 300 cm². (2) Area of intlet vents: 300 cm². Non ventilated switchboard 5 (➨ IP54) 4 Ta = 35 °C 3 2 5 4 Ta = 45 °C 3 2 5 4 Ta = 55 °C 3 2 3b. 63 x 5 H1/L1 H1/L1 1000/1000 1000/1000 1000/1000 1000/10001000/10001000/1000 1000/1000 2b. 63 x 5 H1/L1 H1/L1 3b. 63 x 5 3b. 50 x 51250 1250 1250NT10 H1/H2/L1NT12 H1/H2NT16 H1/H23b. 80 x 5 3b. 63 x 5DB108444125012501250 1250146016001500 15501000/1000 1000/1000 1000/1000 1000/960 1000/10001000/1000 1000/1000125012501250 12501250 1250 1250140015001420 14801000/920 1000/950 1000/930 1000/900 1000/1000 1000/970 1000/950125012501250 12501250 1250 1250130014001330 1370DB1014891000/950 1000/1000 1000/960 1000/10001000/10001000/1000 1000/970 1000 /900 1000/950 1000 /910 1000/950 1000/1000 1000/960 1000 /930 1000/850 1000/900 1000/860 1000/880 1000/970 1000/910 1000/870125012501250 12501250 1250 1250 1180 1190 1220 1120 1130 1150140015001370 1400125012501250 1250135014301300 1320121012501200 1210125013501210 1250Note: the values indicated in these tables have been extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test. The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only given that the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, e.g. shape, porosity and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsDerating in switchboards0Disjoncteurs Masterpact NT10-16 H1/H2/L1 (switchboard 2300 x 1100 x 500) - area of outlet vents: 300 cm²TypeSwitchboard composition 5 4 3 2 1 Connection type Busbar dimensions (mm) Ventilated switchboard (➨ IP31) 5 4 3 Ta = 35 °C 2 1 5 4 Ta = 45 °C 3 2 1 5 4 Ta = 55 °C 3 2 1 (1) Area of outlet vents: 300 cm². (2) Area of intlet vents: 300 cm². Non ventilated switchboard 5 (➨ IP54) 4 Ta = 35 °C 3 2 5 4 Ta = 45 °C 3 2 5 4 Ta = 55 °C 3 2 3b. 63 x 5 H1/L1 H1/L1 1000/1000 1000/1000 1000/1000 1000/10001000/10001000/1000 1000/1000 2b. 63 x 5 H1/L1 H1/L1 3b. 63 x 5 3b. 50 x 51250 1250 1250NT10 H1/H2/L1NT12 H1/H2NT16 H1/H23b. 80 x 5 3b. 63 x 5DB108444125012501250 1250146016001500 15501000/1000 1000/1000 1000/1000 1000/960 1000/10001000/1000 1000/1000125012501250 12501250 1250 1250140015001420 14801000/920 1000/950 1000/930 1000/900 1000/1000 1000/970 1000/950125012501250 12501250 1250 1250130014001330 1370DB1014891000/950 1000/1000 1000/960 1000/10001000/10001000/1000 1000/970 1000 /900 1000/950 1000 /910 1000/950 1000/1000 1000/960 1000 /930 1000/850 1000/900 1000/860 1000/880 1000/970 1000/910 1000/870125012501250 12501250 1250 1250 1180 1190 1220 1120 1130 1150140015001370 1400125012501250 1250135014301300 1320121012501200 1210125013501210 1250Note: the values indicated in these tables have been extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test. The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only given that the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, e.g. shape, porosity and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="122">
		<raw><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsDerating in switchboards0Masterpact NW08-10 N/H/L (switchboard 2300 x 800 x 900) - area of outlet vents: 350 cm²TypeSwitchboard composition 4 3 2 1 Connection type Busbar dimensions (mm) Ventilated switchboard (➨ IP31)DB108438NW08 N/H/LNW10 N/H/L2b. 50 x 5 4 3 2 1 800 4 3 2 1 800 4 3 2 1 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 8003b. 63 x 5 2b. 63 x 5 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000Ta = 35 °C800800 800100010001000 1000Ta = 45 °C800800 800100010001000 1000Ta = 55 °C800800 800100010001000 1000(1) Area of outlet vents: 350 cm². (2) Area of intlet vents: 350 cm². Non ventilated switchboard (➨ IP54) Ta = 35 °CDB101491Ta = 45 °CTa = 55 °C4 3 2 1 800 4 3 2 1 800 4 3 2 1 800800800 800800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800800800 800800800 800800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800100010001000 10001000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000100010001000 1000100010001000 1000Note: the values indicated in these tables have been extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test. The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only given that the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, e.g. shape, porosity and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsDerating in switchboards0Masterpact NW08-10 N/H/L (switchboard 2300 x 800 x 900) - area of outlet vents: 350 cm²TypeSwitchboard composition 4 3 2 1 Connection type Busbar dimensions (mm) Ventilated switchboard (➨ IP31)DB108438NW08 N/H/LNW10 N/H/L2b. 50 x 5 4 3 2 1 800 4 3 2 1 800 4 3 2 1 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 8003b. 63 x 5 2b. 63 x 5 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000Ta = 35 °C800800 800100010001000 1000Ta = 45 °C800800 800100010001000 1000Ta = 55 °C800800 800100010001000 1000(1) Area of outlet vents: 350 cm². (2) Area of intlet vents: 350 cm². Non ventilated switchboard (➨ IP54) Ta = 35 °CDB101491Ta = 45 °CTa = 55 °C4 3 2 1 800 4 3 2 1 800 4 3 2 1 800800800 800800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800800800 800800800 800800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800100010001000 10001000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000100010001000 1000100010001000 1000Note: the values indicated in these tables have been extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test. The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only given that the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, e.g. shape, porosity and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="123">
		<raw><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsDerating in switchboards0Masterpact NW12-16 N/H/L (switchboard 2300 x 800 x 900) - area of outlet vents: 350 cm²TypeSwitchboard composition 4 3 2 1 Connection type Busbar dimensions (mm) Ventilated switchboard (➨ IP31)DB108438NW12 N1NW12 H/LNW16 N1NW16 H/L3b. 63 x 5 3b. 50 x 5 4 3 2 1 1250 4 3 2 1 1250 4 3 2 1 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 12503b. 63 x 5 3b. 50 x 5 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 12503b. 80 x 5 3b. 63 x 53b. 80 x 5 3b. 63 x 5Ta = 35 °C12501250 1250125012501250 1250155016001600 1600160016001600 1600Ta = 45 °C12501250 1250125012501250 1250147016001500 1600160016001600 1600Ta = 55 °C12501250 1250125012501250 1250138015001380 1500152016001470 1600(1) Area of outlet vents: 350 cm². (2) Area of intlet vents: 350 cm². Non ventilated switchboard (➨ IP54) Ta = 35 °CDB101491Ta = 45 °CTa = 55 °C4 3 2 1 1250 4 3 2 1 1200 4 3 2 1 113012501250 12501240 1250 1250 1170 1210 1250 1100 1170 1200125012501250 12501250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250144015501425 1550160016001600 160012501210 1250125012501250 1250136014701360 1470150016001500 160012001140 1200125012501250 1250128013801280 1380140015201400 1520Note: the values indicated in these tables have been extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test. The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only given that the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, e.g. shape, porosity and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsDerating in switchboards0Masterpact NW12-16 N/H/L (switchboard 2300 x 800 x 900) - area of outlet vents: 350 cm²TypeSwitchboard composition 4 3 2 1 Connection type Busbar dimensions (mm) Ventilated switchboard (➨ IP31)DB108438NW12 N1NW12 H/LNW16 N1NW16 H/L3b. 63 x 5 3b. 50 x 5 4 3 2 1 1250 4 3 2 1 1250 4 3 2 1 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 12503b. 63 x 5 3b. 50 x 5 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 12503b. 80 x 5 3b. 63 x 53b. 80 x 5 3b. 63 x 5Ta = 35 °C12501250 1250125012501250 1250155016001600 1600160016001600 1600Ta = 45 °C12501250 1250125012501250 1250147016001500 1600160016001600 1600Ta = 55 °C12501250 1250125012501250 1250138015001380 1500152016001470 1600(1) Area of outlet vents: 350 cm². (2) Area of intlet vents: 350 cm². Non ventilated switchboard (➨ IP54) Ta = 35 °CDB101491Ta = 45 °CTa = 55 °C4 3 2 1 1250 4 3 2 1 1200 4 3 2 1 113012501250 12501240 1250 1250 1170 1210 1250 1100 1170 1200125012501250 12501250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250144015501425 1550160016001600 160012501210 1250125012501250 1250136014701360 1470150016001500 160012001140 1200125012501250 1250128013801280 1380140015201400 1520Note: the values indicated in these tables have been extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test. The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only given that the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, e.g. shape, porosity and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="124">
		<raw><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsDerating in switchboards0Masterpact NW20-40 N/H/L (switchboard 2300 x 800 x 900) - area of outlet vents: 350 cm²TypeSwitchboard composition 4 3 2 1 Connection type Busbar dimensions (mm) Ventilated switchboard (➨ IP31)DB108438NW20 H1/H2/H3NW20 L1NW25 H1/2/3NW32 H1/2/3NW40 H1/2/3Ta = 35 °CTa = 45 °CTa = 55 °C3b. 100 x 5 4 3 2000 2 2000 1 4 3 2 2000 2000 1 4 3 2 2000 2000 13b. 100 x 5 2000 2000 1830 20004b. 100 x 53b. 100 x 104b. 100 x 10200020002375250030403200332037002000 2000181019601750 19202250238028803100316035002000 2000170018501640 1800210022502690290029603280(1) Area of outlet vents: 350 cm². (2) Area of intlet vents: 350 cm². Non ventilated switchboard (➨ IP54) Ta = 35 °CDB101491Ta = 45 °CTa = 55 °C4 3 2 2000 1 4 3 2 1900 1 4 3 2 1800 120002000 2000180019001750 189021252275265028503040332019601900 1960168018101660 180020002150255027002880312019201780 1920159017001550 1700190020202370253027202960Note: the values indicated in these tables have been extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test. The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only given that the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, e.g. shape, porosity and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsDerating in switchboards0Masterpact NW20-40 N/H/L (switchboard 2300 x 800 x 900) - area of outlet vents: 350 cm²TypeSwitchboard composition 4 3 2 1 Connection type Busbar dimensions (mm) Ventilated switchboard (➨ IP31)DB108438NW20 H1/H2/H3NW20 L1NW25 H1/2/3NW32 H1/2/3NW40 H1/2/3Ta = 35 °CTa = 45 °CTa = 55 °C3b. 100 x 5 4 3 2000 2 2000 1 4 3 2 2000 2000 1 4 3 2 2000 2000 13b. 100 x 5 2000 2000 1830 20004b. 100 x 53b. 100 x 104b. 100 x 10200020002375250030403200332037002000 2000181019601750 19202250238028803100316035002000 2000170018501640 1800210022502690290029603280(1) Area of outlet vents: 350 cm². (2) Area of intlet vents: 350 cm². Non ventilated switchboard (➨ IP54) Ta = 35 °CDB101491Ta = 45 °CTa = 55 °C4 3 2 2000 1 4 3 2 1900 1 4 3 2 1800 120002000 2000180019001750 189021252275265028503040332019601900 1960168018101660 180020002150255027002880312019201780 1920159017001550 1700190020202370253027202960Note: the values indicated in these tables have been extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test. The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only given that the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, e.g. shape, porosity and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="125">
		<raw><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsDerating in switchboards0Masterpact NW40b-63 H1/H2 (switchboard 2300 x 1400 x 1500) - area of outlet vents: 500 cm²TypeSwitchboard composition 4 3 2 1 Connection type Busbar dimensions (mm) Ventilated switchboard (➨ IP31) Ta = 35 °CDB108445NW40b H1/H2NW50 H1/H2NW63 H1/H2Ta = 45 °CTa = 55 °C5b. 100 x 10 4 3 2 4000 4000 1 4 3 2 4000 4000 1 4 3 2 4000 4000 17b. 100 x 108b. 100 x 10470050005850445048505670420046005350(1) Area of outlet vents: 500 cm². (2) Area of intlet vents: 500 cm². Non ventilated switchboard (➨ IP54) Ta = 35 °CDB101492Ta = 45 °CTa = 55 °C4 3 2 4000 1 4 3 2 4000 1 4 3 2 3840 1400043504650500040004100440050403840385041504730Note: the values indicated in these tables have been extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test. The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only given that the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, e.g. shape, porosity and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsDerating in switchboards0Masterpact NW40b-63 H1/H2 (switchboard 2300 x 1400 x 1500) - area of outlet vents: 500 cm²TypeSwitchboard composition 4 3 2 1 Connection type Busbar dimensions (mm) Ventilated switchboard (➨ IP31) Ta = 35 °CDB108445NW40b H1/H2NW50 H1/H2NW63 H1/H2Ta = 45 °CTa = 55 °C5b. 100 x 10 4 3 2 4000 4000 1 4 3 2 4000 4000 1 4 3 2 4000 4000 17b. 100 x 108b. 100 x 10470050005850445048505670420046005350(1) Area of outlet vents: 500 cm². (2) Area of intlet vents: 500 cm². Non ventilated switchboard (➨ IP54) Ta = 35 °CDB101492Ta = 45 °CTa = 55 °C4 3 2 4000 1 4 3 2 4000 1 4 3 2 3840 1400043504650500040004100440050403840385041504730Note: the values indicated in these tables have been extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test. The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only given that the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, e.g. shape, porosity and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="126">
		<raw><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsSubstitution kit Fixed / drawout devices 800 to 3200 AIt is possible to replace a Masterpact (M08 to M32) with a new Masterpact (NW08 to NW32) with the same power rating. Substitution is possible for the following types of circuit breakers: b N1, H1, H2 for both fixed and drawout versions b L1 for drawout versions up to 2000 A.0Mounting diagramFixed version Drawout versionYDB102201Y2Ø9,5 X 25DB103768Ø142 Ø11,5 x 22 124 162 150 10Ø14 Ø11,54 Ø6,5Ø9,5 2Ø11 X 6110 175 Ø10,5 2 Ø11 X 6Ø11 200 (3P) 315 (4P)Ø11 FF200 167,5 (3P) 282,5 (4P) 267,5 (4P)162,5: Masterpact NW : Masterpact MFixing points are identical for Masterpact (M08 to M32) and Masterpact (NW08 to NW32), except for the four-pole chassis.Door cut-outb without an escutcheon, the cut-out is identical (270 x 325 mm) b with the former escutcheon, the cut-out is identical (270 x 325 mm) b with the new escutcheon, the cut-out is different. Drawout version295 mini 300 mini (3P) 415 mini (4P) 300 miniFixed version295 mini (3P) 410 mini (4P)DB103769YDB103770YX270 (1) 316 (2) 135 (1) 158 (2)X270 (1) 379 (2) 135 (1) 222 (2) 153,3 (1)325 (1) 364 (2)162,5 (1) 182 (2) 325 (1) 364 (2)162,5 (1) 182 (2)47 (1)Power connectionSelect a set of retrofit connectors to replace the standard connectors and avoid any modifications to the busbars (see the retrofit section in &amp;quot;orders and quotations&amp;quot;).Note: (1) Without escutcheon. (2) With escutcheon. References X and Y represent the symmetry planes for threepole devices.1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsSubstitution kit Fixed / drawout devices 800 to 3200 AIt is possible to replace a Masterpact (M08 to M32) with a new Masterpact (NW08 to NW32) with the same power rating. Substitution is possible for the following types of circuit breakers: b N1, H1, H2 for both fixed and drawout versions b L1 for drawout versions up to 2000 A.0Mounting diagramFixed version Drawout versionYDB102201Y2Ø9,5 X 25DB103768Ø142 Ø11,5 x 22 124 162 150 10Ø14 Ø11,54 Ø6,5Ø9,5 2Ø11 X 6110 175 Ø10,5 2 Ø11 X 6Ø11 200 (3P) 315 (4P)Ø11 FF200 167,5 (3P) 282,5 (4P) 267,5 (4P)162,5: Masterpact NW : Masterpact MFixing points are identical for Masterpact (M08 to M32) and Masterpact (NW08 to NW32), except for the four-pole chassis.Door cut-outb without an escutcheon, the cut-out is identical (270 x 325 mm) b with the former escutcheon, the cut-out is identical (270 x 325 mm) b with the new escutcheon, the cut-out is different. Drawout version295 mini 300 mini (3P) 415 mini (4P) 300 miniFixed version295 mini (3P) 410 mini (4P)DB103769YDB103770YX270 (1) 316 (2) 135 (1) 158 (2)X270 (1) 379 (2) 135 (1) 222 (2) 153,3 (1)325 (1) 364 (2)162,5 (1) 182 (2) 325 (1) 364 (2)162,5 (1) 182 (2)47 (1)Power connectionSelect a set of retrofit connectors to replace the standard connectors and avoid any modifications to the busbars (see the retrofit section in &amp;quot;orders and quotations&amp;quot;).Note: (1) Without escutcheon. (2) With escutcheon. References X and Y represent the symmetry planes for threepole devices.1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="127">
		<raw><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsSubstitution kit Fixed / drawout devices 800 to 3200 A0Electrical diagramsCorrespondences between Masterpact NW and Masterpact M terminal blocks. Power Control unit Remote operationDB101511Indication contactsChassis contactsDB101512Identical to Masterpact M. New or additional functions.Different than Masterpact M. (1) The current transformer for the external neutral must be replaced.1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Installation recommendationsSubstitution kit Fixed / drawout devices 800 to 3200 A0Electrical diagramsCorrespondences between Masterpact NW and Masterpact M terminal blocks. Power Control unit Remote operationDB101511Indication contactsChassis contactsDB101512Identical to Masterpact M. New or additional functions.Different than Masterpact M. (1) The current transformer for the external neutral must be replaced.1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="128">
		<raw><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: b complete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochures… b selection guides from the e-catalog. b product discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contacts…These technical guides help you comply with installation standards and rules i.e.: the electrical installation guide, the protection guide, the switchboard implementation guide, the technical booklets and the co-ordination tables all form genuine reference tools for the design of high performance electrical installations. For example, the LV protection co-ordination guide - discrimination and cascading - optimises choice of protection and connection devices while also increasing markedly continuity of supply in the installations.1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: b complete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochures… b selection guides from the e-catalog. b product discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contacts…These technical guides help you comply with installation standards and rules i.e.: the electrical installation guide, the protection guide, the switchboard implementation guide, the technical booklets and the co-ordination tables all form genuine reference tools for the design of high performance electrical installations. For example, the LV protection co-ordination guide - discrimination and cascading - optimises choice of protection and connection devices while also increasing markedly continuity of supply in the installations.1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="129">
		<raw><![CDATA[MasterpactAdditional characteristicsPresentation Functions and characteristics Dimensions and connection Electrical diagrams Installation recommendations6 13 63 93 103Tripping curves Limitation curvesCurrent limiting Energy limiting Catalogue numbers and order form128 130130 131 1331]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[MasterpactAdditional characteristicsPresentation Functions and characteristics Dimensions and connection Electrical diagrams Installation recommendations6 13 63 93 103Tripping curves Limitation curvesCurrent limiting Energy limiting Catalogue numbers and order form128 130130 131 1331]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="130">
		<raw><![CDATA[Additional characteristicsTripping curves0Micrologic 2.0DB105112Micrologic 5.0, 6.0, 7.0DB1051131]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Additional characteristicsTripping curves0Micrologic 2.0DB105112Micrologic 5.0, 6.0, 7.0DB1051131]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="131">
		<raw><![CDATA[Additional characteristicsTripping curves0Earth fault protection (Micrologic 6.0)DB101505(1)Ig = In x...Ig &amp;lt; 400 A 400 A y Ig y 1200 A Ig &amp;gt; 1200 AA0.3 0.2 500B0.3 0.3 640C0.4 0.4 720D0.5 0.5 800E0.6 0.6 880F0.7 0.7 960G0.8 0.8 1040H0.9 0.9 1120I1 1 1200IDMTL curve (Micrologic P and H)DB1015061]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Additional characteristicsTripping curves0Earth fault protection (Micrologic 6.0)DB101505(1)Ig = In x...Ig &amp;lt; 400 A 400 A y Ig y 1200 A Ig &amp;gt; 1200 AA0.3 0.2 500B0.3 0.3 640C0.4 0.4 720D0.5 0.5 800E0.6 0.6 880F0.7 0.7 960G0.8 0.8 1040H0.9 0.9 1120I1 1 1200IDMTL curve (Micrologic P and H)DB1015061]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="132">
		<raw><![CDATA[Additional characteristicsLimitation curves Current limiting0Voltage 380/415/440 V ACLimited short-circuit current (kÂ peak)DB101515Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)Voltage 660/690 V ACLimited short-circuit current (kÂ peak)DB101516Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Additional characteristicsLimitation curves Current limiting0Voltage 380/415/440 V ACLimited short-circuit current (kÂ peak)DB101515Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)Voltage 660/690 V ACLimited short-circuit current (kÂ peak)DB101516Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="133">
		<raw><![CDATA[Additional characteristicsLimitation curves Energy limiting0Voltage 380/415/440 V ACLimited energyDB101513Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)Voltage 660/690 V ACLimited energyDB101514Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Additional characteristicsLimitation curves Energy limiting0Voltage 380/415/440 V ACLimited energyDB101513Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)Voltage 660/690 V ACLimited energyDB101514Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="134">
		<raw><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: b complete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochures… b selection guides from the e-catalog. b product discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contacts…The CAD software and tools enhance productivity and safety. They help you create your installations by simplifying product choice through easy browsing in the Guiding System offers. Last but not least, they optimise use of our products while also complying with standards and proper procedures.1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: b complete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochures… b selection guides from the e-catalog. b product discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contacts…The CAD software and tools enhance productivity and safety. They help you create your installations by simplifying product choice through easy browsing in the Guiding System offers. Last but not least, they optimise use of our products while also complying with standards and proper procedures.1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="135">
		<raw><![CDATA[MasterpactCatalogue numbers, spare parts and order formPresentation Functions and characteristics Dimensions and connection Electrical diagrams Installation recommendations Additional characteristics6 13 63 93 103 127Communication bus accessories and Display Modules Retrofit solutions (*)Connections for fixed devices Connections for drawout devices134 135135 136Masterpact NT: spare partsConnection Micrologic control unit, communication option Remote operation Chassis locking and accessories Clusters Circuit breaker locking and accessories Mechanical interlocking for source changeover Indication contacts Instructions137137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145Masterpact NW: spare partsConnection Micrologic control unit, communication option Remote operation Chassis locking and accessories Clusters Circuit breaker locking and accessories Mechanical interlocking for source changeover Indication contacts Instructions146146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154Masterpact NT and NW order form1551]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[MasterpactCatalogue numbers, spare parts and order formPresentation Functions and characteristics Dimensions and connection Electrical diagrams Installation recommendations Additional characteristics6 13 63 93 103 127Communication bus accessories and Display Modules Retrofit solutions (*)Connections for fixed devices Connections for drawout devices134 135135 136Masterpact NT: spare partsConnection Micrologic control unit, communication option Remote operation Chassis locking and accessories Clusters Circuit breaker locking and accessories Mechanical interlocking for source changeover Indication contacts Instructions137137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145Masterpact NW: spare partsConnection Micrologic control unit, communication option Remote operation Chassis locking and accessories Clusters Circuit breaker locking and accessories Mechanical interlocking for source changeover Indication contacts Instructions146146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154Masterpact NT and NW order form1551]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="136">
		<raw><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersCommunication bus accessories and Display Modules0Display modulesDMB300Monochrome display moduleE67954Max. 4 breakers50894DMC300Color display moduleE67955Max. 16 breakers50895Spare partsDMC300PCM: DMC300 memory card 50959RS 485 Modbus pre-wired systemRS 485 Modbus junction blockCJB306: 6 SubD 9 pins connectors junction blockE6795850963RS 485 Modbus connectorCSD309: 9 pins SubD with screw terminalsE6795950964RS 485 Modbus cablesCDM303: display module pre-wired cable, 3 m lengthE6796050960CCP303: Masterpact or Compact pre-wired cable (4 RS 485 wires + 2 power wires) 3 m length 50961E79015CCR301: RS 485 roll cable (2 RS 485 wires + 2 power wires) 60 m lengthE6796150965Micro Power Server MPS100DB101033MPS10033507Digipact Bus pre-wired systemData concentrator DC150Auxiliary supply voltageE79014110-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz and 115-125 V DC50823Junction blockJunction block for internal BusE6795650778CablesCable for internal busE6795720-meter roll (0.75 mm2) 100-meter roll (0.75 mm2)50779 50780ConverterRS 485/RS 232 (ACE909) 12 V DC power supply included RS 485/RS 232 RS 485/Ethernet RS 485/Ethernet (SMS compatible) (1) See catalogue Telemecanique. (2) See catalogue PowerLogic System. 59648 TSX SCA72 174 CEV 300-10 EGX 200/400(2) (1)(2)1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersCommunication bus accessories and Display Modules0Display modulesDMB300Monochrome display moduleE67954Max. 4 breakers50894DMC300Color display moduleE67955Max. 16 breakers50895Spare partsDMC300PCM: DMC300 memory card 50959RS 485 Modbus pre-wired systemRS 485 Modbus junction blockCJB306: 6 SubD 9 pins connectors junction blockE6795850963RS 485 Modbus connectorCSD309: 9 pins SubD with screw terminalsE6795950964RS 485 Modbus cablesCDM303: display module pre-wired cable, 3 m lengthE6796050960CCP303: Masterpact or Compact pre-wired cable (4 RS 485 wires + 2 power wires) 3 m length 50961E79015CCR301: RS 485 roll cable (2 RS 485 wires + 2 power wires) 60 m lengthE6796150965Micro Power Server MPS100DB101033MPS10033507Digipact Bus pre-wired systemData concentrator DC150Auxiliary supply voltageE79014110-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz and 115-125 V DC50823Junction blockJunction block for internal BusE6795650778CablesCable for internal busE6795720-meter roll (0.75 mm2) 100-meter roll (0.75 mm2)50779 50780ConverterRS 485/RS 232 (ACE909) 12 V DC power supply included RS 485/RS 232 RS 485/Ethernet RS 485/Ethernet (SMS compatible) (1) See catalogue Telemecanique. (2) See catalogue PowerLogic System. 59648 TSX SCA72 174 CEV 300-10 EGX 200/400(2) (1)(2)1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="137">
		<raw><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersRetrofit solutions (*) Connections for fixed devices0To replace a Masterpact M with a Masterpact NW, order a retrofit device (without connections) and select a set of connectors corresponding to the replaced device. The Masterpact NW is installed in exactly the same place as the old Masterpact M device, without any modifications required on the switchboard.Horizontal rear connectionDevice to be replaced Connection to be orderedMasterpact M08 to M12Type N1/NI Top Bottom Type H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom 3P 3 x 48951 3 x 48964 3 x 48954 3 x 48965 4P 4 x 48951 4 x 48964 4 x 48954 4 x 48965Masterpact M16Type N1/NI/H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom 3 x 48954 3 x 48965 4 x 48954 4 x 48965Masterpact M20 and M25Type N1/NI/H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom 3 x 48957 3 x 48958 4 x 48957 4 x 48958Masterpact M32Type H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom 1 x 48962 1 x 48961 1 x 48960 1 x 48960(*) Please contact U2R (Retrofit Replacement Unit). 1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersRetrofit solutions (*) Connections for fixed devices0To replace a Masterpact M with a Masterpact NW, order a retrofit device (without connections) and select a set of connectors corresponding to the replaced device. The Masterpact NW is installed in exactly the same place as the old Masterpact M device, without any modifications required on the switchboard.Horizontal rear connectionDevice to be replaced Connection to be orderedMasterpact M08 to M12Type N1/NI Top Bottom Type H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom 3P 3 x 48951 3 x 48964 3 x 48954 3 x 48965 4P 4 x 48951 4 x 48964 4 x 48954 4 x 48965Masterpact M16Type N1/NI/H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom 3 x 48954 3 x 48965 4 x 48954 4 x 48965Masterpact M20 and M25Type N1/NI/H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom 3 x 48957 3 x 48958 4 x 48957 4 x 48958Masterpact M32Type H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom 1 x 48962 1 x 48961 1 x 48960 1 x 48960(*) Please contact U2R (Retrofit Replacement Unit). 1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="138">
		<raw><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersRetrofit solutions (*) Connections for drawout devices0To replace a Masterpact M with a Masterpact NW, order a retrofit device (without connections) and select a set of connectors corresponding to the replaced device. The Masterpact NW is installed in exactly the same place as the old Masterpact M device, without any modifications required on the switchboard.Vertical rear connectionDevice to be replaced Connection to be orderedMasterpact M08 to M12Type N1/NI Top Bottom Type H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom 3P 3 x 48966 3 x 48966 3 x 48969 3 x 48969 4P 4 x 48966 4 x 48966 4 x 48969 4 x 48969Masterpact M16Type N1/NI/H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom 3 x 48969 3 x 48969 4 x 48969 4 x 48969Masterpact M20 and M25Type N1/NI/H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom 3 x 48970 3 x 48970 4 x 48970 4 x 48970Masterpact M32Type H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom 1 x 48974 1 x 48974 1 x 48978 1 x 48978Horizontal rear connectionDevice to be replaced Connection to be orderedMasterpact M08 to M12Type N1/NI Top Bottom Type H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom 3P 3 x 48951 3 x 48964 3 x 48954 3 x 48965 4P 4 x 48951 4 x 48964 4 x 48954 4 x 48965Masterpact M16Type N1/NI/H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom 3 x 48954 3 x 48965 4 x 48954 4 x 48965Masterpact M20 and M25Type N1/NI/H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom Type H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom Type H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom 3 x 48957 3 x 48958 4 x 48957 4 x 48958Masterpact M32 neutral on left-hand side1 x 48973 1 x 48973 1 x 48976 1 x 48977Masterpact M32 neutral on right-hand side1 x 48973 1 x 48973 1 x 48977 1 x 48976(*) Please contact U2R (Retrofit Replacement Unit). 1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersRetrofit solutions (*) Connections for drawout devices0To replace a Masterpact M with a Masterpact NW, order a retrofit device (without connections) and select a set of connectors corresponding to the replaced device. The Masterpact NW is installed in exactly the same place as the old Masterpact M device, without any modifications required on the switchboard.Vertical rear connectionDevice to be replaced Connection to be orderedMasterpact M08 to M12Type N1/NI Top Bottom Type H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom 3P 3 x 48966 3 x 48966 3 x 48969 3 x 48969 4P 4 x 48966 4 x 48966 4 x 48969 4 x 48969Masterpact M16Type N1/NI/H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom 3 x 48969 3 x 48969 4 x 48969 4 x 48969Masterpact M20 and M25Type N1/NI/H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom 3 x 48970 3 x 48970 4 x 48970 4 x 48970Masterpact M32Type H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom 1 x 48974 1 x 48974 1 x 48978 1 x 48978Horizontal rear connectionDevice to be replaced Connection to be orderedMasterpact M08 to M12Type N1/NI Top Bottom Type H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom 3P 3 x 48951 3 x 48964 3 x 48954 3 x 48965 4P 4 x 48951 4 x 48964 4 x 48954 4 x 48965Masterpact M16Type N1/NI/H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom 3 x 48954 3 x 48965 4 x 48954 4 x 48965Masterpact M20 and M25Type N1/NI/H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom Type H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom Type H1/H2/HI/HF Top Bottom 3 x 48957 3 x 48958 4 x 48957 4 x 48958Masterpact M32 neutral on left-hand side1 x 48973 1 x 48973 1 x 48976 1 x 48977Masterpact M32 neutral on right-hand side1 x 48973 1 x 48973 1 x 48977 1 x 48976(*) Please contact U2R (Retrofit Replacement Unit). 1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="139">
		<raw><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NT: spare parts Connection0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Connection3P 4PFixed circuit breakersFront connection / Replacement kit (3 or 4 parts) Top or bottomE95534250/630-1600 A4706947070Installation manual Rear connection (vertical or horizontal mounting) / Replacement kit (3 or 4 parts) 250/630-1600 AE46429 E4643047102 33584 33585Vert. mounting. Horiz. mounting. Installation manual47102Drawout circuit breakersFront connection / Replacement kit (6 or 8 parts) Top and bottomE46440250/630-1600 A3358833589Installation manual Rear connection (vertical or horizontal mounting) / Replacement kit (3 or 4 parts) 250/630-1600 AE46429 E4643047102 33586 33587Vert. mounting. Horiz. mounting. Installation manual47102 3P 4P 33643Connection accessoriesVertical connection adapters 250/630-1600 A / Replacement kit (3 or 4 parts)For fixed and drawout front-connected circuit breakersE4642633642 47102 33644Installation manual For fixed and drawout front-connected circuit breakersCable lug adapters 250/630-1600 A / Replacement kit (3 or 4 parts)33645E46427Installation manual For fixed and drawout front and rear-connected circuit breakers47102 33622 33623Spreaders / Replacement kit 250/630-1600 A (3 or 4 parts)E46431Installation manual For fixed and drawout front and rear-connected circuit breakers For drawout rear-connected circuit breakers Installation manual For fixed front-connected circuit breakers47102 33648 33768 47102 47335 47102 33648 33768Interphase barriers / Replacement kit (3 or 4 parts)E79151Arc chute screen (1 part)47336E74437Installation manual1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NT: spare parts Connection0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Connection3P 4PFixed circuit breakersFront connection / Replacement kit (3 or 4 parts) Top or bottomE95534250/630-1600 A4706947070Installation manual Rear connection (vertical or horizontal mounting) / Replacement kit (3 or 4 parts) 250/630-1600 AE46429 E4643047102 33584 33585Vert. mounting. Horiz. mounting. Installation manual47102Drawout circuit breakersFront connection / Replacement kit (6 or 8 parts) Top and bottomE46440250/630-1600 A3358833589Installation manual Rear connection (vertical or horizontal mounting) / Replacement kit (3 or 4 parts) 250/630-1600 AE46429 E4643047102 33586 33587Vert. mounting. Horiz. mounting. Installation manual47102 3P 4P 33643Connection accessoriesVertical connection adapters 250/630-1600 A / Replacement kit (3 or 4 parts)For fixed and drawout front-connected circuit breakersE4642633642 47102 33644Installation manual For fixed and drawout front-connected circuit breakersCable lug adapters 250/630-1600 A / Replacement kit (3 or 4 parts)33645E46427Installation manual For fixed and drawout front and rear-connected circuit breakers47102 33622 33623Spreaders / Replacement kit 250/630-1600 A (3 or 4 parts)E46431Installation manual For fixed and drawout front and rear-connected circuit breakers For drawout rear-connected circuit breakers Installation manual For fixed front-connected circuit breakers47102 33648 33768 47102 47335 47102 33648 33768Interphase barriers / Replacement kit (3 or 4 parts)E79151Arc chute screen (1 part)47336E74437Installation manual1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="140">
		<raw><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NT: spare parts Micrologic control unit, communication option0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Replacement parts for Micrologic control unitsLong-time rating plug (limits setting range for higher accuracy) / 1 partStandard Low-setting option High-setting option Without long-time protection 0.4 at 1 x Ir 0.4 at 0.8 x Ir 0.8 at 1 x Ir off 33542 33543 33544 33545E46674Battery + coverE95540Battery (1 part) Cover (1 part)For Micrologic A For Micrologic P and H33593 33592 47067menuCommunication optionChassisModbus COM Digipact COM 6 wires terminal drawout (1 part) 6 wires terminal fixed (1 part) 33852 33855 33099 47075E95541Installation manual33088External sensorsExternal sensor for earth-fault protection (TCE) / 1 part Sensor ratingE46671400/1600 A33576E46671Source ground return (SGR) earth-fault protection / 1 part External sensor (SGR) MDGF summing module33579 48891Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection + Vigi cable / 1 part 280 mm x 115 mmE4667233573Vigi cable or external voltage cable / 1 partVigi cable or external voltage cable (1 part) 47090External power supply module (AD) / 1 part24-30 V DC 48-60 V DC 100-125 V DC 110-130 V AC 200-240 V AC 380-415 V AC 1 batteryE4778754440 54441 54442 54443 54444 54445 54446DB105360Battery module (BAT) / 1 part24 V DCL4 L3t Inpu 24VDC Output 24VDC G20A AD 22G1Test equipments / 1 partHand held test kit (HHTK) Full function test kit (FFTK) Test report edition come from FFTK FFTK test cable 2 pin for STR trip unit FFTK test cable 7 pin for Micrologic trip unit 33594 33595 34559 34560 33590E595541]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NT: spare parts Micrologic control unit, communication option0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Replacement parts for Micrologic control unitsLong-time rating plug (limits setting range for higher accuracy) / 1 partStandard Low-setting option High-setting option Without long-time protection 0.4 at 1 x Ir 0.4 at 0.8 x Ir 0.8 at 1 x Ir off 33542 33543 33544 33545E46674Battery + coverE95540Battery (1 part) Cover (1 part)For Micrologic A For Micrologic P and H33593 33592 47067menuCommunication optionChassisModbus COM Digipact COM 6 wires terminal drawout (1 part) 6 wires terminal fixed (1 part) 33852 33855 33099 47075E95541Installation manual33088External sensorsExternal sensor for earth-fault protection (TCE) / 1 part Sensor ratingE46671400/1600 A33576E46671Source ground return (SGR) earth-fault protection / 1 part External sensor (SGR) MDGF summing module33579 48891Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection + Vigi cable / 1 part 280 mm x 115 mmE4667233573Vigi cable or external voltage cable / 1 partVigi cable or external voltage cable (1 part) 47090External power supply module (AD) / 1 part24-30 V DC 48-60 V DC 100-125 V DC 110-130 V AC 200-240 V AC 380-415 V AC 1 batteryE4778754440 54441 54442 54443 54444 54445 54446DB105360Battery module (BAT) / 1 part24 V DCL4 L3t Inpu 24VDC Output 24VDC G20A AD 22G1Test equipments / 1 partHand held test kit (HHTK) Full function test kit (FFTK) Test report edition come from FFTK FFTK test cable 2 pin for STR trip unit FFTK test cable 7 pin for Micrologic trip unit 33594 33595 34559 34560 33590E595541]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="141">
		<raw><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NT: spare parts Remote operation0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Remote operationGear motorMCH (1 part) AC 50/60 HzE95168DCTerminal block (1 part)E95169 E9517148 V 100/130 V 200/240 V 277/415 V 440/480 V + resistor 24/30 V 48/60 V 100/125 V 200/250 V For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breaker33186 33176 33177 33179 33179 33193 33185 33186 33187 33188 47074 33098Fixed.Drawout. Installation manual 47103Closing and opening release (XF or MX)12 V DC 24/30 V DC, 24 V AC 48/60 V DC, 48 V AC 100/130 V AC/DC 200/250 V AC/DC 277 V AC 380/480 V AC Communicating coil (1 part) AC 50/60 Hz 12 V DC DC 24/30 V DC, 24 V AC 48/60 V DC, 48 V AC 100/130 V AC/DC 200/250 V AC/DC 277 V AC 380/480 V AC Terminal block (1 part) For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breakerE95171E95170Standard coil (1 part) AC 50/60 Hz DC33658 33659 33660 33661 33662 33663 33664 33032 33033 33034 33035 33036 33037 33038 47074 33098E95169Fixed.Drawout. Installation manual 47103Undervoltage release MNUndervoltage release (1 part) AC 50/60 Hz 24/30 V DC, 24 V AC DC 48/60 V DC, 48 V AC 100/130 V AC/DC 200/250 V AC/DC 380/480 V AC Terminal block (1 part) For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breakerE9517133668 33669 33670 33671 33673 47074 33098E95169E95170Fixed.Drawout. Installation manual 47103MN delay unitMN delay unit (1 part)E46694R (non-adjustable) AC 50/60 Hz DC 48/60 V AC/DC 100/130 V AC/DC 200/250 V AC/DC 380/480 V AC/DC 33684 33685Installation manualRr (adjustable) 33680 33681 33682 33683 471031]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NT: spare parts Remote operation0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Remote operationGear motorMCH (1 part) AC 50/60 HzE95168DCTerminal block (1 part)E95169 E9517148 V 100/130 V 200/240 V 277/415 V 440/480 V + resistor 24/30 V 48/60 V 100/125 V 200/250 V For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breaker33186 33176 33177 33179 33179 33193 33185 33186 33187 33188 47074 33098Fixed.Drawout. Installation manual 47103Closing and opening release (XF or MX)12 V DC 24/30 V DC, 24 V AC 48/60 V DC, 48 V AC 100/130 V AC/DC 200/250 V AC/DC 277 V AC 380/480 V AC Communicating coil (1 part) AC 50/60 Hz 12 V DC DC 24/30 V DC, 24 V AC 48/60 V DC, 48 V AC 100/130 V AC/DC 200/250 V AC/DC 277 V AC 380/480 V AC Terminal block (1 part) For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breakerE95171E95170Standard coil (1 part) AC 50/60 Hz DC33658 33659 33660 33661 33662 33663 33664 33032 33033 33034 33035 33036 33037 33038 47074 33098E95169Fixed.Drawout. Installation manual 47103Undervoltage release MNUndervoltage release (1 part) AC 50/60 Hz 24/30 V DC, 24 V AC DC 48/60 V DC, 48 V AC 100/130 V AC/DC 200/250 V AC/DC 380/480 V AC Terminal block (1 part) For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breakerE9517133668 33669 33670 33671 33673 47074 33098E95169E95170Fixed.Drawout. Installation manual 47103MN delay unitMN delay unit (1 part)E46694R (non-adjustable) AC 50/60 Hz DC 48/60 V AC/DC 100/130 V AC/DC 200/250 V AC/DC 380/480 V AC/DC 33684 33685Installation manualRr (adjustable) 33680 33681 33682 33683 471031]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="142">
		<raw><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NT: spare parts Chassis locking and accessories0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Chassis locking&amp;quot;Disconnected&amp;quot; position locking / 1 partBy padlocksE46685VCPO By Profalux keylocks Profalux 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 same keys + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 different keys + adaptation kit 1 keylock Profalux (without adaptation kit): identical key not identified combination identical key identified 215470 combination identical key identified 215471 combination By Ronis keylocks Ronis 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 same keys + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 different keys + adaptation kit 1 keylock Ronis (without adaptation kit): identical key not identified combination identical key identified EL24135 combination identical key identified EL24153 combination identical key identified EL24315 combination Adaptation kit adaptation kit Profalux (without keylock): adaptation kit Ronis adaptation kit Castell adaptation kit Kirk Installation manualStandard 33773 33774 33775 33173 33174 33175 33776 33777 33778 33189 33190 33191 33192 33769 33770 33771 33772 47104 33172Door interlock / 1 partRight and left-hand side of chassis (VPECD or VPECG)E46464Installation manual47104 33788Racking interlock / 1 partRacking interlock (VPOC)E46465Installation manual47104 33767Breaker mismatch protection / 1 partBreaker mismatch protection (VDC)E46456Installation manual47104Chassis accessoriesAuxiliary terminal shield (CB) / 1 partTerminal shieldE466983P 4P33763 33764Installation manual47104 3P 4P 33765 33766Safety shutters + locking / 1 partSafety shutters (VO)E46699Installation manual Note: the locking of safety shutters is integrated.471041]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NT: spare parts Chassis locking and accessories0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Chassis locking&amp;quot;Disconnected&amp;quot; position locking / 1 partBy padlocksE46685VCPO By Profalux keylocks Profalux 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 same keys + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 different keys + adaptation kit 1 keylock Profalux (without adaptation kit): identical key not identified combination identical key identified 215470 combination identical key identified 215471 combination By Ronis keylocks Ronis 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 same keys + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 different keys + adaptation kit 1 keylock Ronis (without adaptation kit): identical key not identified combination identical key identified EL24135 combination identical key identified EL24153 combination identical key identified EL24315 combination Adaptation kit adaptation kit Profalux (without keylock): adaptation kit Ronis adaptation kit Castell adaptation kit Kirk Installation manualStandard 33773 33774 33775 33173 33174 33175 33776 33777 33778 33189 33190 33191 33192 33769 33770 33771 33772 47104 33172Door interlock / 1 partRight and left-hand side of chassis (VPECD or VPECG)E46464Installation manual47104 33788Racking interlock / 1 partRacking interlock (VPOC)E46465Installation manual47104 33767Breaker mismatch protection / 1 partBreaker mismatch protection (VDC)E46456Installation manual47104Chassis accessoriesAuxiliary terminal shield (CB) / 1 partTerminal shieldE466983P 4P33763 33764Installation manual47104 3P 4P 33765 33766Safety shutters + locking / 1 partSafety shutters (VO)E46699Installation manual Note: the locking of safety shutters is integrated.471041]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="143">
		<raw><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NT: spare parts Clusters0Clusters1 disconnecting contact cluster for chassis (see table below) 1 partE9553833166Table : number of clusters required for the different chassis modelsMasterpact NT 3P 4P 630 12 18 800 12 18 1000 12 18 1250 12 18 1600 18 24 Note: the minimum order is 6 parts. Chassis rating (A)Racking handle / 1 partRacking handleE95561470981]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NT: spare parts Clusters0Clusters1 disconnecting contact cluster for chassis (see table below) 1 partE9553833166Table : number of clusters required for the different chassis modelsMasterpact NT 3P 4P 630 12 18 800 12 18 1000 12 18 1250 12 18 1600 18 24 Note: the minimum order is 6 parts. Chassis rating (A)Racking handle / 1 partRacking handleE95561470981]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="144">
		<raw><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NT: spare parts Circuit breaker locking and accessories0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Circuit breaker lockingPushbutton locking device / 1 partBy padlocksE4666633897Installation manual47103OFF position locking / 1 partBy padlocks + BPFE supportE4670147514 By Profalux keylocks + BPFE support Profalux 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 same keys + adaptation kit 1 keylock Profalux (without adaptation kit): identical key not identified combination identical key identified 215470 combination identical key identified 215471 combination By Ronis keylocks + BPFE support Ronis 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 same keys + adaptation kit 1 keylock Ronis (without adaptation kit): identical key not identified combination identical key identified EL24135 combination identical key identified EL24153 combination identical key identified EL24315 combination Adaptation kit adaptation kit Profalux (without keylock): adaptation kit Ronis adaptation kit Kirk adaptation kit Castell Installation manual 47519 47520 33173 33174 33175 47521 47522 33189 33190 33191 33192 47515 47516 47517 47518 47103Other circuit breaker accessoriesMechanical operation counter / 1 partOperation counter CDME4666733895Installation manual47103 Fixed 33718 Drawout 33857 33859 33858Escutcheon and accessories / 1 partEscutcheon Transparent cover (IP54) Escutcheon blanking plateE46669 E46668 E46670EscutcheonCoverBlanking plate Front coverInstallation manual47103 47094Front cover (3P / 4P) / 1 partE95558Installation manual47103Spring charging handle / 1 partSpring charging handleE9555947092Installation manual47103Arc chute for Masterpact NT / 1 partType H1 Type L1 3P 3 x 47095 3 x 47096 4P 4 x 47095 4 x 47096E95560Installation manual471031]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NT: spare parts Circuit breaker locking and accessories0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Circuit breaker lockingPushbutton locking device / 1 partBy padlocksE4666633897Installation manual47103OFF position locking / 1 partBy padlocks + BPFE supportE4670147514 By Profalux keylocks + BPFE support Profalux 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 same keys + adaptation kit 1 keylock Profalux (without adaptation kit): identical key not identified combination identical key identified 215470 combination identical key identified 215471 combination By Ronis keylocks + BPFE support Ronis 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 same keys + adaptation kit 1 keylock Ronis (without adaptation kit): identical key not identified combination identical key identified EL24135 combination identical key identified EL24153 combination identical key identified EL24315 combination Adaptation kit adaptation kit Profalux (without keylock): adaptation kit Ronis adaptation kit Kirk adaptation kit Castell Installation manual 47519 47520 33173 33174 33175 47521 47522 33189 33190 33191 33192 47515 47516 47517 47518 47103Other circuit breaker accessoriesMechanical operation counter / 1 partOperation counter CDME4666733895Installation manual47103 Fixed 33718 Drawout 33857 33859 33858Escutcheon and accessories / 1 partEscutcheon Transparent cover (IP54) Escutcheon blanking plateE46669 E46668 E46670EscutcheonCoverBlanking plate Front coverInstallation manual47103 47094Front cover (3P / 4P) / 1 partE95558Installation manual47103Spring charging handle / 1 partSpring charging handleE9555947092Installation manual47103Arc chute for Masterpact NT / 1 partType H1 Type L1 3P 3 x 47095 3 x 47096 4P 4 x 47095 4 x 47096E95560Installation manual471031]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="145">
		<raw><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NT: spare parts Mechanical interlocking for source changeover0Mechanical interlocking for source changeoverInterlocking using connecting rodsComplete assembly with 2 adaptation fixtures + rods 2 Masterpact NT fixed devices 2 Masterpact NT drawout devices Note: the installation manual is enclosed. 33912 33913E47760Interlocking using cables (1)Choose 2 adaptation fixtures (1 for each breaker) + 1 set of cables 1 adaptation fixture for Masterpact NT fixed devices 1 adaptation fixture for Masterpact NT drawout devices 1 set of 2 cables (1) Can be used with any combination of NT or NW, fixed or drawout devices. 33200 33201 33209Cable-type door interlock1 complete assembly for Masterpact NT fixed devices 1 complete assembly for Masterpact NT drawout devices Note: the installation manual is enclosed.E7074233920 339211]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NT: spare parts Mechanical interlocking for source changeover0Mechanical interlocking for source changeoverInterlocking using connecting rodsComplete assembly with 2 adaptation fixtures + rods 2 Masterpact NT fixed devices 2 Masterpact NT drawout devices Note: the installation manual is enclosed. 33912 33913E47760Interlocking using cables (1)Choose 2 adaptation fixtures (1 for each breaker) + 1 set of cables 1 adaptation fixture for Masterpact NT fixed devices 1 adaptation fixture for Masterpact NT drawout devices 1 set of 2 cables (1) Can be used with any combination of NT or NW, fixed or drawout devices. 33200 33201 33209Cable-type door interlock1 complete assembly for Masterpact NT fixed devices 1 complete assembly for Masterpact NT drawout devices Note: the installation manual is enclosed.E7074233920 339211]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="146">
		<raw><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NT: spare parts Indication contacts0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Indication contactsON/OFF indication contacts (OF) / 1 partChangeover contacts (6 A - 240 V) 1 low-level OF to replace 1 standard OF (4 max.) Wiring For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breaker Installation manual 1 additional SDE (5 A - 240 V) 1 additional low-level SDE Wiring For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breaker Installation manual 47076 47077 47074 33098 47103 47078 47079 47074 33098 47103 PF 47080 47081 47074 33098 47103 BPFE 47512E46463 E47758&amp;quot;Fault trip&amp;quot; indication contacts (SDE) / 1 part&amp;quot;Ready to close&amp;quot; contact (1 max.) / 1 part1 changeover contact (5 A - 240 V) 1 low-level changeover contact Wiring For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breaker Installation manualE46664Electrical closing pushbutton / 1 partE464391 pushbuttonInstallation manual47103Carriage switches (connected / disconnected / test position) / 1 partChangeover contacts (6 A - 240 V) 1 connected position contact (3 max.) 1 test position contact (1 max.) 1 disconnected position contact (2 max.) And/or low-level changeover contacts 1 connected position contact (3 max.) 1 test position contact (1 max.) 1 disconnected position contact (2 max.) 3 wire terminal (1 part), terminal block (1 part) Jumpers (10 parts) Installation manual 33170 33170 33170 33171 33171 33171 33098 47900 47104E46661 E95171Auxiliary terminals for chassis alone1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NT: spare parts Indication contacts0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Indication contactsON/OFF indication contacts (OF) / 1 partChangeover contacts (6 A - 240 V) 1 low-level OF to replace 1 standard OF (4 max.) Wiring For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breaker Installation manual 1 additional SDE (5 A - 240 V) 1 additional low-level SDE Wiring For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breaker Installation manual 47076 47077 47074 33098 47103 47078 47079 47074 33098 47103 PF 47080 47081 47074 33098 47103 BPFE 47512E46463 E47758&amp;quot;Fault trip&amp;quot; indication contacts (SDE) / 1 part&amp;quot;Ready to close&amp;quot; contact (1 max.) / 1 part1 changeover contact (5 A - 240 V) 1 low-level changeover contact Wiring For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breaker Installation manualE46664Electrical closing pushbutton / 1 partE464391 pushbuttonInstallation manual47103Carriage switches (connected / disconnected / test position) / 1 partChangeover contacts (6 A - 240 V) 1 connected position contact (3 max.) 1 test position contact (1 max.) 1 disconnected position contact (2 max.) And/or low-level changeover contacts 1 connected position contact (3 max.) 1 test position contact (1 max.) 1 disconnected position contact (2 max.) 3 wire terminal (1 part), terminal block (1 part) Jumpers (10 parts) Installation manual 33170 33170 33170 33171 33171 33171 33098 47900 47104E46661 E95171Auxiliary terminals for chassis alone1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="147">
		<raw><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NT: spare parts Instructions0InstructionsChassis accessories Circuit breaker accessories Fixed and drawout circuit breaker Micrologic user manual 47104 47103 47102 33076 33077 33079 33080 33082 33083 33085 33086 47106 47107 3308820/50 (French) 20/50 (English) 2A/7A (French) 2A/7A (English) 5P/7P (French) 5P/7P (English) 5H/7H (French) 5H/7H (English) NT user manual French English Modbus communication notice for manual1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NT: spare parts Instructions0InstructionsChassis accessories Circuit breaker accessories Fixed and drawout circuit breaker Micrologic user manual 47104 47103 47102 33076 33077 33079 33080 33082 33083 33085 33086 47106 47107 3308820/50 (French) 20/50 (English) 2A/7A (French) 2A/7A (English) 5P/7P (French) 5P/7P (English) 5H/7H (French) 5H/7H (English) NT user manual French English Modbus communication notice for manual1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="148">
		<raw><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NW: spare parts Connection0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Connection3P 4PFixed circuit breakersFront connection / Replacement kit (3 or 4 parts) 800-1600 A 2000/3200 A Top Top 47990 47992 47991 47993E95557E95533800-1600 A 2000/3200 ABottom Bottom47932 4794247933 47943Installation manual Rear connection (vertical or horizontal mounting) / Replacement kit (3 or 4 parts) 800-2000 A Vertical Horizontal 2500/3200 A Vertical Horizontal Vertical mounting 4000 A Vertical Horizontal 4000b/5000 A Vertical Horizontal Horizontal mounting 6300 A Vertical Installation manual47950 47964 47964 47966 47966 47968 47970 2x 47966 2x 47966 2x 47968 47950 47965 47965 47967 47967 47969 47971 2x 47967 2x 47967 2x 47969E46446E46445Drawout circuit breakersFront connection / Replacement kit (3 or 4 parts) 800-1600 A 2000/3200 A Top or bottom Top or bottom 47960 47962 47961 47963E46450Installation manual Rear connection (vertical or horizontal mounting) / Replacement kit (3 or 4 parts) 800-2000 A types N1/H1/H2 Vertical 800-1600 A types H3/L1 Horizontal 2500/3200 A types H1/H2 Vertical 2000/3200 A types H3/L1 Horizontal Vertical mounting 4000 A Vertical Horizontal 4000b/5000 A Vertical Horizontal Horizontal mounting 6300 A Vertical Installation manual47950 47964 47964 47966 47966 47968 47970 2x 47966 2x 47966 2x 47968 47950 3P 47965 47965 47967 47967 47969 47971 2x 47967 2x 47967 2x 47969E46446E46445Connection accessories4P 48466 48467Disconnectable front-connection adapter for fixed circuit breaker (3 or 4 parts)E468891600 A 2000/3200 A48464 48465Installation manual47950 48599 48600 48599 48600Interphase barriers / Replacement kit (3 parts)E46428For fixed rear-connected circuit breaker For drawout rear-connected circuit breakerInstallation manual47950 47829Additional support brackets for mounting on a backplateFor fixed rear-connected circuit breaker (2 parts)E477881]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NW: spare parts Connection0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Connection3P 4PFixed circuit breakersFront connection / Replacement kit (3 or 4 parts) 800-1600 A 2000/3200 A Top Top 47990 47992 47991 47993E95557E95533800-1600 A 2000/3200 ABottom Bottom47932 4794247933 47943Installation manual Rear connection (vertical or horizontal mounting) / Replacement kit (3 or 4 parts) 800-2000 A Vertical Horizontal 2500/3200 A Vertical Horizontal Vertical mounting 4000 A Vertical Horizontal 4000b/5000 A Vertical Horizontal Horizontal mounting 6300 A Vertical Installation manual47950 47964 47964 47966 47966 47968 47970 2x 47966 2x 47966 2x 47968 47950 47965 47965 47967 47967 47969 47971 2x 47967 2x 47967 2x 47969E46446E46445Drawout circuit breakersFront connection / Replacement kit (3 or 4 parts) 800-1600 A 2000/3200 A Top or bottom Top or bottom 47960 47962 47961 47963E46450Installation manual Rear connection (vertical or horizontal mounting) / Replacement kit (3 or 4 parts) 800-2000 A types N1/H1/H2 Vertical 800-1600 A types H3/L1 Horizontal 2500/3200 A types H1/H2 Vertical 2000/3200 A types H3/L1 Horizontal Vertical mounting 4000 A Vertical Horizontal 4000b/5000 A Vertical Horizontal Horizontal mounting 6300 A Vertical Installation manual47950 47964 47964 47966 47966 47968 47970 2x 47966 2x 47966 2x 47968 47950 3P 47965 47965 47967 47967 47969 47971 2x 47967 2x 47967 2x 47969E46446E46445Connection accessories4P 48466 48467Disconnectable front-connection adapter for fixed circuit breaker (3 or 4 parts)E468891600 A 2000/3200 A48464 48465Installation manual47950 48599 48600 48599 48600Interphase barriers / Replacement kit (3 parts)E46428For fixed rear-connected circuit breaker For drawout rear-connected circuit breakerInstallation manual47950 47829Additional support brackets for mounting on a backplateFor fixed rear-connected circuit breaker (2 parts)E477881]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="149">
		<raw><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NW: spare parts Micrologic control unit, communication option0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Replacement parts for Micrologic control unitsLong-time rating plug (limits setting range for higher accuracy) / 1 partStandard Low-setting option High-setting option Without long-time protection 0.4 at 1 x Ir 0.4 at 0.8 x Ir 0.8 at 1 x Ir off 33542 33543 33544 33545E46674Battery + coverE95540Battery (1 part) Cover (1 part)For Micrologic A For Micrologic P and H33593 33592 47067menuCommunication optionChassisModbus COM Digipact COM 6 wires terminal drawout (1 part) 6 wires terminal fixed (1 part) 33852 33855 47850 47075E95541Installation manual33088External sensorsExternal sensor for earth-fault protection (TCE) / 1 part Sensor ratingE46671400/2000 A 1000/4000 A 4000/6300 A34035 34036 48182E46671Source ground return (SGR) earth-fault protection / 1 part External sensor (SGR) MDGF summing module33579 48891E46672Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection + Vigi cable / 1 part (up to 3200 A) 280 mm x 115 mm 470 mm x 160 mm33573 33574Vigi cable or external voltage cable / 1 partVigi cable or external voltage cable 47090External power supply module (AD) / 1 part24-30 V DC 48-60 V DC 100-125 V DC 110-130 V AC 200-240 V AC 380-415 V AC 1 batteryE4778754440 54441 54442 54443 54444 54445 54446DB105360Battery module (BAT) / 1 part24 V DCL4 L3t Inpu 24VDC Output 24VDC G20A AD 22G1Test equipments / 1 partHand held test kit (HHTK) Full function test kit (FFTK) Test report edition come from FFTK FFTK test cable 2 pin for STR trip unit FFTK test cable 7 pin for Micrologic trip unit 33594 33595 34559 34560 33590E595541]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NW: spare parts Micrologic control unit, communication option0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Replacement parts for Micrologic control unitsLong-time rating plug (limits setting range for higher accuracy) / 1 partStandard Low-setting option High-setting option Without long-time protection 0.4 at 1 x Ir 0.4 at 0.8 x Ir 0.8 at 1 x Ir off 33542 33543 33544 33545E46674Battery + coverE95540Battery (1 part) Cover (1 part)For Micrologic A For Micrologic P and H33593 33592 47067menuCommunication optionChassisModbus COM Digipact COM 6 wires terminal drawout (1 part) 6 wires terminal fixed (1 part) 33852 33855 47850 47075E95541Installation manual33088External sensorsExternal sensor for earth-fault protection (TCE) / 1 part Sensor ratingE46671400/2000 A 1000/4000 A 4000/6300 A34035 34036 48182E46671Source ground return (SGR) earth-fault protection / 1 part External sensor (SGR) MDGF summing module33579 48891E46672Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection + Vigi cable / 1 part (up to 3200 A) 280 mm x 115 mm 470 mm x 160 mm33573 33574Vigi cable or external voltage cable / 1 partVigi cable or external voltage cable 47090External power supply module (AD) / 1 part24-30 V DC 48-60 V DC 100-125 V DC 110-130 V AC 200-240 V AC 380-415 V AC 1 batteryE4778754440 54441 54442 54443 54444 54445 54446DB105360Battery module (BAT) / 1 part24 V DCL4 L3t Inpu 24VDC Output 24VDC G20A AD 22G1Test equipments / 1 partHand held test kit (HHTK) Full function test kit (FFTK) Test report edition come from FFTK FFTK test cable 2 pin for STR trip unit FFTK test cable 7 pin for Micrologic trip unit 33594 33595 34559 34560 33590E595541]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="150">
		<raw><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NW: spare parts Remote operation0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Remote operationGear motorMCH (1 part) AC 50/60 HzE95172DCE95169 E95171Terminal block (1 part)48 V 100/130 V 200/240 V 250/277 V 380/415 V 440/480 V 24/30 V 48/60 V 100/125 V 200/250 V For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breaker47889 47893 47894 47895 47896 47897 47888 47889 47890 47891 47074 47849Fixed.Drawout. Installation manual 47951Closing and opening release (XF or MX)Standard coil (1 part) AC 50/60 Hz DC 12 V DC 24/30 V DC, 24 V AC 48/60 V DC, 48 V AC 100/130 V AC/DC 200/250 V AC/DC 277 V AC 380/480 V AC Communicating coil (1 part) AC 50/60 Hz 12 V DC DC 24/30 V DC, 24 V AC 48/60 V DC, 48 V AC 100/130 V AC/DC 200/250 V AC/DC 277 V AC 380/480 V AC Terminal block (1 part) For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breaker 33658 33659 33660 33661 33662 33663 33664 33032 33033 33034 33035 33036 33037 33038 47074 47849E95169E95170Fixed.E95171Drawout. Installation manual 47951Undervoltage release MNUndervoltage release (1 part) AC 50/60 Hz 24/30 V DC, 24 V AC DC 48/60 V DC, 48 V AC 100/130 V AC/DC 200/250 V AC/DC 380/480 V AC Terminal block (1 part) For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breaker 33668 33669 33670 33671 33673 47074 47849E95169E95170Fixed.E95171Drawout. Installation manual 47951MN delay unitMN delay unit (1 part)E46694R (non-adjustable) AC 50/60 Hz DC 48/60 V AC/DC 100/130 V AC/DC 200/250 V AC/DC 380/480 V AC/DC 33684 33685Installation manualRr (adjustable) 33680 33681 33682 33683 479511]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NW: spare parts Remote operation0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Remote operationGear motorMCH (1 part) AC 50/60 HzE95172DCE95169 E95171Terminal block (1 part)48 V 100/130 V 200/240 V 250/277 V 380/415 V 440/480 V 24/30 V 48/60 V 100/125 V 200/250 V For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breaker47889 47893 47894 47895 47896 47897 47888 47889 47890 47891 47074 47849Fixed.Drawout. Installation manual 47951Closing and opening release (XF or MX)Standard coil (1 part) AC 50/60 Hz DC 12 V DC 24/30 V DC, 24 V AC 48/60 V DC, 48 V AC 100/130 V AC/DC 200/250 V AC/DC 277 V AC 380/480 V AC Communicating coil (1 part) AC 50/60 Hz 12 V DC DC 24/30 V DC, 24 V AC 48/60 V DC, 48 V AC 100/130 V AC/DC 200/250 V AC/DC 277 V AC 380/480 V AC Terminal block (1 part) For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breaker 33658 33659 33660 33661 33662 33663 33664 33032 33033 33034 33035 33036 33037 33038 47074 47849E95169E95170Fixed.E95171Drawout. Installation manual 47951Undervoltage release MNUndervoltage release (1 part) AC 50/60 Hz 24/30 V DC, 24 V AC DC 48/60 V DC, 48 V AC 100/130 V AC/DC 200/250 V AC/DC 380/480 V AC Terminal block (1 part) For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breaker 33668 33669 33670 33671 33673 47074 47849E95169E95170Fixed.E95171Drawout. Installation manual 47951MN delay unitMN delay unit (1 part)E46694R (non-adjustable) AC 50/60 Hz DC 48/60 V AC/DC 100/130 V AC/DC 200/250 V AC/DC 380/480 V AC/DC 33684 33685Installation manualRr (adjustable) 33680 33681 33682 33683 479511]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="151">
		<raw><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NW: spare parts Chassis locking and accessories0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Chassis locking&amp;quot;Disconnected&amp;quot; position locking / 1 partBy padlocksE46451VCPO 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 same keys + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 different keys + adaptation kit 1 keylock Profalux (without adaptation kit): identical key not identified combination identical key identified 215470 combination identical key identified 215471 combination By Ronis keylocks Ronis 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 same keys + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 different keys + adaptation kit 1 keylock Ronis (without adaptation kit): identical key not identified combination identical key identified EL24135 combination identical key identified EL24153 combination identical key identified EL24315 combination Adaptation kit adaptation kit Profalux / Ronis (without keylock): adaptation kit Kirk adaptation kit Castell Installation manual By Profalux keylocks ProfaluxStandard 48568 48569 48570 33173 33174 33175 48572 48573 48574 33189 33190 33191 33192 48564 48565 48566 47952 47914Door interlock / 1 partRight and left-hand side of chassis (VPECD or VPECG)E46452Installation manual47952 48582Racking interlock5 partsE46453Installation manual47952 33767Breaker mismatch protection / 1 partBreaker mismatch protection (VDC)E46456Installation manual47952Chassis accessoriesAuxiliary terminal shield (CB) / 1 part800/4000 AE464584000b/6300 A Installation manual3P 4P 3P 4P48595 48596 48597 48598 47952 48721 48723 48722 48724 47952 48591Safety shutters + locking block / 1 part800/4000 AE464594000b/6300 A Installation manual3P 4P 3P 4PShutter locking block (for replacement) / 1 part2 parts for 800/4000 AE46460Installation manual 3P47952 4P 48434Earthing kit for chassisTypes for N1/H1/NA/HA48433 Note: the installation manual is enclosed.1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NW: spare parts Chassis locking and accessories0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Chassis locking&amp;quot;Disconnected&amp;quot; position locking / 1 partBy padlocksE46451VCPO 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 same keys + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 different keys + adaptation kit 1 keylock Profalux (without adaptation kit): identical key not identified combination identical key identified 215470 combination identical key identified 215471 combination By Ronis keylocks Ronis 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 same keys + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 different keys + adaptation kit 1 keylock Ronis (without adaptation kit): identical key not identified combination identical key identified EL24135 combination identical key identified EL24153 combination identical key identified EL24315 combination Adaptation kit adaptation kit Profalux / Ronis (without keylock): adaptation kit Kirk adaptation kit Castell Installation manual By Profalux keylocks ProfaluxStandard 48568 48569 48570 33173 33174 33175 48572 48573 48574 33189 33190 33191 33192 48564 48565 48566 47952 47914Door interlock / 1 partRight and left-hand side of chassis (VPECD or VPECG)E46452Installation manual47952 48582Racking interlock5 partsE46453Installation manual47952 33767Breaker mismatch protection / 1 partBreaker mismatch protection (VDC)E46456Installation manual47952Chassis accessoriesAuxiliary terminal shield (CB) / 1 part800/4000 AE464584000b/6300 A Installation manual3P 4P 3P 4P48595 48596 48597 48598 47952 48721 48723 48722 48724 47952 48591Safety shutters + locking block / 1 part800/4000 AE464594000b/6300 A Installation manual3P 4P 3P 4PShutter locking block (for replacement) / 1 part2 parts for 800/4000 AE46460Installation manual 3P47952 4P 48434Earthing kit for chassisTypes for N1/H1/NA/HA48433 Note: the installation manual is enclosed.1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="152">
		<raw><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NW: spare parts Clusters0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Clusters1 disconnecting contact cluster for chassis (see table below) (part 1)E9553833166Table : number of clusters required for the different chassis modelsChassis rating (A) Masterpact NW 3P N1 H1/H2 H3 L1 24 24 24 24 42 Masterpact NW 4P N1 H1/H2 H3 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 48 56 96 96 96 L1 32 32 32 32 56630 800 6 12 1000 6 12 1250 6 12 1600 12 12 2000 24 2500 24 3200 36 4000 42 4000b 72 5000 72 6300 72 Note: the minimum order is 6 parts.24 24 36 4232 32 48 56Racking handleRacking handleE9556147944DC rear connectionSerial connection kitFor NW10/20 DCDB10510948642For NW40 DCDB105110486431]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NW: spare parts Clusters0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Clusters1 disconnecting contact cluster for chassis (see table below) (part 1)E9553833166Table : number of clusters required for the different chassis modelsChassis rating (A) Masterpact NW 3P N1 H1/H2 H3 L1 24 24 24 24 42 Masterpact NW 4P N1 H1/H2 H3 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 48 56 96 96 96 L1 32 32 32 32 56630 800 6 12 1000 6 12 1250 6 12 1600 12 12 2000 24 2500 24 3200 36 4000 42 4000b 72 5000 72 6300 72 Note: the minimum order is 6 parts.24 24 36 4232 32 48 56Racking handleRacking handleE9556147944DC rear connectionSerial connection kitFor NW10/20 DCDB10510948642For NW40 DCDB105110486431]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="153">
		<raw><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NW: spare parts Circuit breaker locking and accessories0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Circuit breaker lockingPushbutton locking device / 1 partBy padlocksE4666648536Installation manual47951OFF position locking / 1 partBy padlocksE4673548539 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 same keys + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 different keys + adaptation kit 1 keylock Profalux (without adaptation kit): identical key not identified combination identical key identified 215470 combination identical key identified 215471 combination By Ronis keylocks Ronis 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 same keys + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 different keys + adaptation kit 1 keylock Ronis (without adaptation kit): identical key not identified combination identical key identified EL24135 combination identical key identified EL24153 combination identical key identified EL24315 combination Adaptation kit adaptation kit Profalux / Ronis (without keylock): adaptation kit Kirk adaptation kit Castell Installation manual By Profalux keylocks Profalux 48545 48546 48547 33173 33174 33175 48549 48550 48551 33189 33190 33191 33192 48541 48543 48542 47951Other circuit breaker accessoriesMechanical operation counter / 1 partOperation counter CDME4666748535Installation manual47951 Fixed 48601 48605 Drawout 48603 48604 48605Escutcheon and accessories / 1 partEscutcheon Transparent cover (IP 54) Escutcheon blanking plateE46669 E46668 E46670EscutcheonCoverBlanking plate Front coverInstallation manual47951 47939Front cover (3P / 4P) / 1 partE95535Installation manual47951 47940Spring charging handle / 1 partSpring charging handleE95536Installation manual47951Arc chute for Masterpact NW / 1 partType N1 Type H1/H2 (NW08 to NW40) Type H1/H2 (NW40b to NW63) Type H3 Type L1 Type NW DC Installation manual 3x 3x 6x 3x 3x 3x 3P 47935 47935 47936 47936 47937 47934 4x 4x 8x 4x 4x 4x 4P 47935 47935 47936 47936 47937 47934 47951E955371]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NW: spare parts Circuit breaker locking and accessories0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Circuit breaker lockingPushbutton locking device / 1 partBy padlocksE4666648536Installation manual47951OFF position locking / 1 partBy padlocksE4673548539 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 same keys + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 different keys + adaptation kit 1 keylock Profalux (without adaptation kit): identical key not identified combination identical key identified 215470 combination identical key identified 215471 combination By Ronis keylocks Ronis 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 same keys + adaptation kit 2 locks 2 different keys + adaptation kit 1 keylock Ronis (without adaptation kit): identical key not identified combination identical key identified EL24135 combination identical key identified EL24153 combination identical key identified EL24315 combination Adaptation kit adaptation kit Profalux / Ronis (without keylock): adaptation kit Kirk adaptation kit Castell Installation manual By Profalux keylocks Profalux 48545 48546 48547 33173 33174 33175 48549 48550 48551 33189 33190 33191 33192 48541 48543 48542 47951Other circuit breaker accessoriesMechanical operation counter / 1 partOperation counter CDME4666748535Installation manual47951 Fixed 48601 48605 Drawout 48603 48604 48605Escutcheon and accessories / 1 partEscutcheon Transparent cover (IP 54) Escutcheon blanking plateE46669 E46668 E46670EscutcheonCoverBlanking plate Front coverInstallation manual47951 47939Front cover (3P / 4P) / 1 partE95535Installation manual47951 47940Spring charging handle / 1 partSpring charging handleE95536Installation manual47951Arc chute for Masterpact NW / 1 partType N1 Type H1/H2 (NW08 to NW40) Type H1/H2 (NW40b to NW63) Type H3 Type L1 Type NW DC Installation manual 3x 3x 6x 3x 3x 3x 3P 47935 47935 47936 47936 47937 47934 4x 4x 8x 4x 4x 4x 4P 47935 47935 47936 47936 47937 47934 47951E955371]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="154">
		<raw><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NW: spare parts Mechanical interlocking for source changeover0Mechanical interlocking for source changeoverInterlocking of 2 devices using connecting rodsComplete assembly with 2 adaptation fixtures + rods 2 Masterpact NW fixed devices 2 Masterpact NW drawout devices Can be used with 1 NW fixed + 1 NW drawout. Note: the installation manual is enclosed. 48612 48612E47762Interlocking of 2 devices using cables (1)Choose 2 adaptation sets (1 for each device + 1 set of cables) 1 adaptation fixture for Masterpact NW fixed devices 1 adaptation fixture for Masterpact NW drawout devices 1 set of 2 cables (1) Can be used with any combination of NT or NW, fixed or drawout devices. 47926 47926 33209Interlocking of 3 devices using cablesChoose 3 adaptation (inclusing 3 adaptation fixtures + cables) 3 sources, only 1 device closed, fixed or drawout devices 2 sources + 1 coupling, fixed or drawout devices 2 normal + 1 replacement source, fixed or drawout devices 48610 48609 48608 48614Cable-type door interlock1 complete assembly for Masterpact NW fixed or drawout device Note: the installation manual is enclosed.1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NW: spare parts Mechanical interlocking for source changeover0Mechanical interlocking for source changeoverInterlocking of 2 devices using connecting rodsComplete assembly with 2 adaptation fixtures + rods 2 Masterpact NW fixed devices 2 Masterpact NW drawout devices Can be used with 1 NW fixed + 1 NW drawout. Note: the installation manual is enclosed. 48612 48612E47762Interlocking of 2 devices using cables (1)Choose 2 adaptation sets (1 for each device + 1 set of cables) 1 adaptation fixture for Masterpact NW fixed devices 1 adaptation fixture for Masterpact NW drawout devices 1 set of 2 cables (1) Can be used with any combination of NT or NW, fixed or drawout devices. 47926 47926 33209Interlocking of 3 devices using cablesChoose 3 adaptation (inclusing 3 adaptation fixtures + cables) 3 sources, only 1 device closed, fixed or drawout devices 2 sources + 1 coupling, fixed or drawout devices 2 normal + 1 replacement source, fixed or drawout devices 48610 48609 48608 48614Cable-type door interlock1 complete assembly for Masterpact NW fixed or drawout device Note: the installation manual is enclosed.1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="155">
		<raw><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NW: spare parts Indication contacts0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Indication contactsON/OFF indication contacts (OF) / 12 parts1 additional block of 4 contacts Wiring For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breaker 47887 47074 47849E46689Installation manual47951 6 A - 240 V Low-level For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breaker 47915 47916 47074 47849&amp;quot;Fault trip&amp;quot; indication contacts (SDE) / 1 partChangeover contact (SDE)E46691WiringInstallation manual47951 PF 47080 47081 47074 47849 47951 33170 33171&amp;quot;Ready to close&amp;quot; contact (1 max.) / 1 part1 changeover contact (5 A - 240 V) 1 low-level changeover contact Wiring For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breaker Installation manual Changeover contacts CE, CD, CT 6 A - 240 V Low-levelE46438 E46661&amp;quot;Connected, disconnected, test position&amp;quot; indication contact (carriage switches) / 1 partInstallation manual47952 48560Set of additional actuaters for carriage switches / 1 set1 setCombined closed / connected contacts for use with 1 auxiliary contact / 1 partE466901 contact (5 A - 240 V) or 1 low-level contact48477 48478Installation manual47952 BPFE 48534Electrical closing pushbutton / 1 partE466771 pushbuttonInstallation manual47951 47849 47850 47900Auxiliary terminals for chassis alone3 wire terminal (1 part) 6 wire terminal (1 part) Jumpers (10 parts)1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NW: spare parts Indication contacts0(*) Installation manual must be ordered separatly, it is not supply with the component.Indication contactsON/OFF indication contacts (OF) / 12 parts1 additional block of 4 contacts Wiring For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breaker 47887 47074 47849E46689Installation manual47951 6 A - 240 V Low-level For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breaker 47915 47916 47074 47849&amp;quot;Fault trip&amp;quot; indication contacts (SDE) / 1 partChangeover contact (SDE)E46691WiringInstallation manual47951 PF 47080 47081 47074 47849 47951 33170 33171&amp;quot;Ready to close&amp;quot; contact (1 max.) / 1 part1 changeover contact (5 A - 240 V) 1 low-level changeover contact Wiring For fixed circuit breaker For drawout circuit breaker Installation manual Changeover contacts CE, CD, CT 6 A - 240 V Low-levelE46438 E46661&amp;quot;Connected, disconnected, test position&amp;quot; indication contact (carriage switches) / 1 partInstallation manual47952 48560Set of additional actuaters for carriage switches / 1 set1 setCombined closed / connected contacts for use with 1 auxiliary contact / 1 partE466901 contact (5 A - 240 V) or 1 low-level contact48477 48478Installation manual47952 BPFE 48534Electrical closing pushbutton / 1 partE466771 pushbuttonInstallation manual47951 47849 47850 47900Auxiliary terminals for chassis alone3 wire terminal (1 part) 6 wire terminal (1 part) Jumpers (10 parts)1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="156">
		<raw><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NW: spare parts Instructions0InstructionsChassis accessories Circuit breaker accessories Fixed and drawout circuit breaker User manual 47952 47951 47950 47954 47955 47957 47958 33076 33077 33079 33080 33082 33083 33085 33086 33088NW AC (French) NW AC (English) NW DC (French) NW DC (English) Micrologic user manual 20/50 (French) 20/50 (English) 2A/7A (French) 2A/7A (English) 5P/7P (French) 5P/7P (English) 5H/7H (French) 5H/7H (English) Modbus communication notice for manual1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Catalogue numbersMasterpact NW: spare parts Instructions0InstructionsChassis accessories Circuit breaker accessories Fixed and drawout circuit breaker User manual 47952 47951 47950 47954 47955 47957 47958 33076 33077 33079 33080 33082 33083 33085 33086 33088NW AC (French) NW AC (English) NW DC (French) NW DC (English) Micrologic user manual 20/50 (French) 20/50 (English) 2A/7A (French) 2A/7A (English) 5P/7P (French) 5P/7P (English) 5H/7H (French) 5H/7H (English) Modbus communication notice for manual1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="157">
		<raw><![CDATA[Order formMasterpact NT and NW0To indicate your choice, check the applicable square boxes and enter the appropriate information in the rectanglesIndication contactsOF - ON/OFF indication contacts Standard 4 OF 6 A-240 V AC (10 A-240 V AC and low-level for NW) Alternate 1 OF low-level for NT Max. 4 qty Additional 1 block of 4 OF for NW Max. 2 Max. 8 Max. 8 qty qty qty EF - combined &amp;quot;connected/closed&amp;quot; contacts 1 EF 6 A-240 V AC for NW 1 EF low-level for NW SDE - &amp;quot;fault-trip&amp;quot; indication contact Standard 1 SDE 6 A-240 V AC Additional 1 SDE 6 A-240 V AC Programmable contacts Carriage switches CE - &amp;quot;connected&amp;quot; position CD - &amp;quot;disconnected&amp;quot; position CT - &amp;quot;test&amp;quot; position 2 M2C contacts Low level Max. 3 for NW/NT Max. 3 for NW - 2 for NT Max. 3 for NW - 1 for NTCircuit breaker or switch-disconnectorMasterpact type Rating Sensor rating Circuit breaker Special circuit breaker Switch-disconnector Number of poles Brand Type of equipment NT A AQuantityNWN1, H1, H2, H3, L1 H2 anticorrosion, H10 (NW) NA, HA, HF, ES, HA10 (NW) 3 or 4 MG Fixed Drawout with chassis Drawout without chassis (moving part only) Chassis alone SD1 SDE low level 6 M6C contacts 6 A-240 V AC qty qty qty qty V V V Low level 6 A-240 V ACOption: neutral on right sideAC - NW actuator for 6 CE - 3 CD - 0 CT additional carriage switchesRemote operationRemote ON/OFF MCH - gear motor XF - closing voltage release MX - opening voltage release PF - &amp;quot;ready to close&amp;quot; contactEarthing switch kit for chassisMicrologic control unitA - ammeter P - power meter H - harmonic meter LR - long-time rating plug 2.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 Remote tripping BPFE - electrical closing pushbutton Res - electrical reset option RAR - automatic reset option MN - undervoltage release R - delay unit (non-adjustable) Res - adjustable delay unit 2nd MX - shunt release VV VStandard 0.4 to 1 Ir Low setting 0.4 to 0.8 Ir High setting 0.8 to 1 Ir LR OFFVAD - external power-supply module BAT - battery moduleLockingVBP - ON/OFF pushbutton locking (by transparent cover + padlocks) OFF position locking: VCPO - by padlocks VSPO - by keylocks Keyock kit (w/o keylock) 1 keylock 2 identical keylocks, 1 key Chassis locking in &amp;quot;disconnected&amp;quot; position: VSPD - by keylocks Keyock kit (w/o keylock) 1 keylock 2 identical keylocks, 1 key 2 keylocks, different keys VPEC - door interlock Profalux Profalux Profalux Ronis Ronis Ronis Ronis Ronis Castell Ronis Ronis RonisTCE - external sensor (CT) for neutral and residual earth-fault protection TCE - external sensor (CT) for over sized neutral (3P - Micrologic P / H) and residual earth-fault protection TCW - external sensor for SGR protection Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection PTE - external voltage connector NT (280 x 115 mm) NW (470 x 160 mm)2 keylocks, different keys (NW) Profalux Profalux Kirk Profalux Profalux ProfaluxCommunicationCOM module JBus/ ModBus Digipact Device Device Chassis ChassisEco COM moduleModBus (for XF or MX communicating release) Top Top Top Bottom Bottom Bottom VPOC - racking interlock IPA - cable-type door interlock VDC - mismatch protectionOptional connected/disconnected/test position lock On right-hand side chassis On left-hand side chassisConnectionHorizontal Vertical Front Vertical-connection adapters Cable-lug adapters Arc chute screen Interphase barriers Spreaders Disconnectable front connection adapter Lugs for 240v or 300v cablesNT - FC fixed, draw. NT - FC fixed, draw. NT - FC fixed NT, NW fixed, drawout NT fixed, drawout NW fixed NT fixed, drawoutVIVC - shutter position indication and locking for NW IBPO - racking interlock between crank and OFF pushbutton for NW DAE - automatic spring discharge before breaker removal for NWAccessoriesVO - safety shutters on chassis for NT and NW CDM - mechanical operation counter NT, NW CB - auxiliary terminal shield for chassis NT, NW CC - arc chute cover for fixed NT CDP - escutcheon NT, NW CP - transparent cover for escutcheon NT, NW OP - blanking plate for escutcheon NT, NW Brackets for mounting Test kits NW fixed Mini test kit On backplates Portable test kit XMicrologic control unit functions: 2.0 : basic protection (long time + inst.) 5.0 : selective protection (long time + short time + inst.) 6.0 : selective + earth-fault protection (long time + short time + inst. + earth-fault) 7.0 : selective + earth-leakage protection (long time + short time + inst. + earth-leakage)1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Order formMasterpact NT and NW0To indicate your choice, check the applicable square boxes and enter the appropriate information in the rectanglesIndication contactsOF - ON/OFF indication contacts Standard 4 OF 6 A-240 V AC (10 A-240 V AC and low-level for NW) Alternate 1 OF low-level for NT Max. 4 qty Additional 1 block of 4 OF for NW Max. 2 Max. 8 Max. 8 qty qty qty EF - combined &amp;quot;connected/closed&amp;quot; contacts 1 EF 6 A-240 V AC for NW 1 EF low-level for NW SDE - &amp;quot;fault-trip&amp;quot; indication contact Standard 1 SDE 6 A-240 V AC Additional 1 SDE 6 A-240 V AC Programmable contacts Carriage switches CE - &amp;quot;connected&amp;quot; position CD - &amp;quot;disconnected&amp;quot; position CT - &amp;quot;test&amp;quot; position 2 M2C contacts Low level Max. 3 for NW/NT Max. 3 for NW - 2 for NT Max. 3 for NW - 1 for NTCircuit breaker or switch-disconnectorMasterpact type Rating Sensor rating Circuit breaker Special circuit breaker Switch-disconnector Number of poles Brand Type of equipment NT A AQuantityNWN1, H1, H2, H3, L1 H2 anticorrosion, H10 (NW) NA, HA, HF, ES, HA10 (NW) 3 or 4 MG Fixed Drawout with chassis Drawout without chassis (moving part only) Chassis alone SD1 SDE low level 6 M6C contacts 6 A-240 V AC qty qty qty qty V V V Low level 6 A-240 V ACOption: neutral on right sideAC - NW actuator for 6 CE - 3 CD - 0 CT additional carriage switchesRemote operationRemote ON/OFF MCH - gear motor XF - closing voltage release MX - opening voltage release PF - &amp;quot;ready to close&amp;quot; contactEarthing switch kit for chassisMicrologic control unitA - ammeter P - power meter H - harmonic meter LR - long-time rating plug 2.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 Remote tripping BPFE - electrical closing pushbutton Res - electrical reset option RAR - automatic reset option MN - undervoltage release R - delay unit (non-adjustable) Res - adjustable delay unit 2nd MX - shunt release VV VStandard 0.4 to 1 Ir Low setting 0.4 to 0.8 Ir High setting 0.8 to 1 Ir LR OFFVAD - external power-supply module BAT - battery moduleLockingVBP - ON/OFF pushbutton locking (by transparent cover + padlocks) OFF position locking: VCPO - by padlocks VSPO - by keylocks Keyock kit (w/o keylock) 1 keylock 2 identical keylocks, 1 key Chassis locking in &amp;quot;disconnected&amp;quot; position: VSPD - by keylocks Keyock kit (w/o keylock) 1 keylock 2 identical keylocks, 1 key 2 keylocks, different keys VPEC - door interlock Profalux Profalux Profalux Ronis Ronis Ronis Ronis Ronis Castell Ronis Ronis RonisTCE - external sensor (CT) for neutral and residual earth-fault protection TCE - external sensor (CT) for over sized neutral (3P - Micrologic P / H) and residual earth-fault protection TCW - external sensor for SGR protection Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection PTE - external voltage connector NT (280 x 115 mm) NW (470 x 160 mm)2 keylocks, different keys (NW) Profalux Profalux Kirk Profalux Profalux ProfaluxCommunicationCOM module JBus/ ModBus Digipact Device Device Chassis ChassisEco COM moduleModBus (for XF or MX communicating release) Top Top Top Bottom Bottom Bottom VPOC - racking interlock IPA - cable-type door interlock VDC - mismatch protectionOptional connected/disconnected/test position lock On right-hand side chassis On left-hand side chassisConnectionHorizontal Vertical Front Vertical-connection adapters Cable-lug adapters Arc chute screen Interphase barriers Spreaders Disconnectable front connection adapter Lugs for 240v or 300v cablesNT - FC fixed, draw. NT - FC fixed, draw. NT - FC fixed NT, NW fixed, drawout NT fixed, drawout NW fixed NT fixed, drawoutVIVC - shutter position indication and locking for NW IBPO - racking interlock between crank and OFF pushbutton for NW DAE - automatic spring discharge before breaker removal for NWAccessoriesVO - safety shutters on chassis for NT and NW CDM - mechanical operation counter NT, NW CB - auxiliary terminal shield for chassis NT, NW CC - arc chute cover for fixed NT CDP - escutcheon NT, NW CP - transparent cover for escutcheon NT, NW OP - blanking plate for escutcheon NT, NW Brackets for mounting Test kits NW fixed Mini test kit On backplates Portable test kit XMicrologic control unit functions: 2.0 : basic protection (long time + inst.) 5.0 : selective protection (long time + short time + inst.) 6.0 : selective + earth-fault protection (long time + short time + inst. + earth-fault) 7.0 : selective + earth-leakage protection (long time + short time + inst. + earth-leakage)1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="158">
		<raw><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: b complete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochures… b selection guides from the e-catalog. b product discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contacts…Training allows you to acquire the Merlin Gerin expertise (installation design, work with power on, etc.) for increased efficiency and a guarantee of improved customer service. The training catalogue includes beginner’s courses in electrical distribution, knowledge of MV and LV switchgear, operation and maintenance of installations, design of LV installations to give but a few examples.156 1]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[This international site allows you to access all the Merlin Gerin products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: b complete library: technical documents, catalogs, FAQs, brochures… b selection guides from the e-catalog. b product discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, the list of country contacts…Training allows you to acquire the Merlin Gerin expertise (installation design, work with power on, etc.) for increased efficiency and a guarantee of improved customer service. The training catalogue includes beginner’s courses in electrical distribution, knowledge of MV and LV switchgear, operation and maintenance of installations, design of LV installations to give but a few examples.156 1]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="159">
		<raw><![CDATA[]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[]]></basicChars>
	</page>
	<page id="160">
		<raw><![CDATA[Schneider Electric Industries SAS89, boulevard Franklin Roosevelt F - 92500 Rueil-Malmaison (France) Tel : +33 (0)1 41 29 85 00 http://www.schneider-electric.com http://www.merlin-gerin.comhttp://www.schneider-electric.coAs standards, specifications and designs change from time to time, please ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication. Printed on recycled paper. Design: Schneider Electric - Ameg Photos: Schneider Electric Printed: Pont de Claix/JPF - made in FranceABTED200143EN12-2006ART56504 © 2006 - Schneider Electric - All rights reserve]]></raw>
		<basicChars><![CDATA[Schneider Electric Industries SAS89, boulevard Franklin Roosevelt F - 92500 Rueil-Malmaison (France) Tel : +33 (0)1 41 29 85 00 http://www.schneider-electric.com http://www.merlin-gerin.comhttp://www.schneider-electric.coAs standards, specifications and designs change from time to time, please ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication. Printed on recycled paper. Design: Schneider Electric - Ameg Photos: Schneider Electric Printed: Pont de Claix/JPF - made in FranceABTED200143EN12-2006ART56504 © 2006 - Schneider Electric - All rights reserve]]></basicChars>
	</page>

</searchText>